The URL can be used to link to this page

R-00-01-13-10F5 - 1/13/2000WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for the construction of a water and wastewater lab, and WHEREAS, Pitt Building Company has submitted the lowest and best bid, and WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of Pitt Building Company, Now Therefore BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS, That the Mayor is hereby authorized and directed to execute on behalf of the City a contract with Pitt Building Company for the construction of a water and wastewater lab, a copy of said contract being attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes. The City Council hereby finds and declares that written notice of the date, hour, place and subject of the meeting at which this Resolution was adopted was posted and that such meeting was open to the public as required by law at all times during which this Resolution and the subject matter hereof were discussed, considered and formally acted upon, all as required by the Open Meetings Act, Chapter 551, Texas Government Code, as amended, and the Act. RESOLVED this 13th day of January, 2000. ATTEST: R: \WPDOCS \RESOLUTI \R00113FS .WPD /sc RESOLUTION NO. R- 00- 01- 13 -10F5 City Secretary City of Round Rock, Texas 01/11/00 09:38 $218 5563 PUBLIC WORKS CITY HALL Ij 002 January 5, 2000 Mr. Larry Madsen Director of Special Projects City of Round Rock Public Works Dept. 2008 Enterprise Round Rock, Texas 78664 RE: Water and Wastewater Testing Lab Dear Larry, This is to recommend Pitt Building Company, Inc., as the general contractor for this project. Their bid was the lowest of five (5) bidders, and all bids were in a very close range. 1 have also checked some of their project references and have gotten very good reports. I have enclosed their Contractor's Qualification Statement for further information on the firm. I'm looking forward to working with the City on making this a successful project. Please call if you should have any questions or require further information. Sincerely, Mac Ragsdale, A.I.A. Encl. AUSTIN ARCUITECIURE PLUS INC. 1907 N. LAMAR BLVD. M260 AUSTIN, TX 78705 archplus ®swbeU.net V(512) 478 -0970 F(512) 4780920 SRN -11 -2000 09:50 218 5563 97: P. 02 ROJECT: CTT'Y OF ROUND ROCK WATER & WASTEWATER TESTING LAB BID TABULATION 1 —3-- 9 g ARCBTTECTURE + PLUS Architecture, Planning, & Interiors 1907 N. Lamar Blvd., Ste. 260 Austin, Texas 78705 DEC- 8 -99 WED 12:00 A+ ARCHITECTS ESTIMATE: CAL. DAYS: 150 ADDENDA: 3 ALTERNATIVES: ID. ?R: Texas Cornerstone Coffman Commercial WTL Master Builders T -Corp. Pitt Building Co. P (512)478 -0970 ROPOSAL GUARANTEE: 13B-BID BOND CC-CASHIERS CHECK CTCCERTIFIED CHECK X X X X X ECEIPT OF ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGED: OTAL AMOUNT BASE BID: $434,090 $389,000 $437,625 $419,000 $374,907 LTERNATIVES: ADD or (DEDUCT): FAX NO. 5124780920 P. 02 Cynar Roof NO. 1 0 $1,000 $1,300 $1,500 $1,500 NO.2 NO. 3 NO.4 NO. 5 OTAL BASE BID + ALTERNATIVES: THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 13th day of January 2000 by and between (Owner) City of Round Rock, Texas of the State of Texas, acting through Robert A. Stluka, Jr., Mayor, thereunto duly authorized so to do, hereinafter termed OWNER, and (Contractor) Pitt Building Co., Inc. of Round Rock, Texas, County of Williamson, and State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by OWNER, and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the said OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: WATER AND WASTEWATER TESTING LAB Further described as the work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, supervision, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereof, and in accordance with the Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions of Agreement, Special Conditions, Technical Specifications, Plans, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory material thereof, and the Specifications and Addenda therefor, as prepared by Mac Ragsdale of Architecture Plus, herein entitled the ARCHITECT, each of which has been identified by the CONTRACTOR'S written Proposal, the General Conditions of the Agreement, and the Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds hereof, and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within 10 (ten) calendar days after the date written notice to do so have been given to him, and to complete the same within 150 (one hundred fifty) calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed, subject to such extensions of time as are provided by the General Page 1 of 2 and Special Conditions. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Contract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions of the Contract. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the year and day first above written. CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS PITT BUILDER CO., INC. (OWNER) (CONTRACTOR) BY: ATTEST: Robert A. Stluka, Jr. Mayor City Secretary BY: Tom C. Pitt its President (Typed name) (Title) ATTEST: Secretary, if Contractor is a Corporation or otherwise registered with the Secretary of State (The following to be executed if the Contractor is a Corporation.) I, Jed Adams, certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as Contractor herein; that Tom C. Pitt, who signed this Contract on behalf of the Contractor was then President (official title) of said Corporation, that said Contract was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation, that said Corporation by authority of its governing body, and is within the scope of its corporate powers. Corporate Seal Signed: C:\My Documents \lm \w -ww lab at wtp agreement.wpd/Im/lk Page 2 of 2 DATE: January 7, 2000 SUBJECT: City Council Meeting - January 13, 2000 ITEM: 10.F.5. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor to execute a contract with Pitt Building Company for a water and wastewater lab. Five bids were received on December 7, 1999, and Pitt Building Company of Round Rock was the lowest bidder at $374,907.00. Architect Mac Ragsdale, has reviewed the qualifications of the contractor and along with staff, recommends approval. Staff Resource Person: Jim Nuse, Public Works Director. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 APPR CITY 1 1 VED BY RNEY PROJECT MANUAL WATER and WASTEWATER TESTING LAB for the Cli OF ROUND ROCK Prepared by ARCHITECTURE + PLUS 1907 N. Lamar Blvd., #260 Austin, Texas 78705 (512) 478-0970 November 15, 1999 2- 00- 01- 13 - 10F5 PROJECT MANUAL FOR WATER and WASTEWATER TESTING LAB for the CITY OF ROUND ROCK CITY COUNCIL MEMBERS Robert Stluka, Mayor Tom Nielson, Mayor Pro -Tem Earl Hairston Earl Palmer Rick Stewart Martha Chavez Jimmy Joseph CITY MANAGER Robert L. Bennett, Jr., AICP ARCHITECT Architecture + Plus 1907 N. Lamar, Ste. 260 Austin, Texas 78705 (512) 478 -0970 CIVIL ENGINEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK Department of Public Works 2008 Enterprise Round Rock, Texas 78664 (512) 218 -5555 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Fisher Hagood, Inc. One Chisolm Trail, #5200 Round Rock, Texas 78681 (512) 244 -1546 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Myers & Associates 2300 S. IH -35, //200 Round Rock, Texas 78681 (512) 255 -4731 —. r at It. * V 9 • 11 -r5•9c7 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Title Page Table of Contents 01010 Summary of Work 01020 Allowances 01030 Alternative Bids 01045 Cutting and Patching 01300 Submittals 01400 Quality Control 01500 Temporary Facilities 01600 Material and Equipment 01700 Contract Closeout PROJECT MANUAL WATER and WASTEWATER TESTING LAB for the CITY OF ROUND ROCK TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REOUIREMENTS. CONTRACT FORMS. & CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Section Description Paee 1.0 Notice to Bidders NB -1 2.0 Bid Documents BD -1 3.0 Post Bid Documents PBD -1 4.0 General Conditions GC -1 5.0 Special Conditions SC -1 6.0 Technical Specifications TS -1 (General & Civil) 7.0 Geotechnical Report TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ARCHITECTURAL & MEP DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02222 Excavation for Buildings 02223 Backfilling for Buildings 02250 Compaction Control and Testing 02281 Termite Control 02905 Landscaping DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04410 Stone Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06193 Plate Connected Wood Trusses 06200 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07460 Siding 07611 Sheet Metal Roofing 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 08111 Standard Steel Doors 08112 Standard Steel Frames 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board Systems 09300 Tile 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting 09950 Wall Coverings DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12345 Laboratory Casework and Equipment DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 Not Used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 General Provisions 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15180 Insulation 15190 Inside Utility, Trench, Excavation, Backfill & Comp. 15191 Outside Utility, Trench, Excavation, Backfill & Comp. 15400 Water Distribution System 15405 Liquid Waste Transfer 15440 Plumbing Equipment 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 15600 Mechanical Equipment D -X System 15810 Air Distribution (Standard) 15850 Balancing and Testing TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 General 16060 Schedule of Values 16110 Raceways 16120 Wire and Cable 16130 Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16140 Devices 16155 Manual Motor Starters 16170 Safety Disconnect Switch 16195 Contactors 16430 Fuses 16450 Grounding 16460 Transformer- -Dry Type 16471 Branch Circuit Panelboard 16510 Interior Lighting System 16520 Exterior Lighting System 16740 Empty Raceway TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 r WATER & WASTEWATER TESTING LAB FOR THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK The following specification sections were prepared by Fisher Hagood, Inc.: 02222 - EXCAVATION FOR BUILDINGS 02223 - BACKFILLING FOR BUILDINGS 02250 - COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS rt� • Fisher Hagood, Inc. CIVIL & STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS One Chisholm Trail Suite 5200 Round Rock, Toren 78881 (512) 244 -1548 FHI - 99109 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS & CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Section TABLE OF CONTENTS Description Page 1.0 Notice to Bidders NB -1 2.0 Bid Documents BD -1 3.0 Post Bid Documents PBD -1 4.0 General Conditions GC -1 5.0 Special Conditions SC -1 6.0 Technical Specifications TS -1 7.0 Plans, Details and Notes PDN -1 table.mst/spec 1.0 NOTICE TO BIDDERS PROJECT: NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed bids addresssed to the Purchasing Agent, City of Round Rock, 221 E. Main, Round Rock, Texas 78664 -5299, for furnishing all labor, material, and equipment and performing all work required for Water and Wastewater Testing Lab Facilities City of Round Rock Water Treatment Plant Round Rock, Texas will be received until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, December 2, 1999, then publicly opened and read at City Council Chambers, 1st Floor at the above address. BID SECURITY: Bid Bond or Cashier's Check equal to 5% of base bid shall accompany bid. DOCUMENT SECURITY: $50.00 per set, refundable. PRE -BID CONFERENCE: 2:00 p.m., Monday, November 22, 1999 City of Round Rock Water Treatment Plant Main Building Bids shall be submitted on City of Round Rock bid form. Plans and Specifications can be obtained at the Architect's Office, Architecture + Plus, 1907 N. Lamar Blvd., #260, Austin, Texas 78705, (512) 478 -0970, upon deposit of a check or money order in the amount specified as Document Security. Documents may be examined at the following places: • F.W. Dodge Offices in Austin and Dodge Scan AGC Offices in Austin ABC Offices in Austin Bids shall be valid for a period of not less than forty -five calendar days from the date of the bid opening. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any formalities of the bidding and to require evidence of qualification for prime bidders and listed sub - contractors to include financial statements. The successful bidder will be expected to execute the standard contract prepared by the City of Round Rock, and to furnish performance and payment bonds as described in the bid documents. Contractors and subcontractors shall pay to laborers, workmen, and mechanics the prevailing wage rates as determined by the City of Round Rock. NB -1 2.0 BID DOCUMENTS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Prior to submitting any proposal, bidders are required to read the plans, specifications, proposal, contract and bond forms carefully; to inform themselves by their independent research, test and investigation of the difficulties to be encountered and judge for themselves of the accessibility of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the work and the time required for its completion and obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal. 2. Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the plans, specifications, or other documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he should notify at once the Engineer and obtain clarification or addendum prior to submitting any bid. 3. It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received at the place and time named in the Notice to Bidders. Bids received after closing time will be returned unopened. 4. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes plainly marked "Sealed Bid" and showing the name of the project, the job number if applicable, and the opening date and time. 5. Bids shall be submitted on proposal forms furnished by the City of Round Rock. 6. All proposals shall be accompanied by a certified cashier's check upon a National or State bank in an amount not less than five percent (5 %) of the total maximum bid price, payable without recourse to the City of Round Rock, or a bid bond in the same amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract and execute performance and payment bonds, as stipulated by item 11 below, within ten (10) days after notice of award of contract to him. Proposal guarantees must be submitted in the same sealed envelope with the proposal. Proposals submitted without check or bid bonds will not be considered. 7. All bid securities will be returned to the respective bidders within twenty -five (25) days after bids are opened, except those which the owner elects to hold until the successful bidder has executed the contract. Thereafter, all remaining securities, including security of the successful bidder, will be returned within sixty (60) days. 8. Until the award of the contract, the City of Round Rock reserves the right to reject any and all proposals and to waive technicalities; to advertise for new proposals; or biddoc.mst/spec BD -1 to do the work otherwise when the best interest of the City of Round Rock will be thereby promoted. 9. In case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the statement of prices in the bids, the City of Round Rock reserves the right to consider the most favorable analysis thereof, or to reject the bid. Unreasonable (or unbalanced) prices submitted in a bid may result in rejection of such bid or other bids. 10. Award of the contract, if awarded, will be made within sixty (60) days after opening of the proposals, and no bidder may withdraw his proposal within said sixty (60) day period of time unless a prior award is made. 11. Within ten (10) days after written notification of award of the contract, the successful bidder must furnish a performance bond and a payment bond in the amount of one - hundred percent (100 %) of the total contract price. If the total contract price is $25,000.00 or less, the performance and payment bonds will not be required. Said performance bond and payment bond shall be from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas, with approval prior to bid opening, indicating it is authorized and admitted to write surety bonds in this state. In the event the bond exceeds $100,000.00, the surety must also (1) hold a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of $100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in this state and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety or reinsurer on obligations permitted or required under federal law. In determining whether the surety or reinsurer holds a valid certificate of authority, the City may rely on the list of companies holding certificates of authority as published in the Federal Register covering the date on which the bond is to be executed. 12. If the total contract price is less than $25,000.00 the performance and payment bond requirement will be waived by the City of Round Rock. Payment will be made following completion of the work. 13. Failure to execute the construction contract within ten (10) days of written notification of award or failure to furnish the performance bond, or letter of credit if applicable, biddoc.msUspec BD -2 and payment bond as required by item 11 above, shall be just cause for the annulment of the award. In case of the annulment of the award, the proposal guarantee shall become the property of the City of Round Rock, not as a penalty, but as a liquidated damage. 14. No contract shall be binding upon the City of Round Rock until it has been signed by its Mayor after having been duly authorized to do so by the City Council. 15. The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has furnished certification of all insurance required and such has been approved by the City of Round Rock, nor shall the contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until proof of all similar insurance that is required of the subcontractor has been furnished and approved. The certificate of insurance form included in the contract documents must be used by the Contractor's insurer to furnish proof of insurance. 16. Any quantities given in any portion of the contract documents, including the plans, are estimates only, and the actual amount of work required may differ somewhat from the estimates. The basis for the payment shall be the actual amount of work done and/or material furnished. 17. Bids shall be submitted on a separated contract basis. No Texas sales tax shall be included in the prices bid for materials consumed or incorporated into the finished product under this contract. This contract is issued by an organization which is qualified for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Section 151.309(5) of the Texas Tax Code. The City of Round Rock will issue an exemption certificate to the Contractor. The Contractor must then issue a resale certificate to the material supplier for materials purchased. The Contractor must have a valid sales tax permit in order to issue a resale certificate. In obtaining consumable materials, the Contractor will issue a resale certificate in lieu of payment of sales tax, and the following conditions shall be observed; 1) The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporate, materials to the City of Round Rock at the time and point of receipt by the Contractor; • 2) The Contractor will be paid for these consumable materials by the City of Round Rock as soon as practicable. Payment will not be made directly but considered subsidiary to the pertinent bid item. The Contractor's monthly estimate will state that the estimate includes consumables that were received biddoc.mst/spec BD - during the month covered by the estimate; and 3) The designated representative of the City of Round Rock must be notified as soon as possible of the receipt of these materials so that an inspection can be made by the representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled as the property of the City of Round Rock. 18. No conditional bids will be accepted. 19. If the bidder's insurance company is authorized, pursuant to its agreement with bidder, to arrange for the replacement of a loss, rather than by making a cash payment directly to the City of Round Rock, the insurance company must furnish or have furnished by bidder, a performance bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(b), Texas Government Code, and a payment bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(c). biddoc.mst/spec BD -4 JOB NAME: Gentlemen: PROPOSAL BIDDING SHEET Water and Wastewater Treatment Lab JOB LOCATION: Round Rock, Williamson County, Texas OWNER: City of Round Rock, Texas DATE: December 07, l990 Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to do all the work, to furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, insurance and miscellaneous items, to complete all the work on which he bids as provided by the attached supplemental specifications, and as shown on the plans for the construction of Water and Wastewater Testing Lab and binds himself on acceptance of this proposal to execute a contract and bond for completing said project within the time stated, for the following prices, to wit: BASE BID WORDS a_Q_LMS BASE BID:1 1-1ur'Greti Seven -Ei .rourt THD,i54w1D 4w?e hvndeNd se ,,i $374 ALTERNATE NO. 1: dt■- 410V"---1"'t- }EVE i 1 V X171 T_ KYNAR ROOFING /l c If this proposal is accepted, the undersigned agrees to execute the contract and provide necessary bonds and insurance certification as per the Instructions to Bidders and commence work within ten (10) days after written Notice to Proceed. The undersigned further agrees to complete the work in full within one hundred and fifty (150) calendar days after the date of the written Notice -to- Proceed. The bidder and Owner agree that for each and every calendar day the work, or any portion thereof, remains incomplete after the 150 calendar -day period, the bidder shall pay the amount of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) per calendar day as liquidated damages, not as a penalty but for delay damages to the Owners. Such amount shall be deduced by the Owners from any payment due to the bidders. biddoc.mst/spec BD - 1 1 1 >iznature 1 Wi n - / - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 he undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in the proposal have been carefull■ ,;hecktd and art ibmitted as correct and final. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and may v air e an% nformalities. respectfully Submitted. 'tint Name President (5l2) 244 - 1271 Fide for Pitt Building Company Inc Name of Firm December 07, 1999 Date biddoc.mst/spec 3580 Rocking J Road, Round Rock TX 78664 Address Telephone S= r= ary. if Contractor is a orporation BD -7 Bond No. TX499145800 UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we Pitt Building Company, Inc. as principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA, 950Echo Lane, Suite 250, Houston, TX 77024, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Round Rock as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of 5% of the amount of this bid not to exceed 5% of bid by principal Dollars ($ ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the principal has submitted a bid for the Water Wastewater Testing Lab Facilities -Round Rock Treatment Plant. NOW, THEREFORE, if the contract be timely awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall within such time as specified in the bid, enter into a contract in writing or, in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter into such Contract, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution of the final contract shall furnish evidence of financing in a manner and form acceptable to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the project. SIGNED, sealed and dated this 7th day of December. Pitt Building Company, Inc. -.st ii O BY: TIT UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA BY: 9 OIA.L (O . Joh W. Wagner, Att ney -in -Fact UNIVERSAL :SURETY OF AMERICA P.O. BOX 1068 -Houston, Texas 77251 -1068 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY - CERTIFIED COPY Army» 8005180 Summit Global Partners of Texas,Inc State of Texas GIVEN under my band and the seal of said company, at Houston, Texas, this TX 4991458 00 Know All Men by These Presents, That UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its pricipal office in Houston, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Emily Mtkeska Glenn Richards John W. Wagner William 11. Pitts, Jr. Norman P. Rolling James O. Schnell Rose Marie Borlskle Roberta Jones of Temple and State of Texas its true and lawful Attomey(s) -in -Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver Bonds not to exceed $1,000,000.00 unless such is accompanied by letter of authority signed by the President, Secretary or Executive Vice President of Universal Surety of America. and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hgpeby ratifying and confnming all that the said Attomey(s) -in -Fact may do within the stated limitations, and such authority is to continue le force until 3/3/2001 - . Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of Universal Surety of America at a meeting held on the 11th day of July, 1984. "Be It Resolved, that the President, and any Vice President, Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s )-in -Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company." "RESOLVED that the signature of any officer of the corporation, and the seal of the corporation may be affixed or printed by facsimilie to any power of attorney of the corporation, and that such printed facsimilie signature and seal shall be valid and binding upon the corporation" In Witness Whereof, Universal Surety of America has caused these presents to be signed by its President, Jack McReynolds and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 2nd day of January, A.D., 1998. UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERIC ss: i Taus j �j Jack McReynolds Resident County of Harris On this 2nd day of January, in the year 1998, before me, Estella Lelia, a notary public, personally appeared Jack McReynolds, personalty known to me to be the person who executed the within Instrument as President , on behalf of the corporation herein named and acknowledged to me that the corporation executed it. Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity. For verification of the authority of thus power you may telephone (713) 722 -4600. I, the tmdersigned Secretary of Universal Surety of America, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Original Power of Attorney issued by said Company, and do hereby dut.ber certify that the said Power of Attorney is still in effect if / 6— day of e 1977 • / As stant Secretary 1451 - 1475/025 3.0 POST BID DOCUMENTS THE STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 13th day of January , 2000, by and between (Owner) City of Round Rock, Texas of the State of Texas, acting through Robert A. Stluka, Jr., Mayor, thereunto duly authorized so to do, hereinafter termed OWNER, and (Contractor) Pitt Building Co., Inc. of Round Rock, Texas, County of Williamson , and State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by OWNER, and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the said OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Further described as the work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, supervision, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereof, and in accordance with the Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions of Agreement, Special Conditions, Technical Specifications, Plans, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory material thereof, and the Specifications and Addenda therefor, as prepared by Architecture Plus, Mac Ragsdale , herein entitled the ARCHITECT, each of which has been identified by the CONTRACTOR'S written Proposal, the General Conditions of the Agreement, and the Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds hereof, and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within 10 calendar days after the date written notice to do so have been given to him, and to complete the same within 150 calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed, subject to such extensions of time as are provided by the General and Special Conditions. postbid.m,Uspec master Water and Wastewater Treatment Lab PBD-1 The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Contract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions of the Contract. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the year and day first above written. CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS Pitt Building Company, Inc (OWNER) Al LEST: Corporate Seal pmtbid.mst/spec master Signed: PBD -2 (CONTRACTOR) BY 97 Tom C. Pitt its President (Typed name) (Title) ATTEST: a(7 Se if Contractor is a Corp ation or otherwise registered with the Secretary of State (The following to be executed if the Contractor is a Corporation.) I, Jed Adam , certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as Contractor herein; that Tom C. Pitt , who signed this Contract on behalf of the Contractor was then President (official title) of said Corporation, that said Contract was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation, that said Corporation by authority of its governing body, and is within the scope of its corporate powers. THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY 'WILLIAMSON PERFORMANCE BOND Bond'IlTX499146700 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Pitt Building Company, Inc. ofthe Cit of Round Rock , Count Of Williamson and State of Tex as Principal, and Siirafy Amara ra authorized under the law of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK; TEXAS, (Owner), in the penal sum of Three Hundred Forty -Five Thousand Nine Hundred Se nlars ($ 375,907.00 ) for the payment whereof well and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns. jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contact with the Owner dated the 13 th day of January, 2000 1;x19 to which the contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein consisting of: postbidma/spec master Water and Wastewater Treatment Lab NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH. that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall, in all respects, duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in and by said Contract, agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, including but not limited to, the repair of any and all defects in said work occasioned by and resulting from defects in materials furnished by or workmanship of, the Principal in performing the work covered by said Contract and occurring within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of the contract Completion Certificate and all other covenants and conditions, according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. *Mailing Address: 221 E. Main, Round Rock, TX 78664 -5299 PBD-3 1 1 PERF'ORMANC.i;13OND (continued) ' Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the term of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on ' this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time. alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 27th day Of January x 92000 Pitt Building Company, Inc. Universal Surety of America Principal Surety ' By u — By: Aux.. • 6 tu u. John W. Waer 1 s 5 Attorney -in -Fact Title Title 1 3580 Rocking J RD %Summit Global Partners of Texas, Inc. Address Address 1 Round Rock, TX 78664 PO Box 2291, Austin, TX 78768 1 Resident Agent of Surety: 1 William H. Pitts, Jr. Printed Name 1 %Summit Global Partners of Texas, Inc. Address PO Box 2291 1 Austin, TX 78768 City, State & Zip Code 1 /. . /Vr Signature n 1 nT 1 THE STATE OFTEXAS ' COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON KNOWALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS: That Pitt Building Company, Inc.,oftheCity of Round Rock , County of Williamson , and State of Texas as Principal, and U7 under the laws of the State of Texas to act as Surety on Bonds for Principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, (OWNER), and all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics and suppliers as their interest may appear, all of whom shall have the right to sue upon this bond, in the penal sum Of Three Hundred Seventy -Five Thousand Nine Hundred Seven Dollars (5375,907.00 ) for the payment whereof, well and truly be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: posbid.msispee maces PAYMENT BOND WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, dated the , lrh day of January, 2000. x ,19, , to which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein consisting of: Water and Wastewater Treatment Lab NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall well and truly pay all subcontractors, workers, laborers. mechanics. and suppliers, all monies to them owing by said Principals for subcontracts, work, labor, equipment, supplies and materials done and furnished for the construction of the improvements of said Contract, then this obligation shall be and become null and void: otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. PBD -5 Bond #TX499146700 1 1 PAYMENT BOND (continued) I Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings accompanying the same shall in anywise affect it's obligation on I this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time. alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this 27th day of _tan„ ,-.„ 2nnn x • 1 Pitt Building Company. Tnr. iiniverca1 c„rery .,f 4i^ar;c2 I Principal Surety By_ 7, By: (oluti I John W. WagnWr 1 ©PG 41:1js (1&°---1--s------- a (1&°---1--s------- Attorney -in -Farr Title Title I 3580 Rocking J RD %Summit Global Partners of TPxaS, Tnr Address Address I Round Rock, TX 78664 PO Box 2291, Austin, TX 78768 1 Resident Agent of Surety: William 15. Pitts. Jr. Printed Name I %Summit Global Partners of Texas Inc. Address PO Box 2291 I Austin, TX 78768 City, State & Zip Code J re Signature I 1 1 BOND NUMBER TX499146700 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, Thatwe, Pitt Building Company, Inc. (hereinafter called the "Principal ") as Principal. and the Universal Surety of America a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of TPxaa and duly licensed to transact business in the State of Texas (hereinafter called the "Surety "), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK. TEXAS (hereinafter called the "Obligee "), in the sum of ThrPP HnndrPd SPVPnty —Pimp Thousand Nine Hundred cP.:Pn dollars ($ 375.907.0(3 ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our hens. executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly, by these presents. Sealed with our seals and dated this 27th day of January , A.D. lard Two Thousand WHEREAS, the said Principal has heretofore entered into a contract with the City of Round Rock Dated January 13. 2000 x . for construction of: postbid.msispee mater WARRANTY BOND Water and Wastewater Treatment Lab WHEREAS, the said Principal is required to guarantee the construction of all improvements installed under said contract, against defects in materials or workmanship, which may develop during the period of one year(s) from the date of acceptance of the project above described, by Owner: The City of Round Rock, Texas NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THE OBLIGATIONS IS SUCH, that if said Principal shall faithfully carry out and perform the said guarantee, and shall, on due notice, repair and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in the said work which may develop during the period of One year(s) from the date of acceptance of the project above described, by Owner: The City of Round Rock, Texas PBD -8 AMOUNT $175.907.00 WARRANTY BOND (continued) OR shall pay over, make good and reimburse to the said Obligee all loss and damage which said Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Principal so to do, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise shall remain in full force and effect. Pitt Building Company, Inc. Principal © Ate.✓ '. Title 3580 Rockine J RD Address Round Rock, TX 78664 Resident Agent of Surety: William H. Pitts, Jr. Printed Name %R „mmit Global Partnar5 of TPxae. Inc. Address PO Box 2291 Austin, Tx 78768 City, State & Zip Code Signature pasbid.mslapx mans PBD-9 Universal Surety of America Surety By: ALA.... W. t4WA. Jo n W. Wagner Q Title Attorney -in -Fact %Summit Global Partners of Texas, Inc. Address PO Box 2291, Austin, TX 78768 UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA P.O. BOX 1068 -Houston, Texas 77251 -1068 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY - CERTIFIED COPY Agency rafam•sm 8005180 Summit Global Partners of Texas,Inc GPM TX 4991467 00 Know All Men by These Presents, That UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its pricipal office in Houston, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute end appoint Emily Mikeska Glenn Richards John W. Wagner William H. Pitts, Jr. Norman P. Rolling James O. Schnell Rose Mark Borlskie Roberta Jones of Temple and State of Texas its true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver Bonds not to exceed $1,000,000.00 unless such is accompanied by letter of authority signed by the President, Secretary or Executive Vice President of Universal Surety of America. and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attomey(s) -in -Fact may do within the stated limitations, and such authority is to continue in force until 3/31/2001 . Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of Universal Surety of America at a meeting held on the 11th day of July, 1984. "Be It Resolved, that the President, and any Vice President, Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s) -in -Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company." "RESOLVED that the signature of any officer of the corporation, and the seal of the corporation may be affixed or printed by facsimilie to any power of attorney of the corporation, and that such printed facsimilie signature and seal shall be valid and binding upon the corporation" In Witness Whereof, Universal Surety of America has caused these presents to be signed by its President, Jack McReynolds and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 2nd day of January, A.D., 1998. ;onE UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERIC .r °a, State of Texas �. = , � • �e County of Harris Jack McReynolds President On this 2nd day of January, in the year 1998, before me, Estela Leila, a notary public, personally appeared Jack McReynolds, personally known to me to be the person who executed the within instrument as President , on behalf of the corporation herein named and acknowledged to me that the corporation executed it. GIVEN under my hand and the seal of said company, at Houston, Texas, this d / day of For verification of the authority of this power you may telephone (713) 722 -4600. I, the undersigned Secretary of Universal Surety of America, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Original Power of Attorney issued by said Company, and do hereby further certify that the said Power of Attorney is still in effect Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity. As stan t Secretary 1451- 1475/025 I Pitt Building Company, Inc. D THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT the Insured named above is insured by the Companies listed above with spect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the ndard policies used I by the companies, and further hereinafter described. Exceptions to the policies are noted below. CO I TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE 1111 NUMBER DATE EXPIRATION DATE LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY TCP7378931 q6 7 - 10 - 99 l x commercial gen. liab. x occurence i 7 - 10 - 00 GENERAL AGGREGATE • PRODUCTS- COhIP'OPACN, PERSONAL & ADV. [NJURt EACH OCCURRENCE • FIRE DAMAGE ;Any one Or II) MED. EXPENSE (Any One jdrsonl 52 ,000,QQQ 62,000,000 51,000,000 51,000,000 S 50, 000 $ 5,000 I A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY TBA854398305 7 -10 -99 I x any auto x hired autos x non — owned autos 7 -10-00 COMBINED SINGLE LIMn:', BODILY INJURY (Per persmj) BODILY INJURY (Per accid:ht) PROPERTY DAMAGE '. 5 500,050 S 5 5 ill EXCESS LIABILITY UMB854293905 7 -10 -99 x umbrella form 7 -10 -00 EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE 53,000,0 S 1 . B WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY I WC795934009 7 - 1 - 99 ^T '^ 7 - 1 - 00 STATUTORY LI!A1TS EACH ACCIDENT ! I1 DISEASE • POLICY LIMIT 1 DISEASE - EACH EMPLOS E S 100,000 s 500,000 S 100,000 sent By: ; 1 I PRODUCER The Insurance Store 404 W. 9th Street #204 Georgetown, TX 78626 INSURED 1 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Dace: 1 -27 -00 ' I DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS;LOCATIONSJVEHICLES %SPECIAL ITEMSEXCEPTIONS Waiver of subrogation in favor of The City of Round Rock on Workers Cotdpensation, General and Auto Liability. Coverage is primary. The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all policies except Workers' Compensation and Emphl_! rs' Liahiliry. Should any I of the above described policies by cancelled or changed before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will mail thi y (30) days written notice to the certificate holder named below. • • CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of Round Rock SIG - OF AUTHORI7�D'lff3PRESt ISTATIVE Dept. of Public Works 2008 Enterprise Round Rock, TX 78664 pastbid.msyspec masrer 512 244 0129; Jan -26 -00 10:18; Page 2 PBD -7 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAC:' A Great American Insurance 4o. B Great American -WC C Typed Name: Title: Owner 'CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 'PRODUCER 1 OTHER CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of Round Rock 1 221 E. Main Street Round Rock, Texas 78664 attn: Joanne Land 1 1 'DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS /VEHICLES /SPECIAL ITEMS /EXCEPTIONS postbidmst/spec master PBD -7 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE A Date: ,INSURED C THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT the Insured named above is insured by the Companies listed above with respect to the business ( operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by the companies, and further hereinafter described. Exceptions to the policies are noted below. 1 C0 TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION LIMITS LTR NUMBER DATE DATE I GENERAL LIABLLITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG. $ PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ I EACH OCCURRENCE $ FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ 1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Title; COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ I BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1 AGGREGATE $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY STATUTORY LIMITS I EACH ACCIDENT $ DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ - DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE $ The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all policies except Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability. Should any t f the above described policies by cancelled or changed before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will mail thirty (30) days written notice o the certificate holder named below. SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Typed Name: Sealed with our seals and dated this and WARRANTY BOND BOND NUMBER AMOUNT KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, (hereinafter called the "Principal ") as Principal, and the a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of and duly licensed to transact business in the State of (hereinafter called the "Surety"), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK. TEXAS (hereinafter called the "Obligee "), in the sum of dollars ($ ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly, by these presents. day of , A.D. nineteen hundred WHEREAS, the said Principal has heretofore entered into a contract with Dated , 19, for construction of: WHEREAS, the said Principal is required to guarantee the construction of all improvements installed under said contract, against defects in materials or workmanship, which may develop during the period of year(s) from the date of acceptance of the project above described, by Owner: The City of Round Rock, Texas NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THE OBLIGATIONS IS SUCH, that if said Principal shall faithfully carry out and perform the said guarantee, and shall, on due notice, repair and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in the said work which may develop during the period of year(s) from the date of acceptance of the project above described, by Owner: The City of Round Rock, Texas postbid.mst/spec master PBD -8 WARRANTY BOND (continued) OR shall pay over, make good and reimburse to the said Obligee all loss and damage which said Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Principal so to do, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise shall remain in full force and effect. Principal Surety By: By: Title Title Address Address Resident Agent of Surety: Printed Name Address City, State & Zip Code Signature postbidmst/spee master PBD -9 4.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contents 1. Definition of Terms 1.01 - Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 - Contract Documents 1.03 - Subcontractor 1.04 - Sub - Subcontractor 1.05 - Written Notice 1.06 - Work 1.07 - Extra Work 1.08 - Working Day 1.09 - Calendar Day 1.10 - Substantially Completed 2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor 2.01 - Owner- Engineer Relationship 2.02 - Professional Inspection by Engineer 2.03 - Payments for Work 2.04 - Initial Determinations 2.05 - Objections 2.06 - Lines and Grades 2.07 - Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 2.08 - Contractor's Understanding 2.09 - Character of Workers 2.10 - Contractor's Buildings 2.11 - Sanitation 2.12 - Shop Drawings 2.13 - Preliminary Approval 2.14 - Defects and Their Remedies 2.15 - Changes and Alterations 2.16 - Inspectors General Conditions of Agreement 3. General Obligations and Responsibilities 3.01 - Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.02 - Ownership of Drawings 3.03 - Adequacy of Design gencond.mst/spec master GC -1 3.04 - Right of Entry 3. General Obligations and Responsibilities (coned) 3.05 - Collateral Contracts 3.06 - Discrepancies and Omissions 3.07 - Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant 3.08 - Damages 3.09 - Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public 3.10 - Performance and Payment Bonds 3.11 - Losses from Natural Causes 3.12 - Protection of Adjoining Property 3.13 - Protection Against Claims of Subcontractors, etc. 3.14 - Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 3.15 - Laws and Ordinances 3.16 - Assignment and Subletting 3.17 - Indemnification 3.18 - Insurance 3.19 - Final Clean-Up 3.20 - Guarantee Against Defective Work 3.21 - Testing of Materials 3.22 - Wage Rates 4. Prosecution and Progress 4.01 - Time and Order of Completion 4.02 - Extension of Time 4.03 - Hindrances and Delays 5. Measurement and Payment 5.01 - Quantities and Measurements 5.02 - Estimated Quantities 5.03 - Price of Work 5.04 - Partial Payments 5.05 - Use of Completed Portions 5.06 - Final Completion and Acceptance 5.07 - Final Payment 5.08 - Payments Withheld 5.09 - Delayed Payments gencond.mst/spec master GC - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6. Extra Work and Claims 6.01 - Change Orders 6.02 - Minor Changes 6.03 - Extra Work 6.04 - Time of Filing Claims 6.05 - Continuing Performance 7. Abandonment of Contract 7.01 - Abandonment by Contractor 7.02 - Abandonment by Owner 8. Subcontractors 8.01 - Award of Subcontracts for Portions of Work 8.02 - Subcontractual Relations 8.03 - Payments to Subcontractors 9. Separate Contracts 9.01 - Owners Right to Award Separate Contracts 9.02 - Mutual Responsibility of Contractors 9.03 - Cutting and Patching Under Separate Contracts 10. Protection of Persons and Property 10.01 -. Safety Precautions and Programs 10.02 - Safety of Persons and Property 10.03 - Location and Protection of Utilities gencond.mst/spec master GC -3 1. Definition of Terms 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents General Conditions of Agreement The Owner, the Contractor and the Engineer and those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement are referred to throughout the Contract. Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term "Engineer" means the Engineer or his duly authorized representative. The Engineer shall be understood to be the Engineer of the Owner, and nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual or agency relationship between the Engineer and the Contractor. The Contract Documents shall consist of the Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Performance and Payment Bonds (when required), Special Bonds (when required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Construction Specifications, Plans and all modifications thereof incorporated in any such documents before the execution of the agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. In case of conflict between any of the Contract Documents, priority of interpretation shall be in the following order: Signed Agreement, Performance and Payment Bonds, Special Bonds (if any), Proposal, Special Conditions of Agreement, Notice to Contractors, Technical Specifications, Plans, and General Conditions of Agreement. 1.03 Subcontractor The term "Subcontractor," as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor. It includes one who furnishes material worked to special design according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not include one who merely furnishes material not so worked. 1.04 Sub - Subcontractor The term "Sub- Subcontractor" means one who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the work at the site. It includes one who furnishes material worked to a special design according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not include one who merely furnishes material not so worked. gencond.mstlspec master GC-4 1.05 Written Notice 1.06 Work Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered to or sent by registered mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which, when so applied, have a well -known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. 1.07 Extra Work The term "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Engineer or the Owner to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown upon the plans, or reasonably implied by the specifications, and not covered by the Contractor's Proposal, except as provided under "Changes and Alterations" herein. 1.08 Working Day The term "Working Day" is defined as any day not including Saturdays, Sundays or any legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions, not under the control of the Contractor, will permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. 1.09 Calendar Day The term "Calendar Day" is defined as any day of the week or month, no days being excepted. 1.10 Substantially Completed The term "Substantially Completed" shall be understood to mean that the structure has been made suitable for use or occupancy or that the facility is in condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. gencond.mst/spec master GC - 2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor 2.01 Owner - Engineer Relationship The Engineer will be the Owner's representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Engineer as the Owner's representative during construction are as set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended or limited without written consent of the Owner and the Engineer. The Engineer will advise and consult with the Owner, and all of the Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be issued through the Engineer. 2.02 Professional Inspection by Engineer The Engineer shall make periodic visits to the site to familiarize himself with the progress of the executed work and to determine if such work meets the essential performance and design features and the technical and functional engineering requirements of the Contract Documents; provided and except, however, that the Engineer shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on -site inspection of the quality or quantity of the work or be responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident thereto or in connection therewith. Notwithstanding any other provision of this agreement or any other Contract Document, the Engineer shall not be responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor or any of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the work. 2.03 Payments for Work The Engineer shall review the Contractors applications for payment and supporting data, determine the amount owed to the Contractor and recommend, in writing, payment to the Contractor in such amounts; such recommendation of payment to the Contractor constitutes a representation to the Owner of the Engineer's professional judgement that the work has progressed to the point indicated to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, but such recommendation of an application for payment to the Contractor shall not be deemed as a representation by the Engineer that the Engineer has made any examination to determine how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the contract price. 2.04 Initial Determinations The Engineer initially shall determine all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner relating to execution or progress of the work or gencond.mst/spec master GC - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 interpretation of the Contract Documents. The Engineer's decision shall be rendered in writing within a reasonable time, which shall not be construed to be less than ten (10) days. 2.05 Objections In the event the Engineer renders any decision which, in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with the Engineer within thirty (30) days his written objection to the decision, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the question so raised to litigation as hereinafter provided. 2.06 Lines and Grades Unless otherwise specified, all lines and grades shall be furnished by the Engineer or his representative. Whenever necessary, construction work shall be suspended to permit performance of this work, but such suspension will be as brief as practicable and the Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefor. The Contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 2.07 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence The Contractor shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent English - speaking Superintendent and any necessary assistants to supervise and direct the work. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The Contractor is and at all times shall remain an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing' his work under this contract, with full power and authority to select the means, method and manner of performing such work, so long as such methods do not adversely affect the completed improvements, the Owner and the Engineer being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the plans, specifications and contract. Likewise, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and other persons, as well as for the protection and safety of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional information concerning the work to be performed passing from or through the Engineer, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the Contractor to deviate from the plans and specifications; the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such information gencond.mst/spec master GC - being to define with specificity the agreement of the parties as to the work the Contractor is to perform. The Contractor shall be fully and completely liable, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation, and use or non -use of all items and methods incident to performance of the contract, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, and similar items or devices used by him during construction. Any review of work in process, or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of plans and specifications, by the Engineer or the Owner, or any agent, employee, or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for temporary construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the Contractor to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of work completed or being performed, as measured against the drawings and specifications constituting the contract, or for the purpose of enabling the Contractor to more fully understand the plans and specifications so that the completed construction work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the Contractor from full and complete responsibility for the proper performance of his work on the project, including but not limited to the propriety of means and methods of the Contractor in performing said contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Deviation by the Contractor from plans and specifications that may have been in evidence during any such visitation or observation by the Engineer, or any of his representatives, whether called to the Contractor's attention or not, shall in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said plans and specifications. 2.08 Contractor's Understanding It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this contract. The Contractor agrees that he will make no claim against the Owner or the Engineer if, in the prosecution of the work, he finds that the actual site or subsurface conditions encountered do not conform to those indicated by excavation, test excavation, test procedures, borings, explorations or other subsurface excavations. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or the Engineer either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 2.09 Character of Workers The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the gencond.mst/spec master GC -8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 performance of the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Engineer shall inform him in writing that any workers on the work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or refuse instructions from the Engineer in the absence of the Superintendent, such worker shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Engineer's written consent. No illegal alien may be employed by any Contractor for work on this project, and a penalty of $500.00 per day will be assessed for each day and for each illegal alien who works for the Contractor at this project. 2.10 Contractor's Buildings The building of structures for housing workers, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only at such places as the Engineer shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 2.11 Sanitation Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Engineer, and their use shall be strictly enforced. 2.12 Shop Drawings The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other Contractor, four (4) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades, and the Engineer shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, making desired corrections. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The Engineer's review of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required contract work in accordance with the plans and specifications and within the contract time. Such review by the Engineer shall be for the sole purpose of determining the general conformity of said shop drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the plans and specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed gencond.mst/spec master GC -9 that the Engineer does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during the Contractor's performance hereunder. 2.13 Preliminary Approval The Engineer shall not have the power to waive the obligations of this contract for the furnishing by the Contractor of good material, and of his performing good work as herein described, and in full accordance with the plans and specifications. No failure or omission of the Engineer to discover, object to or condemn any defective work or material shall release the Contractor from the obligations to fully and properly perform the contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once tear out, remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance upon the discovery of said defective work or material; provided, however, that the Engineer shall, upon request of the Contractor, inspect and accept or reject any material furnished, and in the event the material has been once accepted by the Engineer, such acceptance shall be binding on the Owner unless it can be clearly shown that such material furnished does not meet the specifications for this work. Any questioned work may be ordered taken up or removed for re- examination by the Engineer, prior to final acceptance, and if found not in accordance with the plans and/or specifications for said work, all expense of removing, re- examination and 'replacement shall be bome by the Contractor. Otherwise, the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the Owner; provided that, where inspection or approval is specifically required by the specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the Contractor proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing, and replacing this work if so directed by the Engineer. 2.14 Defects and Their Remedies It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Engineer as unsuitable or not in conformity with the plans, specifications, or the intent thereof, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Engineer, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. 2.15 Changes and Alterations The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit in the line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, gencond.mst/spec master GC - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1` 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.16 Inspectors The Engineer may provide one (or more) field inspectors at the work site for the limited purpose of observing the work in progress and reporting back to the Engineer on the extent, nature, manner and performance of the work so that the Engineer may more effectively perform his duties hereunder. Such inspectors may also communicate between the Engineer and the Contractor their respective reports, opinions, questions, answers and clarifications concerning the plans, specifications and work but shall not be deemed the agent of the Contractor for all purposes in communicating such matters. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying performance and payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with, except as provided for unit price items under Section 5 "Measurement and Payment ". If the amount of work is increased, and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this contract, except as provided for unit price items under Section 5 "Measurement and Payment ". Otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In the event the Owner makes such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall compensate the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expense incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. Such inspectors may confer with the Contractor or the Contractor's Superintendent concerning the prosecution of the work and its conformity with the plans and specifications but shall never be, in whole or part, responsible for or charged with, nor shall he assume any authority or responsibility for the means, methods or manner of completing the work or of the superintendence of the work or of the Contractor's employees. It is expressly understood and agreed that any such inspector is not authorized by the Engineer or the Owner to independently act for either or answer on behalf of either, any inquiries of the Contractor concerning the plans, specifications or work. No inspector's opinion, advice, interpretation of the plans or specifications of this contract, apparent or express approval of the means or methods or manner of the Contractor's performance of work in progress or completed, or discovery or failure to discover or object to defective work of materials shall release the Contractor from his duty to complete all work in strict accordance with the plans and specifications or stop the Owner or the Engineer from requiring that all work be fully and properly performed including, if necessary, removal of defective or otherwise unacceptable work and the re -doing of such work. gencond.mstlspec master GC -11 3. General Obligations and Responsibilities 3.01 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with an adequate and reasonable number of copies of all plans and specifications without expense to him and the Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of the same constantly accessible on the work, with the latest revisions noted thereon. 3.02 Ownership of Drawings All drawings, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Engineer shall not be reused on other work, and, with the exception of the signed contract sets, are to be returned to him on request, at the completion of the work. All models are the property of the Owner. 3.03 Adequacy of Design It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers. It is therefore agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of the design, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure and the practicability of the operations of the completed project provided that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the said requirements of the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof, and all approved additions and alterations thereto. 3.04 Right of Entry The Owner reserves the right to enter the property or location at which the works herein contracted for are to be constructed or installed, by such agent or agents as he may elect, for the purpose of inspecting the work or for the purpose of constructing or installing such collateral work as the Owner may desire. 3.05 Collateral Contracts The Owner agrees to provide, by separate contract or otherwise, all labor and material essential to the completion of the work specifically excluded from this contract, in such manner so as not to unreasonably delay the progress of the work or damage the Contractor, except where such delays are specifically mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner will attempt to coordinate the collateral work of utility companies regulated by City franchises, but the City shall not be responsible for delays or other damages to the Contractor which may result from their acts or omissions. gencond.mst/spec master GC -12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.06 Discrepancies and Omissions The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer of any omissions or discrepancies found in the contract. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with generally accepted practices for construction. In the event of any discrepancies between the separate Contract Documents, the priority of interpretation defined under "Contract Documents" shall govern. In the event that there is still any doubt as to the meaning and intent of any portion of the contract, specifications or drawings, the Engineer shall define what is intended to apply to the work. - 3.07 Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work, whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the entire work is completed and accepted. 3.08 Damages In the event the Contractor is damaged in the course of completion of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the Owner or the Engineer, thereby causing loss to the Contractor, the Owner agrees that he will reimburse the Contractor for such loss. In the event the Owner is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the Contractor, or should the Contractor unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the Owner becomes liable, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for such loss. 3.09 Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and municipal safety laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state, or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor shall provide such machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, and other safety devices. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, acting at his discretion as an independent contractor. In the event there is an accident involving injury to any individual on or near the work, the gencond.mst/spec master GC -13 Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Engineer of the event and shall be i sponsible for recording the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding the event through photographs, interviewing witnesses, obtaining of medical reports and other documentation that defines the event. Copies of such documentation shall be provided to the Owner and the Engineer for their records. 3.10 Performance and Payment Bonds Unless otherwise specified, it is further agreed by the parties to the contract that the Contractor will execute separate performance and payment bonds, each in the sum of one hundred (100 %) percent of the total contract price, on standard forms for this purpose, guaranteeing faithful performance of the work and the fulfillment of any guarantee required, and further guaranteeing payment to all persons supplying labor and materials or furnishing him any equipment in the execution of the contract. If the contract price is $25,000.00 or less, no payment or performance bond shall be required. It is agreed that the contract shall not be in effect until such performance and payment bonds are furnished and approved by the Owner. Unless otherwise specified, the cost of the premium for the performance and payment bonds shall be included in the price bid by the Contractor for the work under this contract, and no extra payment for such bonds will be made by the Owner. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner, the surety company underwriting the bonds shall be licensed to write such bonds in the State of Texas. 3.11 Losses from Natural Causes Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance in the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 3.12 Protection of Adjoining Property The said Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties, in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjoining property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of the contract regardless of whether or not it is caused in gencond.mstlspec master GC -14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 part by a party indemnified hereunder, but any such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising solely out of the existence or character of the work. 3.13 Protection Against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen and Furnishers of Machinery, Equipment and Supplies The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner and the Engineer harmless from all claims growing out the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workers, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When so desired by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the Owner has written notice, or may withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to liquidate any and all such lawful claims. When satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, payments to the Contractor shall be resumed in full in accordance with the terms of this contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligation upon the Owner by either the Contractor or his surety. 3.14 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letter patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyright rights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and the Engineer harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required by the Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless form any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by the Owner is known by the Contractor to be. an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Owner. 3.15 Laws and Ordinances The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinance and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Engineer against any claim arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations whether by the Contractor or his employees, except where such violations are called for by the provisions of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance gencond.mst/spec master GC - therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing, and any necessary changes shall be prepared as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. In case the Owner is a body politic and corporate, the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contract, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 3.16 Assignment and Subletting The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract and that he will not assign by Power of Attomey or otherwise, or sublet said contract without the written consent of the Engineer, and that no part or feature of the work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the Engineer or the Owner. The Contractor further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner as provided by this agreement. 3.17 Indemnification The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer and their respective officers, agents and employees, from and against all damages, claims, losses, demands, suits, judgements and costs, including reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such damage, claim, loss, demand, suit, judgment, cost or expense: 1. is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person including Contractor's employees and any Subcontractor's employees and any Sub - subcontractor's employees, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property including Contractor's property (other than the work itself) and the property of any Subcontractor of Sub - subcontractor including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and, 2. is caused in whole or in part by any intentional or negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any one of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Engineer, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation of maps, plans, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or the approval of maps, plans, reports, gencond.mst/spec master GC -16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r surveys, change orders, designs or specifications or the issuance of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Engineer, his agents or employees, provided such is the sole cause of the injury or damage. In any and all claims against the Owner or the Engineer or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 3.17 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.18 Insurance The Contractor shall carry insurance as follows for the duration of this contract. A. Statutory Workmen's Compensation. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ( "certificate ") - a copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self - insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC -81, TWCC -82, TWCC -83, or TWCC -84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ( "subcontractor" in & 406,096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner- operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. gencond.mst/spec master GC - The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, that meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44), for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. This coverage shall include the following terms: (a) Employer's Liability limits of $100,000.00 for each accident is required. (b) "Texas Waiver of Our Right to Recover From Others" Endorsement WC 42 03 04 shall be included in this policy. ( c) Texas must appear in Item 3A of the Worker's Compensation coverage or Item 3C must contain the following: "As States except those listed in 3A and the States of NV, ND, OH, WA, WV, and WY. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, . so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven (7) calendar days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor knew or should have known of gencond.mstlspec master GC - any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts of filing of any coverage agreements, that meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44), for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) calendar days after the person knew or should have known of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (1) gencond.mst/spec master GC -19 (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. By signing this contract, or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self - insured, with the Commission's Division of Self- Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, and/or other civil actions. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor that entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten (10) calendar days after the receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. B. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with minimum Bodily Injury limits of $300,000 for each occurrence including like coverage for acts and omissions of Subcontractors and contractual liability coverage. C. Property Damage Insurance with minimum limits of $50,000 for each occurrence including like coverage for acts and omissions of Subcontractors and contractual liability coverage. D. Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non - owned, and hired vehicles with minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $100,000 for each person and $300,000 for each occurrence and Property Damage minimum limits of $50,000 for each occurrence. Contractor shall require Subcontractors to provide Automobile Liability Insurance with same minimum limits. The Contractor shall not commence work at the site under this contract until he has obtained all required insurance and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractors to commence work until all insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of the insurance by the Owner and the Engineer shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder. The required insurance must be written by a company licensed to do business in Texas at the time the policy is issued. In addition, the company must be acceptable to the Owner and all insurance (other than workers' compensation) shall be endorsed to include the Owner as an additional insured thereunder. gencond.mst/spec master GC -20 1 1 E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be cancelled nor permit any insurance to lapse. All insurance certificates shall include a clause to the effect that the policy shall not be cancelled or reduced, restricted or limited until ten (10) days after the Owner has received written notice as evidenced by return receipt of registered or certified letter. Certificates of insurance shall contain transcripts from the proper office of the insurer, evidencing in particular those insured, the extent of the insurance, the location and the operations to which the insurance applies, the expiration date, and the above - mentioned notice of cancellation clause. 3.19 Final Clean -up Upon the completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the work all surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures and debris of every kind He shall leave the site of the work in a neat and orderly condition at least equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations satisfactory to the Engineer. In the event the Contractor fails or refuses to clean and remove surplus materials and debris as above provided, the Owner or the Engineer may do so, or cause same to be done, at the Contractor's expense, and the reasonable cost thereof shall be deducted from the final payment. 3.20 Guarantee Against Defective Work The Contractor wan the materials and workmanship and that the work is in conformance with the plans and specifications included in this contract for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the project. Said warranty binds the Contractor to correct any work that does not conform with such plans and specifications or any defects in workmanship or materials furnished under this contract which may be discovered within the said one year period. The Contractor shall at his own expense correct such defect within thirty (30) days after receiving written notice of such defect from the Owner or the Engineer by repairing same to the condition called for in the Contract Documents and plans and specifications. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to repair such defect within the said thirty (30) day period or to provide acceptable assurances that such repair work will be completed within a reasonable time thereafter, the Owner may repair or cause to be repaired any such defect at the Contractor's expense. 3.21 Testing of Materials Unless otherwise specified, testing of all materials to be incorporated into the project will be as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. All retesting for work rejected on the basis of test results will be at the expense of the Contractor and the extent of the retesting gencond.mst/spec master GC - shall be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may require additional testing for failing tests and may require two (2) passing retests before acceptance will be made by the Owner. The testing laboratory will be designated by the Owner. All materials to be incorporated into the project must meet the requirements of these specifications. For manufactured materials such as reinforcing steel, expansion joint materials, concrete pipe, cement, miscellaneous steel, cast iron materials, etc., the Contractor will be required to furnish a manufacturer's certificate stating that the material meets the requirements specified for this project. 3.22 Wage Rates (Information From Chapter 2258 Texas Government Code Title 10) 2288.021. Duty of Government Entity to Pay Prevailing Wage Rates a. The state or any political subdivision of the state shall pay a worker employed by it or on behalf of it: (1) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed; and (2) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. b. Subsection (a) does not apply to maintenance work. c. A worker is employed on a public work for the purposes of this section if the worker is employed by a contractor or subcontractor in the execution of a contract for the public work with the state, a political subdivision of the state, or any officer or public body of the state or a political subdivision of the state. 2258.023. Prevailing Wage Rates to be Paid by Contractor and Subcontractor; Penalty a. The contractor who is awarded a contract by a public body or a subcontractor of the contractor shall pay not less than the rates determined under Section 2258.022 to a worker employed by it in the execution of the contract. b. A contractor or subcontractor who violates this section shall pay to the state or a political subdivision of the state on whose behalf the contract is made, $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. A public body awarding a contract shall specify this penalty in the contract. c. A contractor or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates, and specify the rates in the contract as provided by Section 2258.022. d. The public body shall use any money collected under this section to offset the costs incurred in the administration of this chapter. e. A municipality is entitled to collect a penalty under this section only if the municipality has a population of more than 10,000. gencond.mstispec master GC -22 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2258.051. Duty of Public Body to Hear Complaints and Withhold Payment A public body awarding a contract, and an agent or officer of the public body, shall: 1. take cognizance of complaints of all violations of this chapter committed in the execution of the contract; and 2. withhold money forfeited or required to be withheld under this Chapter from the payments to the contractor under the contract, except that, the public body may not withhold money from other than the final payment without determination by the public body that there is good cause to believe that the contractor has violated this chapter. WR1001 July 1997 Applicable wage rates are shown in Section 06 WAGE RATES of the SPECIAL CONDITIONS. 4. Prosecution and Progress 4.01 Time and Order of Completion It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal: provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Engineer may direct the time and manner of constructing the work done under this contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Engineer, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the Work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 4.02 Extension of Time Should the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Engineer, or of any employee of either, or by other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strikes, lockouts, fires, and unusual delays by common carriers, or unavoidable cause or causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then an extension of time shall be allowed for completing the work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, the amount of the extension to be determined by the Engineer; provided, however, that the Contractor shall give gencond.mstlspec master GC - the Engineer prompt notice in writing of the cause of such delay. Adverse weather conditions will not be justification for extension of time on "Calendar Days" contracts. 4.03 Hindrances and Delays No claims shall be made by the Contractor for damages resulting from hindrances or delays from any cause (except where the work is stopped by order of and for the convenience of the Owner) during the progress of any portion of the work embraced in this contract. In case said work shall be stopped by the act of the Owner, then such expense as in the judgment of the Engineer is caused by such stoppage of said work shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor. 5. Measurement and Payment 5.01 Quantities and Measurements No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 5.02 Estimated Quantities This agreement, including the specifications, plans and estimate, is intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be famished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing the proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and material to be fumished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of such work done and material furnished. Where payment is based on the unit price method, the Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits or otherwise on account of any differences which may be found between the quantities of work actually done, the material actually furnished under this contract and the estimated quantities contemplated and contained in the proposal; provided, however, that in case the actual quantity of any major item should become as much as twenty percent (20 %) more than, or twenty percent (20 %) less than the estimated or contemplated quantity for such items, then either party to this agreement, upon demand, shall be entitled to revised consideration upon the portion of the work above or below twenty percent (20 %) of the estimated quantity. gencond.mstlspec master GC -24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A "Major Item" shall be construed to be any individual bid item incurred in the proposal that has a total cost equal to or greater that five percent (5 %) of the total contract cost, computed on the basis of the proposal quantities and the contract unit prices. Any revised consideration is to be determined by agreement between the parties, otherwise by the terms of this agreement, as provided under "Extra Work ". 5.03 Price of Work In consideration of the furnishing of.all the necessary labor, equipment and material, and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the completion of all work and on the delivery of all material embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the prices set forth in the proposal hereto attached, which has been made a part of this contract. The Contractor hereby agrees to receive such prices in full for furnishing all material and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also for all expense incurred by him, and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement. 5.04 Partial Payments On or before the first day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement showing the total value of the work performed up to and including the 25th day of the preceding month. The statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on the job site and to be included in the work and all partially completed work whether bid as a lump sum or a unit item which in the opinion of the Engineer is acceptable. The Engineer shall examine and approve or modify and approve such statement. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the 20th day of the current month the total amount of the approved statement, less five percent (5 %) of the amount thereof, which five percent (5 %) shall be retained until final payment, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may by retained by the Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the Contractor, then the Owner may, upon written recommendation of the Engineer, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the Contractor; or the Contractor, at the Owner's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the work and, thereupon, the Contractor shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Final Payment ". 5.05 Use of Completed Portions The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, notwithstanding the time for completing the entire work or gencond.mst/spec master GC -25 such portions may not have expired. Such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation, extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when, in the Contractor's opinion, the contract is "substantially completed" and when so notifying the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in writing a detailed list of unfinished work. The Engineer will review the Contractor's list of unfinished work and will add thereto such items as the Contractor has failed to include. The "substantial completion" of the structure or facility shall not excuse the Contractor from performing all of the work undertaken, whether of a minor or major nature, and thereby completing the structure or facility in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5.06 Final Completion and Acceptance Within ten (10) days after the Contractor has given the Engineer written notice that the work has been completed, or substantially completed, the Engineer and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work is found to be completed in accordance with the Contact Documents, the Engineer shall issue to the Owner and the Contractor his Certificate of Completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner to issue a Certificate of Acceptance to the Contractor or to advise the Contractor in writing of the reason for non- acceptance. 5.07 Final Payment Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Completion, the Engineer shall proceed to make final measurements and prepare final statement for the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before 35th day after the date of the Certificate of Completion, the balance due the Contractor under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the Certificate of Acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents, shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required. 5.08 Payments Withheld The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: a) Defective work not remedied or other obligations hereunder not done. b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. gencond.mst/spec master GC -26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for material or labor. d) Damage to the Owner or another contractors work, material or equipment. e) Reasonable doubt that the work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the contract amount. f) Reasonable indication that the work will not completed within the contract time. g) Other causes affecting the performance of the contract. When the above grounds are removed or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 5.09 Delayed Payments Should the Owner fail to make payment to the Contractor of the sum named in any partial or final statement, when payment is due, then the Owner shall pay to the Contractor, in addition to the sum shown as due by such statement, interest thereon at the rate of six percent (6 %) per annum, unless otherwise specified, from date due as provided under "Partial Payments" and "Final Payment," until fully paid, which shall fully liquidate any injury to the Contractor growing out of such delay in payment. It is expressly agreed that delay by the Owner in making payment to the Contractor of the sum named in any partial or final statement shall not constitute a breach of this contract on the part of the Owner nor an abandonment thereof nor shall it to any extent or for any time relieve the Contractor of his obligations to fully and completely perform hereunder. 6. Extra Work and Claims 6.01 Change Orders Without invalidating this agreement, the Owner may at any time or from time to time order additions, deletions or revisions to the work; such changes will be authorized by change order to be prepared by the Engineer for execution by the Owner and the Contractor. The change order shall set forth the basis for any change in contract price, as hereinafter set forth for extra work, and any change in contract time which may result from the change. In the event the Contractor shall refuse to execute a change order which has been prepared by the Engineer and executed by the Owner, the Engineer may in writing instruct the Contractor gencond.mst/spec master GC - to proceed with the work as set forth in the change order and the Contractor may make claim against the Owner for extra work involved therein, as hereinafter provided. 6.02 Minor Changes The Engineer may authorize minor changes in the work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in contract price. If the Contractor believes that any minor change or alteration authorized by the Engineer involves extra work and entitles him to an increase in the contract price, the Contractor shall make written request to the Engineer for a written field order. In such case, the Contractor by copy of his communication to the Engineer or otherwise in writing shall advise the Owner of his request to the Engineer for a written field order and that work involved may result in an increase in the contract price. Any request by the Contractor for a change in contract price shall be made prior to beginning the work covered by the proposed change. 6.03 Extra Work It is agreed that the basis of compensation to the Contractor for work either added or deleted by a change order or for which a claim for extra work is made shall be determined by the unit prices upon which this contract was bid to the extent such work can be fairly classified within the various work item descriptions and for work items that cannot be so classified by one or more of the following methods: Method (A) By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) is agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the "actual field cost" of the work, plus fifteen percent (15 %). In the event said extra work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost' is hereby defined to include the cost to the Contractor of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together gencond.mst/spec master GC -28 with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, also all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a . rateable proportion of premiums on performance and payment bonds and maintenance bonds, public liability and property damage and workers' compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by any law or ordinance, or directed or agreed to by the Owner. The Engineer may direct the form in which accounts of the "actual field cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the Engineer. The Engineer or the Owner may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100 %), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practicable the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15 %) of the "actual field cost" to be paid the Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements' of cost and expense not embraced within the "actual field cost" as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's camp or field office must be maintained primarily on account of such extra work; then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Engineer. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Engineer for written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work, or as to the payment therefor, and the Engineer insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep an accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to mediation or litigation. 6.04 Time of Filing Claims It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Engineer within thirty (30) days after the Engineer has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Engineer shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the Engineer's decision, any demand for mediation shall be filed with the Engineer and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the Engineer's final decision. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claims by either gencond.mstispec master GC -29 party, except claims by Owner for defective work or enforcement of warranties and except as noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. 6.05 Continuing Performance The Contractor shall continue performance of the contract during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. The production or delivery of goods, the furnishing of services and the construction of projects or facilities shall not be delayed, prejudiced or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner may otherwise agree in writing. 7. Abandonment of Contract 7.01 Abandonment by Contractor In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Engineer, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Engineer when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, then and in that case, where performance and payment bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under contract for the work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the surety on the performance bond, or another contractor in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefor (except when used in connection with extra work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under Section 6 herein), it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no performance bond provided or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for, within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (1) The Owner may thereupon employ such force of men and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to the Contractor, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such monies as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under gencond.mst/spec master GC -30 and by virtue of this agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner, or (2) The Owner, under competitive bids taken after notice published as required by law, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case there is any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the surety shall be and remain bound therefor. However, should the cost to complete any such contract prove to be less than would have been the cost to complete under this contract, the Contractor and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his surety shall be so notified and Certificates of Completion and Acceptance, as provided in Paragraph 5.06 hereinabove, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified by the Engineer as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the Contractor and his surety, whereupon the Contractor and/or his surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within fifteen (15) days after the date of such Certificate of Completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized List of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the Contractor and his surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice, the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any gencond.mstispec master GC - machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies, which remain on the work, and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his surety, to their proper owners. The books on all operations provided herein shall be opened to the Contractor and his surety. 7.02 Abandonment by Owner In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of work that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been wrought into the work. Thereupon, the Engineer shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor (at the prices stated in the attached proposal where unit prices are used), the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all extra work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The Engineer shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this agreement and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this agreement. 8. Subcontractors 8.01 Award of Subcontracts for Portions of the Work Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents or in the Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the contract, shall furnish to the Engineer in writing for acceptance by the Owner and the Engineer a list of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the work. The Engineer shall promptly notify the Contractor in writing if either the Owner or the Engineer, after due investigation, has objection to any Subcontractor on such list and does not accept him. Failure of the Owner or the Engineer to make objection promptly to any Subcontractor on the list shall constitute acceptance of such Subcontractor. The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor or any person or organization (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for portions of the work designated in the Contract Documents or, in the Instructions to Bidders or, if none is so designated, with any Subcontractor proposed for the principal portions of the work who has been rejected by the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor gencond.mst/spec master GC -32 will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor or person or organization against whom he has a reasonable objection. If the Owner or the Engineer refuses to accept any Subcontractor or person or organization on a list submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract Documents or the Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute and the contract amount shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate change order shall be issued; however, no increase in the contract amount shall be allowed for any such substitution unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting for acceptance any list or lists of names as required by the Contract Documents or the Instructions to Bidders. If the Owner or the Engineer requires a change of any proposed Subcontractor or person or organization previously accepted by them, the contract amount shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate change order shall be issued. The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization who has been accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, unless the substitution is acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. 8.02 Subcontractual Relations All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate written agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that: (1) (2) require that such work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents; (3) preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer under the contract with respect to the work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights; require submission to the Contractor of the applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with this contract; (4) require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted portions of the work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor where appropriate) in sufficient time so that the Contractor may comply in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the gencond.msdspec master GC -33 (5) Owner; A copy of all such subcontract agreements shall be filed by the Contractor with the Engineer before the Subcontractor shall be allowed to commence work. 8.03 Payments to Subcontractors obligate each subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this section. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an amount directly based upon the value of the work performed and allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work, less the percentage retained from payments to the Contractor. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his subcontractors. If the Engineer fails to approve a payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular Subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor on demand made at any time after the Certificate for Payment should otherwise have been issued, for his work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage. The Engineer may, on request and at his discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on account of work done by such Subcontractors. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to such Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required. 9. Separate Contracts 9.01 Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the project under these or similar conditions of the contract. When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the project, "the Contractor" in the contract documents in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract. 9.02 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly gencond.mstispec master GC -34 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his work, except as to defects which may develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's work. Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the project, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement, if he will so settle. If such separate contractor sues the Owner or initiates an proceeding allowed hereunder on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees and court costs or other costs which the Owner has incurred. 9.03 Cutting and Patching under Separate Contracts The Contractor shall be responsible for any cutting, fitting and patching that may be required to complete his work, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not endanger any work of any other contractors by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering any work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with the written consent of the Engineer. Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 10. Protection of Persons and Property 10.01 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. 10.02 Safety of Persons and Property The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: gencond.mstlspec master GC - (1) all employees on the work and all other persons who may be affected thereby: (2) all the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and (3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, fences, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. All blasting, including methods of storing and handling explosives and highly inflammable materials, shall conform to federal, state, local laws and ordinances. All city ordinances shall be complied with even though some or all of the blasting is done outside the city limits unless the applicable ordinance is in conflict with the law of the jurisdiction where the action is being taken. The following is a list of requirements in addition to federal, state, and local laws and ordinances: 1. The Contractor shall furnish the City of Round Rock with a Certificate of Blasting Insurance in the amount of $300,000.00 for each contract, at least twenty -four (24) hours prior to using explosives. A blasting permit must be obtained from the city at least five (5) days prior to use of explosives. If blasting is covered under the Contractor's General Insurance Certificate for each contract, a separate blasting certificate will not be required. 2. The following public utility companies and city departments will be notified by the Contractor, on every occasion, at least twenty -four (24) hours prior to the use of explosives: Water and Wastewater, Electric, Gas, Telephone and the City Engineering Department. 3. Explosive materials to be used shall be limited to blasting agents and dynamite, unless prior approval of other materials is obtained in writing from the Engineering Department. gencond.mst/spec master GC - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4. During blasting, all reasonable precautions shall be taken to protect pedestrians, passing vehicles, and public or private property. Blasting mats or protective cover shall be used when required by the City Inspector, the permit, or by safe blasting practices. 5. All explosives shall be stored in accordance with Chapter 5, Section 5.200, of the City Code. 6. The Director of Engineering or his representative shall have the right to limit the use of explosives and/or blasting methods which in his opinion are dangerous to the public or nearby property of any kind. 7. The Contractor, at his expense, shall promptly repair or replace all items known to be damaged as a result of blasting. All claims of damage shall be investigated by the City of Round Rock or by consulting firms approved by the city. 8. The Contractor shall maintain accurate records throughout the blasting operations showing the type explosive used, number of holes, pounds per hole, depth of hole, total pounds per shot, delays used, date and time of blast and initials of the inspector. The Contractor is fully responsible for all claims resulting from his blasting operation. All damage or loss to any property referred to in this article caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by the Contractor, except damage or loss attributable solely to faulty drawings or specifications or solely to the acts or omissions of the Owner or the Engineer or anyone employed by either of them, and not attributable in any degree to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Engineer. 10.03 Location and Protection of Utilities Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the location and protection of any and all public utility lines and utility customer service lines in the work area. The Contractor shall exercise due care to locate and to mark, uncover or otherwise protect all such lines in the construction zone and any of the Contractor's work or storage areas. Upon request, the Owner shall provide such information as it has about the location and grade of water, sewer, gas, and telephone and electric lines and other utilities in the work area but such information shall not relieve or be deemed to be in satisfaction of the gencond.mst/spec master GC - Contractor's obligation hereunder, which shall be primary and nondelegable. Any such lines damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor or he shall cause such damage to be repaired at his expense. gencond.mstlspec master GC -38 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5.0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SECTION 01- INFORMATION 01 -01 ENGINEER The word "Engineer" in these Specifications shall be understood as referring to the City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664, Engineer of the Owner, or the Engineer's authorized representative to act in any particular position for the Owner. 01 -02 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICAT FUR NISHED The Agreement will be prepared in not less than five (5) counterpart (original signed) sets. Owner will furnish Contractor two (2) sets of conforming Contract Documents and Specifications and four (4) sets of Plans free of charge, and additional sets will be obtained from the Engineer at commercial reproduction rates plus 20% for handling. 01 -03 GOVERNING CODES 01 -04 LI 1 UIDATED DAMAGES FOR F - LURE TO CO ' LETE ON TIME specond.msdspecs All construction as provided for under these Plans and Specifications shall be governed by any existing Resolutions, Codes and Ordinances, and any subsequent amendments or revisions thereto as set forth by the Owner. The Contractor agrees that time is of the essence for this Contract and that the definite value of damages which would result from delay would be incapable of ascertainment and uncertain, so that for each day of delay beyond the number of days herein agreed upon for the completion of the work herein specified and contracted for, after due allowance for such extension of time as is provided for under the provisions of Section 4.02 of the General Conditions, the Owner may withhold permanently from the Contractor's total compensation, not as penalty but as liquidated damages, the sum of $100.00 per calendar day. 01 -05 LOCATION The location of work shall be as mentioned in the Notice to Bidders and as indicated on Plans. SC -1 01 -06 USAGE OF WATER All water used during construction shall be provided by the City. The City shall specify the location from which the Contractor is to procure water. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all apparatus necessary for procuring, storing, transporting and using water during construction. The Contractor shall strive to use that amount of water which is reasonable to perform the work associated with this contract and shall endeavor to avoid excessive waste. The Contractor will be required to pay for all water used if it is found that unnecessary or excessive waste is occurring during construction. 01 -07 PAY ESTIMATES If pay estimates from the Contractor are not received by the Engineer on or before the time specified in Section 5.04 of the General Conditions, then the pay estimate will not be processed and will be returned to Contractor. SECTION 02- SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS 02 -01 CROSSING UTILITIES Prior to commencing the work associated with this contract, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements with the Owners of such utility companies to uncover their particular utility lines or otherwise confirm their location. Certain utility companies perform such services at their own expense, however, where such is not the case, the Contractor will cause such work to be done at his own expense. 02 -02 UTILITY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION specond.msdspecs The Contractor will be responsible for providing his own utility services while performing the work associated with this contract. No additional payment will be made for this item. SC -2 02 -03 GUARANTEES The Contractor warrants the materials and workmanship and that the work is in conformance with the plans and specifications included in this contract for the period that the Warranty Bond, as outlined in Section 04 of the Special Conditions, is in effect. Upon notice from Owner, the Contractor shall repair defects in all construction or materials which develop during specified period and at no cost to Owner. Neither final acceptance, Certificate of Completion, final payment nor any provision in Contract Documents relieves Contractor of above guarantee. Notice of observed defects will be given with reasonable promptness. Failure to repair or replace defect upon notice entitles Owner to repair or replace same and recover reasonable cost thereof from Contractor. 02 -04 MINIMUM WAGE SCALE Contractors are required to pay prevailing wage rates to laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on behalf of the City engaged in the construction of public works. The wage rate for these jobs shall be the general prevailing wage rates for work of a similar character. This applies to Contractors and Subcontractors. The Contractors and Subcontractors shall keep and make available records of workers and their wages. Contractors and Subcontractors shall pay the prevailing wage rates as adopted by the Owner. There is a statutory penalty of $60.00 per worker per day or portion of a day that the prevailing wage rate is not paid by the Contractor or any Subcontractor. 02 -05 LIMIT OF FINANCIAL RESOURCES specond.msUspecs The Owner has a limited amount of financial resources committed to this Project; therefore, it shall be understood by all bidders that the Owner may be required to change and /or delete any items which he may feel is necessary to accomplish all or part of the scope of work within its limit of financial resources. Contractor shall be entitled to no claim for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of work that may be omitted. At any time during the duration of this contract, the Owner reserves the right to omit any work from this contract. Unit prices for all items previously approved in this contract shall be used to delete or add work per change order. SC -3 02 -06 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW The Owner shall provide a project representative to review the quality of materials and workmanship. 02 -07 LIMITS OF WORK AND PAYMENT It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to complete all work included in this Contract, so authorized by the Owner, as described in the contract documents and technical specifications. All items of work not specifically paid for in the bid proposal shall be included in the unit price bids. Any question arising as to the limits of work shall be left up to the interpretation of the Engineer. 02 -08 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND Owner will not pay for materials on hand. Payment will be made for work completed in accordance with monthly estimate procedure stipulated in the General Conditions of the Agreement. 02 -09 "AS- BUILT" DRAWINGS The Contractor shall mark all changes and revisions on all of his copies of the working drawings during the course of the Project as they occur. Upon completion of the Project and prior to final acceptance and payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer one set of his working drawings, dated and signed by himself and his project superintendent and labeled as "As- Built", that shows all changes and revisions outlined above and that shows field locations of all above ground appurtenances including but not limited to valves, fire hydrants and manholes. These as -built drawings shall become the property of the Owner. Each appurtenance shall be located by at least two (2) horizontal distances measured from existing, easily identifiable, immovable appurtenances such as fire hydrants or valves. Property pins can be used for as- builts tie -ins provided no existing utilities as previously described are available. Costs for delivering as -built drawings shall be subsidiary to other bid items. 02 -10 LAND FOR WORK specond.mst/specs Owner provides, as indicated on Drawings, land upon which work is to done, SC -4 specond,mst/specs right -of -way for access to same and such other lands which are designated for use of Contractor. Contractor provides, at his expense and without liability of Owner, any additional land and access thereto that may be required for his construction operations, temporary construction facilities, or for storage of materials. 02 -11 DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY UTILITY STRUCTURES Whenever existing utilities, not indicated on Plans, present obstructions to grade and alignment of proposed improvements immediately notify engineer, who without delay, will determine if existing utilities are to be relocated, or grade and alignment of proposed improvements changed. Where necessary to move existing services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, etc., as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will make arrangements with the owner of the utility to be moved and have it moved. The costs of any utility relocations will be at the Contractor's sole expense. Owner will not be liable for relocations costs or damages on account of delays due to changes made by owners of privately owned utilities which hinder progress of the work. 02 -12 CONSTRUCTION STAKING All construction staking required to complete the work associated with this contract shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the layout and extent of staking necessary to construct the improvements to the lines and grades shown in the Plans. This item shall not be paid for separately and shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. SECTION 03- TRAFFIC CONTROL Access shall be provided for residents and emergency vehicles at all times. When it becomes necessary to restrict access, the Contractor shall notify all applicable agencies (ie. Fire Department, E.M.S., Public Works, etc.). At the end of each day two lanes of traffic shall be opened to the public. The Contractor shall be responsible for all maintenance, signing and safety precautions necessary for traffic control. This item shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items and no additional compensation shall be given for complying with this Special Condition. SC -5 SECTION 04- WARRANTY BOND SECTION 05- INSURANCE specond.mst/specs Per City of Round Rock Ordinances, a two (2) year Warranty Bond naming the City of Round Rock as obligee will be required for public streets constructed without lime stabilization of subgrade material when the Plasticity Index of the subgrade is above 24. Warranty Bond shall remain in effect for two (2) years from date of City of Round Rock acceptance of improvements. Such bonds shall be from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as surety or other surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner prior to final payment. A one (1) year Warranty Bond in the amount of one hundred (100 %) percent of the contract price will be required for all other improvements and shall be submitted prior to final payment. Such bonds shall be from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as surety (and acceptable according to the latest list of companies holding certificates of authority from the Security of the Treasury of the United States) or other surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner prior to final payment. Section 3.18 of the General Conditions of the Agreement is hereby amended to include the following: 3.18 Insurance Contractor shall carry insurance in the following types and amounts for the duration of this Contract, which shall include items owned by Owner in care, custody and control of Contractor prior and during construction and warranty period, and furnish Certificates of Insurance along with copies of policy declaration pages and all policy endorsements as evidence thereof: a. Statutory Worker's Compensation and minimum $100,000 Employers Liability Insurance. b. Commercial General Liability Insurance with minimum limits of $500,000 per occurrence and $1,000,000 Aggregate or $500,000 for this designated project and $100,000 Fire Damage. SC -6. specond.mstlspecs c. Automobile I,iahility Insurance for all owned, nonowned and hired vehicles with minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $250,000 for each person and $500,000 for each occurrence and Property Damage limits of $100,000 or Combined Single Limit of $600,000. d. On all new or remodeling building projects: All Risk Builders Risk Insurance for insurable building projects shall be insured in the amount of the contract price for such improvements. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by Builders Risk Insurance required under this section, except as to such rights as they may have in the proceeds of such insurance. Contractor shall require similar waivers by Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors. e. Owner and Contractor's Protective Policy. The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the life of this contract and until all work under said contract has been completed and accepted by the Owner, an Owner's and Contractor's Protective Policy which co- insures the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees with the same Commercial General Liability coverage as described above, entitled "Commercial General Liability Insurance." When offsite storage is permitted, policy will be endorsed for transit and off site storage in amounts sufficient to protect property being transported or stored. This insurance shall include, as insured, City of Round Rock, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the work, as their respective interest may appear. If insurance policies are not written for amount specified in b. and c. above, Contractor is required to carry an Excess Liability Insurance Policy for any difference in amounts specified. Contractor shall be responsible for deductibles and self insured retentions, if any, stated in policies. Any self insured retention shall not exceed ten percent of minimum required limits. All deductibles or self insured retentions shall be disclosed on Certificate of Insurance required above. SC -7 specond.mst/specs Contractor shall not commence work at site under this Contract until he has obtained required insurance and until such insurance has been reviewed by Owner's Contract Administration Office. Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractors to commence work until insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease liability of Contractor hereunder. Insurance to be written by a company licensed to do business in the State of Texas at the time policy is issued and acceptable to owner. Contractor shall produce an endorsement to each effected policy: 1. Naming City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664 as additional insured (except Workers' Compensation and Builders Risk). 2. That obligates the insurance company to notify Joanne Land, City Secretary, City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664 of any and all changes to policy 30 days prior to change. 3. That the "other" insurance clause shall not apply to Owner where City of Round Rock is an additional insured shown on policy. It is intended that policies required in this agreement, covering both Owner and Contractor, shall be considered primary coverage as applicable. Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any insurance to lapse during term of this Contract or as required in the Contract. If Contractor is underwritten on a claim -made basis, the retroactive date shall be prior to, or coincident with, the date of this Contract and the Certificate of Insurance shall state that coverage is claims made and also the retroactive date. Contractor shall maintain coverage for duration of this Contract and for two years following completion of this Contract. Contractor shall provide the City annually a Certificate of Insurance as evidence of such insurance. It is further agreed that Contractor shall provide Owner a 30 day notice of aggregate erosion, an advance of the retroactive date, cancellation and/or renewal. SC -8 Construction Type: HEAVY HIGHWAY specond.mstlspecs It is also agreed that Contractor will invoke the tail option at request of Owner and the Extended Reporting Period (ERP) premium shall be paid by Contractor. Owner reserves the right to review insurance requirements of this section during effective period of the Contract and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance coverages and their limits when deemed necessary and prudent by Owner based upon changes in statutory law, court decisions or the claims history of the industry as well as Contractor. Owner shall be entitled, upon request, and without expense, to receive copies of policies and all endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations or exclusions, except where policy provisions are established by law or regulation binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter on any of such policies. Actual losses not covered by insurance as required by the section shall be paid by Contractor. SECTION 06- WAGE RATES GENERAL DECISION TX960043 03/15/96 TX43 General Decision Number TX960043 Superseded General Decision No. TX950043 State: TEXAS County(ies): BELL CORYELL TRAVIS BEXAR GUADALUPE WILLIAMSON BRAZOS HAYS COMAL MCLENNAN Heavy (excluding tunnels and dams) and Highway Construction Projects (does not include building structures in rest area projects). *NOT TO BE USED FOR WORK ON SEWAGE OR WATER SC -9 TREATMENT PLANTS OR LIFT/PUMP STATIONS IN BELL, CORYELL, MCLENNAN AND WILLIAMSON COUNTIES. Modification Number Publication Date 0 03/15/1996 COUNTY(ies): BELL CORYELL TRAVIS BEXAR GUADALUPE WILLIAMSON BRAZOS HAYS COMAL MCLENNAN SUTX2042A 11/16/1991 Rates Fringes AIR TOOL OPERATOR 6.500 ASPHALT HEATER OPERATOR 6.500 ASPHALT RAKER 7.011 ASPHALT SHOVELER 6.550 BATCHING PLANT WEIGHER 8.173 BATTERBOUARD SETTER 7.700 CARPENTER 9.054 CONCRETE FINISHER - PAVING 8.600 CONCRETE FINISHER - STRUCTURES 7.903 CONCRETE RUBBER 6.740 ELECTRICIAN 13.710 FLAGGER 5.150 FORM BUILDER - STRUCTURES 8.017 FORM LINER - PAVING & CURB 7.250 FORM SETTER - PAVING & CURB 7.683 FORM SETTER - STRUCTURES 7.928 LABORER- COMMON 6.078 LABORER- UTILITY 6.852 MECHANIC 10.774 OILER 9.389 SERVICER 7.280 PAINTER - STRUCTURES 10.000 PILEDRIVER 6.600 PIPE LAYER 7.229 BLASTER 9.067 ASPHALT DISTRIBUTOR OPERATOR 7.304 ASPHALT PAVING MACHINE 7.945 BROOM OR SWEEPER OPERATOR 7.117 BULLDOZER, 150 HP & LESS 8.125 specond.msdspecs SC -10 BULLDOZER, OVER 150 HP 8.593 CONCRETE PAVING CURING MACHINE 7.633 CONCRETE PAVING FINISHING MACHINE 9.067 CONCRETE PAVING GANG VIBRATOR 7.250 CONCRETE PAVING SAW 6.200 SLIPPORM MACHINE OPERATOR 8.700 CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE, DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL LESS THAN 1 '/z C.Y. 8.427 CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE, DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL 1 1/2 C.Y. &:OVER 9.880 FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR. CRAWLER MOUNTED 10.475 FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR 10.923 TRUCK MOUNTED FRONT END LOADER 2 1/2 C.Y. & LESS 7.499 FRONT END LOADER OVER 2' /z C.Y. 8.255 HOIST - DOUBLE DRUM 10.750 MOTOR GRADER OPERATOR 9.657 PAVEMENT MARKING MACHINE 6.078 PLANER OPERATOR 7.250 ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL PLANT -MIX PAVEMENTS 7.083 ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL OTHER FLATWHEEL OR TAMPING 6.403 ROLLER, PNEUMATIC, SELF PROPELLED 6.433 SCRAPER -17 C.Y. & LESS 7.245 SCRAPER -OVER 17 C.Y. 7.495 SELF PROPELLED HAMMER OPERATOR 6.078 SIDE BOOM 9.000 TRACTOR - CRAWLER TYPE 7.539 TRACTOR- PNEUMATIC 6.707. TRENCHING MACHINE 6.850 WAGON- DRILL /BORING MACHINE /POST HOLE DRILLER OPERATOR 6.926 REINFORCING STEEL SETTER PAVING 8.158 REINFORCING STEEL SETTER STRUCTURES 9.062 STEEL WORKER - STRUCTURAL 9.242 SIGN ERECTOR 8.640 SPREADER BOX OPERATOR 6.541 BARRICADE SERVICER WORK ZONE 6.078 specond.msUspecs SC -11 MOUNTED SIGN INSTALLER PERMANENT GROUND 6.078 TRUCK DRIVER - SINGLE AXLE LIGHT 6.493 TRUCK DRIVER - SINGLE AXLE HEAVY 6.674 TRUCK DRIVER - TANDEM AXLE SEMI- TRAILER 6.824 TRUCK DRIVER - LOWBOY/FLOAT 8.041 TRUCK DRIVER - TRANSIT MIX 6.078 WELDER 8.824 Unlisted classifications needed for work not included, within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (v)). In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under that identifier do not reflect collectively. bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. specond.mstispecs END OF GENERAL DECISION SC -12 CLASSIFICATION Rate Health Pension Vacation Total Wage ASBESTOS WORKER 58.78 $0.00 50.00 50.00 58.78 CARPENTER $15.52 $1.57 50.97 50.00 518.06 CARPET LAYER/FLOORING INSTALLER $8.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 $8.00 CONCRETE.FINISHER 510.27 $0.00 $0.00 50.00 510.27 DATA COMMUNICATION /TELECOM INSTALLER $12.08 50.76 50.50 50.05 513.39 DRYWALL INSTALLER/CEILING INSTALLER $10.91 $0.00 50.00 50.00 510.91 ELECTRICIAN 517.44 52.16 51.05 51.05 521.70 ELEVATOR MECHANIC $16.75 $3.85 52.19 $1.50 $24.29 FIRE PROOFING INSTALLER 58.00 $0.00 $0.00 50.00 58.00 GLAZIER 513.60 $2.24 $1.15 50.54 517.53 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATOR 510.56 50.00 50.00 50.00 510.56 INSULATOR 513.75 $1.16 50.92 50.03 515.86 IRON WORKER 512.18 50.00 50.00 $0.00 512.18 LABORER/HELPER 57.45 $0.02 50.00 $0.00 57.50 LATHER/PLASTERER 512.50 50.00 $0.00 50.00 512.50 LIGHT EQUIPMENT OPERATOR 57.75 50.00 $0.00 50.00 57.75 MASON 516.00 $0.00 50.00 50.00 $16.00 METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER 511.00 50.62 50.00 50.34 $11.96 MILLWRIGHT 515.91 $1.63 51.00 50.00 518.54 PAINTER/WALL COVERING INSTALLER 58.00 $0.00 50.00 $0.00 58.00 PIPEFITTER 518.10 $1.42 51.80 50.00 $21.32 PLUMBER 512.68 50.00 50.00 50.00 512.68 ROOFER 510.00 $0.00 $0.00 50.00 510.00 SHEET METAL WORKER 518.40 $2.39 $2.55 50.33 523.67 SPRINKLER FITTER 518.25 $3.40 52.20 50.00 523.85 TERRAZZO WORKER 50.00* $0.00 50.00 50.00 50.00* TILE SETTER 515.00 $0.32 50.00 50.00 515.32 WATERPROOFER/CAULKER 510.64 $0.00 50.00 50.00 510.64 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COUNTY NAME: WILLIAMSON PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TRADES Date Printed: April 15, 1997 *$0.00 in the rate field indicated insufficient data was received to determine a prevailing wage rate for this 1 classification. Government Code Title 10, Sec. 2258.023, paragraph C state: "A contractor or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates and specify the rates in the contract as provided in Section 2258.022. (Property of General Services Commission, Based on 1996 Survey results) specond.msl/specs SC -13 6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1T 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by these Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations in connection with the inspection and testing, complete in accordance with the Plans, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 1.02 GOVERNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS techspec.mst/spec.master NOTE: The item number designation shown in parentheses adjacent to captions herein is a reference to City of Austin Standard Specifications. STREET, WATER. SEWER AND DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS The current City of Austin Standard Specifications as adopted and amended by the City of Round Rock and the current City of Austin Erosion and Sedimentation Control Manual are hereby referred to and included in this contract as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein and they shall be applied to this project except as modified in these Specifications and on the Plans. Wherever the term "City of Austin" is used in the Austin Specifications, it shall be construed to mean the City of Round Rock. Wherever the term "Engineer" is used in the Austin Specifications, it shall be construed to mean the City of Round Rock. TS -1 ITEM 2 CONTROL OF WORK 2.01 CLEAN -UP 2.01.1 CONSTRUCTION S 2.01.2 BACKWORK 2.02 GRADING techspec.mstlspecmaster During construction the Contractor shall keep the site free and clean from all rubbish and debris and shall clean-up the site promptly when notified to do so by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, maintain the streets and roads free from dust, mud, excess earth or debris which constitutes a nuisance or danger to the public using the thoroughfare, or the occupants of adjacent properties. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets and roads over which hauling is done, and any such spillage or debris deposited on streets, due to the Contractor's operations, shall be immediately removed. The Contractor shall coordinate his operations in such a manner as to prevent the amount of clean-up and completion of back works from becoming excessive. Should such a condition exist, the Engineer may order all or portions of the work to cease and refuse to allow any work to commence until the back work is done to the Engineer's satisfaction. The Contractor shall do such grading in and adjacent to the construction area associated with this contract as may be necessary to leave such areas in a neat and satisfactory condition approved by the Engineer. TS -2 ITEM 3 EXAMINATION AND REVIEW 3.01 EXAMINATION OF WORK techspec.mstlspec. master The work covered under this Contract shall be examined and reviewed by the Engineer, representatives of all govemmental entities which have jurisdiction, and the Owner's authorized representative. The quality of material and the quality of installation of the improvements shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility for the construction methods and safety precautions in the undertaking of this Contract. 3.02 NOTIFICATION The Engineer and Owner must be notified a minimum of 24 -hours in advance of beginning construction, testing, or, requiring presence of the Engineer, project representative, or Owner's representative. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKING The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor reference points and benchmarks that, . in the Engineer's opinion, provide sufficient information for the Contractor to perform construction staking. 3.04 PROTECTION OF S TAKES. MARKS. ETC. All engineering and surveyor's stakes, marks, property corners, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of destruction or removal during the course of this project, such stakes, marks, property corners, etc., shall be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's sole expense. TS -3 ITEM 4 PROTECTION AND PRECAUTION 4.01 WORK IN FREEZING WEATHER Portions of the work may continue as directed by the Engineer. 4.02 PROTECTION OF TREES. PLANTS AND SHRUBS The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to preserve all existing trees, plants and shrubs but where it is justifiable and necessary the Contractor may remove trees and plants for construction right -of -way but only with approval of the Engineer. 4.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES AND BARRICADES techspec.mst/spec.master Traffic control measures and barricades shall be installed in accordance with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and in other locations deemed necessary by the Engineer, for the protection life and property. Under no circumstances will any existing road be permitted to remain closed over a weekend. No separate pay will be made for this item. Costs for this item shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 4.04 PROPERTY LINES AND MONUMENTS The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection, reference and resetting of property corner monuments if disturbed. 4.05 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL The Contractor shall at his own expense, make arrangement for the disposal of surplus material, such as rock, trees, brush and other unwanted backfill materials. 4.06 I TIR' E IFPR MI E The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide additional space as necessary for his operations and storage of materials. TS -4 ITEM 5 MATERIALS 5.01 TRADE NAMES Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the specifications an article or class of material is designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog number of any maker, patentee, manufacturer, or dealer, such designations shall be taken as intending to mean and specify the articles described or another equal thereto in quality, finish, and serviceability for the purpose intended, as may be determined and judged by the Engineer in his sole discretion. 5.02 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP tec hspec. m st/spec, master No material which has been used by the Contractor for any temporary purpose whatever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without the written consent of the Engineer. Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is not the intention of the owner to discriminate against an equal product of another manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of quality for performance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of bids. Where the words "equivalent ", "proper" or "equal to" are used, they shall be understood to mean that the item referred to shall be "proper", the "equivalent" of, or "equal to" some other item, in the opinion or judgement of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully equal to approved samples. Notwithstanding that the words "or equal to" or other such expressions may be used in the specifications in connection with a material, manufactured article or process, the material, article or process specifically designated shall be used, unless a substitute is approved in writing by the Engineer, and the Engineer will have the right to require the use of such specifically designated material, article or process. TS -5 7.0 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT B -5 E L 0 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 O 0 Future Bul g B -6 O � B -7 B -8 SCALE - FEET Operations/ Control Treatment Structure J r ▪ Future B -9 i Chlorine 1 Facility L / I Clarifier \Chlorine • Na 1 A Facility I / 1 1 �� I I Control (Building I \I I Clarifier r — — Nat A I \ \. .„, Clarifier 1 Na3 A 1 1 Clarifier 1 No. 4 / 1 ROUND ROCK PROJECT LAYOUT PHASE IV EXPANSION 0 40 80 180 Sc. es PROJECT: Phase IV Expansion BORING NO. B -2 Round Rock Water Treatment Plant PROJECT NO. 96995030 Round Rock, Texas DATE 2-22-99 CLIENT: SURFACE ELEVATION Austin, Texas PAGE 1 of 1 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(SI: Dry Angered 0 to 1 root; Wet Rotary 1 to 20 feet J O 2 N h : I _ in MM -1 naI so •m1 -- MINEI =l to , =I .9 IIIIZ IOBWA5 1105 ILdl H1400 re y H ROD =24 .I MOISTURE CONTENT 1 %1 1 I I DRY DENSITY POUNDS /CU.FT ATTERBERG LIMITS %) I MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE I %) p I CO M PRESSIVE ST (TONS/SCI FT) - FAILURE STRAIN 1 %I _ I CONFINING PRESSURE (POUNDS /SO IN) LIOUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX 1 GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater observed during dry sugermg. LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM Very stiff reddish tan silty clay (CL) with limestone \fragments Tan limestone (Edwards Group) with clay seams and layers - complete loss of drilling fluid at 8 feet - solution channels 8 to 9 feet - calcite layer 11 to 12 feet - calcite seam at 15 feet -with scattered solution channels below 15 feet 15 N- Mel ROD =57 EM I I .. R =100 1111E. RQD =37 20, =1 ill 25 Boring Terminated at 20 feet 30 35 MI u III 1 40 N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE T - TXDOT CONE PENETRATION RESISTANCE P • POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE R . PERCENTAGE OF ROCK CORE RECOVERY ROD - ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION REMARKS: T 7 1 F — J C J � ` � max A LOG OF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A -6 PROJECT: Phase IV Expansion BORING NO. B -4 Round Rock Water Treatment Plant PROJECT NO. 96995030 Round Rock, Texas DATE 22 CLIENT: Camp D esser & McKee, Inc. SURFACE ELEVATION Austin, Texas - PAGE 1 of 1 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Dry Angered 0 to 2 feet: Wet Rotary 2 sto 20 feet E S ~ o O 1' h r, w; _. a H w X 3 w .i gri 2 .- - Nc2 .0 w w w¢ 9 05 a 6 p z a: a Z u N O � ' ° 2 ATTERBERG LIMITS . %1 ;e _ to rv > 0 2 =�¢ _ h H 0 w O y v t d4 Q N j . ? ¢ Z a.0 Z to O Z Z uu a 2 O ' O t- f J d w O Z a ~ r .. a GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater observed during dry angering. IL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 5 il P =4.5+ 25 Hard dark Drown clay (CH) with limestone fragments mi l R =90 ROD =60 5=69 ROD =31 R=62 RQD =0 RQDBO R =34 ROD =20 . - Tan limestone (Edwards Group) -with solution channels 2 to 4.5 feet - complete loss of drilling at 4 feet - vugular 6 to 10 feet -small void at 8 feet -clay seam at 9.5 feet -with clay seams 10 to 15 feet -void 13.5 to 14.5 feet -with solution channels below 15 feet 10 fi NI IIII 1 ■ • 15 il l 20 I MI I 25 • Boring Terminated at 20 feet 30 35 40 N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE T • TXDOT CONE PENETRATION RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE R - PERCENTAGE OF ROCK CORE RECOVERY ROD - ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION REMARKS: ,-.� C ' IBC ram�aw- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A -8 PROJECT: Phase IV Expansion BORING NO. 6 -6 ' ' 1 1 , 1 ' , II . , OM MN • • OM OM MI NM MO i OM I• i —• IMP ° °••'-'r Rock Water Treatment Dlant PROJECT NO. 96995030 Round Rock, Texas DATE 2 -23 -99 CLIENT: Camp Dresser & McKee, Inc. SURFACE ELEVATION Austin, Texas PAGE 1 of 1 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHODIST: Dry Augered 0 to 1 foot; Wet Rotary 1 to 15 feet ( 4) H1d30 I MOISTURE CONTENT I %I DRY DENSITY POUNDS /CU. FT ATTERBERG MI COMPRESSIVE 0 STRENGTH (TONS /SO FTI FAILURE STRAIN I %I CONFINING PRESSURE (POUNDS /SO IN/ LIOUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX !US NO. 200 SIEVE I GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater Observed during dry angering. LL OM MM IQ ' 1 Mid DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM Hard reddish brown clay (CH) with limestone fragments N n 72 I N 0 Tan limestone (Edwards Group), vugular -with solution channels 8 to 10 feet - complete loss of drilling fluid at 11 feet -with clay seams 12 to 14.5 feet -chert seam at 14.5 feet t9� — 20 25 Boring Terminated at 15 feet El 30 5 � 40 ^ N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE T • TXDOT CONE PENETRATION RESISTANCE P • POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 5 - PERCENTAGE OF ROCK CORE RECOVERY ROD • ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION REMARKS: T � 1 BC 6■47/403.3.PC A LOG OF BORING A-10 PROJECT: Phase IV Expansion BORING NO. 8 -8 Round Rock Water Treatment Plant PROJECT NO. 96995030 Round Rock, Texas DATE _ 2 -3 -99 CLIENT: Camp Dresser & McKee, Inc. SURFACE ELEVATION Austin, Texas 1 0 20 25 30 35 40 FIELD DATA 3 8 0 P =2.5 R =71 ROD= 27 R =98 ROD=56 R =80 ROD =13 24 155 LABORATORY DATA ATTERBERG LIMITS %1 2 LL 65 PL 29 PI 36 N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE T • TXDOT CONE PENETRATION RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE R - PERCENTAGE OF ROCK CORE RECOVERY ROD - ROCK OUALITY DESIGNATION LOG OF BORING 637 2 REMARKS: DRILLING METHOD(S): Dry Augered 0 to 2 feet: We Rotary 2 to 15 feet GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater observed during dry augering. • -clay layer 5 to 6 feet -clay layer 7 to 7.5 feet - vugular 9 to 11 feet DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM Tan limestone (Edwards Group) - complete loss of fluid at 11.5 feet -with solution channels 11.5 to 13 feet Boring Terminated at 15 feet PAGE 1 of 1 Very stiff reddish brown clay (CHi with limestone fragments A -12 KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATIONS AND SYMBOLS SOIL TYPES • - %/ r• • •' CLAY SILT SAND i.;$;0 00 �j! '1 1,1, Irlr�l.l SILT' CLAY jI CLAYEY j SILT CLAYEY SAND !111111 . •t r . SANDY CLAY SANDY E ! i SILT SILTY SAND r �i1 � c > L ' GRA�VYLLY GRAVELLY SILT FILL • MATERIAL �•' ;,...:5,-1i• A..d GRAVEL • .:r -r JPte' a a l e s O(�`J ,err.• CLAYEY GRAVEL i S rl 3a i. SILTY GR AVEL s `:<D • r `�� g i= y -,r CONCRETE, ASPHALT. AND/ OR BASE MATERIAL CONSISTENCY OF COHESIVE SOILS Undrained Penetration Compressive Resistance Strength (blows per foot) Consistency (loo 0 -2 Very Soft 0 -0.25 2 -4 Solt 0.25 -0.5 4.8 Firm 0.5 -1.0 8 -15 Stiff 1.0.2.0 15 - 30 Very Stiff 2.0 - 4.0 > 30 Hard > 4.0 PLASTICITY OF RELATIVE DENSITY OF COHESIVE SOILS COHESIONLESS SOILS Penetration Plasticity Degree of Resistance Relative Index Plasticity (blows per fool) Density 0 -5 None 0 -4 Very Loose 5 - 10 Low 4 - 10 Loose 110 -20 Moderate 10 -30 Medium Dense 20.40 Plastic 30 -50 Dense > 40 Highly Plastic > 50 Very Dense TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL STRUCTURE Slickensided - having inclined planes of weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance Fissured - containing shrinkage cracks, frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually more or less vertical Laminated - composed of thin layers of varying color and texture Interbedded • composed of alternate layers of different soil types Calcareous - containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate SAMPLER TYPES Undisturbed Shelby Tube Disturbed 1 Shelby Tube Standard Penetration U Teat Auger Sample A -18 NEC ENGINEERING, INC. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Contract Description: Work shall include new lab building and miscellaneous site improvements on the site of water treatment plant, Round Rock, Texas. B. Contractor use of site and premises. C. Work Sequence. D. Owner occupancy. E. Utilities. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of state, city, and Federal laws, codes and regulations. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limit activity to areas noted on Drawings. This work will run concurrent with work by others at the existing water treatment plant. The site is within the ETJ of the City of Round Rock. B. Protection: Assume full responsibility for protection of the site within the limits shown. Protect all adjacent surfaces from damage during construction. C. Cleaning: Do not unreasonably encumber the site or structure with materials or equipment. Clean -up site daily. Remove all hazardous materials as soon as possible, no less than daily. If the contractor wishes to be paid for any materials off -site, they must be insured to the satisfaction of the Owner. D. Coordination: Coordinate with Owner and Architect working hours requiring obstruction of exits; staging, storage and parking areas; protection of occupants and adjacent materials; and sanitation and utilities use. 01010 - 1 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct work in phases to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements. 1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the existiing water treatment plant buildings and site through the duration of this work. Schedule the work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01010 - 2 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Not used. SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES A. An allowance is an amount proposed by the Owner and included in the BASE BID that will be added to or deducted from the BASE BID amount for items, materials, systems, or services described in the Schedule of Allowances. B. The Contractor shall coordinate related work as required to ensure work affected by the Allowance is complete and fully integrated into the Project. C. Schedule: Coordinate schedule of required services. Notify owner 36 hours in advance of providing services. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Include as part of the Allowance any items incidental to or required for a complete service whether or not mentioned as part of the Allowance. A. Submit information on service provider, qualifications, hourly rates and other charges. Submit invoices as applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE A. Allow $18.00 /sq. Yd. For purchase only of vinyl wall covering. Delivery, installation, and necessary accessories for complete installation shall be in base bid. B. Allow $18.00 /sq. yd. for purchase only of glue down carpet. Delivery, installation, and necessary accessories for complete installation shall be in base bid. END OF SECTION 01020 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.2 NOTIFICATION SECTION 01030 ALTERNATIVE BIDS 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. An Alternate is an amount proposed by the Bidders and stated on the BID FORM that will be added to or deducted from the BASE BID amount if the Owner decides to accept a change in either scope of work or products, materials, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall coordinate related work and modify the adjacent work as required to ensure work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project. A. Schedule: Specification sections referenced contain requirements necessary to achieve the work described. B. Include as part of each Alternate any items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit information as applies in the specification section referenced for each Alternate. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE A. The following are not shown in any order of priority or cost. ALTERNATE NO. 1: Fluorocarbon Kynar 500 finish on metal roof system. Base Bid: Silicone polyester finish metal roof system. END OF SECTION 01030 - 1 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and limitations for, cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Building. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Date and time work will be executed. 5. Utility disruptions anticipated. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions and acknowledgment of adequate protection measures. 01045 - 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. C. Provide protection adequate for existing surfaces to keep from damage. 3.3 CUTTING A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work. B. Do not over cut any exposed surfaces to remain. Limit cutting of exposed surfaces to areas to be covered by new equipment or accessories. C. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work. D. Remove and replace defective or non - conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. F. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. G. Employ competent tradesmen or original installer to perform cutting sight- exposed surfaces. H. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. 3.4 PATCHING A. Execute patching to complement and match adjacent Work. B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work. C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. D. Employ competent tradesmen or original installer to perform patching for sight- exposed surfaces. E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 01045 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with code, to full thickness of the penetrated element. H. Refinish and or replace surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish or replace entire unit. END OF SECTION 01045 - 3 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed Products list. D. Shop Drawings. E. Product Data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturer's installation instructions. H. Manufacturers' certificates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports. B. Section 01700 '- Contract Closeout: Contract warranties, bonds, manufacturers' certificates, and closeout submittals. C. All technical sections Divisions 2 through Division 16 for products. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Owner's standard form or other as approved by Architect. B. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate. C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 01300 - 1 D. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. E. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect /Engineer review stamps. H. Revise and resubmit, identify all changes made since previous submission. I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date.established in Notice to Proceed. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week. E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and required by Allowances. 1.5 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 01300 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for review. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with the SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. 1.7 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. 1.8 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect /Engineer selection. C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. D. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Architect /Engineer. 01300 - 3 E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections. 1.9 MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.10 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer to Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01300 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance - control of installation. B. Tolerances C. References. D. Mockup. E. Inspecting and testing laboratory services. F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals• Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 01400 - 1 1.4 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed Products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place. 1.5 REFERENCES A. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect /Engineer shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.6 INSPECTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform inspecting and testing. .B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the Architect /Engineer or the Owner. C. Inspecting, testing, and source quality control may occur on or off the project site. Perform off -site inspecting or testing as required by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect /Engineer, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non - compliance with Contract Documents. E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect /Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. 01400 - 2 F. Testing or inspecting does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract requirements. G. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect /Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspecting or testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment and as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect /Engineer 7 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect /Engineer. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for information. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01400 - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, fire protection, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, and protection of the Work. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary field office. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Contractor shall make provisions for temporary electricity for construction operations. 1.4 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F degrees in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.5 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.6 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 01500 - 1 1.7 FACSIMILE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.8 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Limited amounts of existing utility service are available at the site. Contractor shall make provisions for temporary water service for construction operations. B. Abuse of such facilities shall terminate contractors option. C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.9 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Contractor shall make provisions for temporary sanitary facilities during construction. 1.10 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barriers to protect building occupants, maintain fire exits, and control dust and other construction nuisances. C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. D. Protect stored materials, and site from damage. 1.11 FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide adequate fire protection measures. Fire extinguishers may be same as those required to be supplied for permanent installation. B. Maintain fire exits, rerouting building occupant exiting as approved by fire marshall. 1.12 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain as shown on drawings. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide erosion barriers as required to protect site. 01500 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.13 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, to prevent entry of unauthorized persons, and to protect building occupants. 1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.15 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.16 PARKING A. Parking on -site (curbside parking) is available. Parking on -site will be limited during periods of Owner occupancy. 1.17 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 01500 - 3 C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off -site. 1.18 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Provide temporary facilities until permanent buildings are in place. Maintain weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, minimum size to provide meeting space for weekly construction progress meetings for all personnel. 1.19 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion. B. Remove underground installations. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Replace air filters and light fixture lamps utilized during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01500 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and labels intact and. legible. B. Store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide bonded or insured off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. 01600 - 1 E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting those standards or description as approved by Architect. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, options or substitutions allowed only as approved by Architect. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. D. Product as selected: Architect to select from manufacturers full range of standard colors or materials, unless noted otherwise. E. Equal or Approved Equal: Approval is at the sole discretion of the Architect. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. Approval of any substitution is at the sole discretion of the Architect. B. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product. 01600 - 2 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with re- approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed Product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect /Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. PART 2 PRODUCTS " Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01600 - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Testing and Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect /Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect /Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean equipment and adjacent surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft 01700 - 1 surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean site; sweep areas. E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. F. Replace all air filters and light picture lamps utilized during construction. 1.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; in clean undamaged condition, record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications, 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Do not use permit drawings for Record Documents. Return permit drawings to Owner. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark with red erasable pencil and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark with red erasable pencil each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 01700 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Submit documents to Architect /Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8 -1/2 x 11 inch text pages, two D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect /Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a) Significant design criteria. b) List of equipment. c) Parts list for each component. d) Operating instructions. e) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. t) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a) Shop drawings and product data. b) Air and water balance reports. c) Certificates. d) Photocopies of warranties and bonds. E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect /Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection. 01700 - 3 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. D. Submit prior to fmal Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.9 TESTING A. Provide copies of test results for system. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01700 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 02: SITE WORK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02222 EXCAVATION FOR BUILDINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Site excavation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01400 - Quality Control B. Section 02223 - Backfilling. 1.03 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave -in or loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Excavations greater than 5'0" deep shall be designed by an Engineer registered in the State of Texas and meet all requirement of state statutes for trench safety. F. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases. G. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. H. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost. I. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run -off into excavation. 02222 -1 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for retention systems under provisions of Section 01300 and prepared under the direction of an Engineer registered in the State of Texas. No excavations deeper than 5' -0" will be permitted prior to approval of the retention system drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, and debris. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum. Coordinate with Section 01400. B. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil required for building foundations, to a minimum of 12" below existing grade, or to top of the tan limestone whichever is deeper. B. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation. C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. D. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock. 02222 -2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner. F. Fill over - excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces by filling with concrete in accordance with direction by Architect/Engineer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces under provisions of Section 01400. B Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave -in or loose soil from falling into excavation. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing. END OF SECTION 02222 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02223 BACKFILLING FOR BUILDINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Building perimeter backfilling to subgrade elevations. B. Fill under slabs -on- grade. C. Compaction requirements. D. Site filling to subgrade elevation for parking and landscaping areas. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services: Compaction requirements of backfill. B. Section 02222 - Excavation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM CI36 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. TSDHPT TEX -113 -E Compaction Test. 1.04 TESTS A. Tests and analysis of fill materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D- 698 or TEX 113 -E and under provisions of Section 01400. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. Fill to testing laboratory, in air- tight containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SELECT FILL MATERIALS A. Type A - Structural Fill: Crushed natural stone; with a maximum particle size of 2 inches in nominal diameter. 02223 -1 3.02 PREPARATION Sieve Size Percent Passine 3 inch 0 1 3/4 inch 0 - 10% No. 4 45 - 75% No. 40 60 - 85% Maximum Liquid Limit of 40 and Maximum Plasticity Index of 15. 2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIALS A. Subsoil: Imported or reused from site; free of rocks larger than 3 inch size, and debris, P.I. < 15. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify stockpiled fill to be reused is approved. B. Verify foundation or basement walls are braced to support surcharge forces imposed by backfilling operations. C. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and ground surfaces are not frozen. A. When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density requirements for backfill material. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in -situ compaction. Backfill with subsoil and compact to density equal to requirements forsubsequent backfill material. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations. Use unfrozen materials. B. Backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces. 02223 -2 1 1 1 1 1 $ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth. D. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth. E. Employ a placement method so not to disturb or damage foundation dampproofing. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials, within 2% to attain required compaction density. G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet unless noted otherwise. I Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. J. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. K. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698 and under provisions of Section 01400. B. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. 3.06 SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS A. The paragraphs below identify location, fill material to be used (identified from lower to upper fill type), compacted thickness of each level, and compaction expressed as a percentage of maximum density and optimum moisture in comparison with ANSI /ASTM D698. B. Interior Slab -On- Grade: 02223 -3 1) Common fill up to 24 inches below the bottom of the slab, compacted to 95 percent. 2) Type A Structural fill, 12 inches thick minimum compacted to 95 percent. END OF SECTION 02223 -4 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 02250 COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING A. Materials, labor, and equipment necessary to provide compaction of existing or imported soils. B. Areas included: building foundations and slabs. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation (TSDHPT) Test Method TEX -113 -E B. TSDHPT Test Method TEX -114 -E C. ANSI/ASTM D698 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Laboratory shall submit 3 copies of Moisture/Density Curves for each soil type. B. Testing Laboratory shall submit 3 copies of Field Density Reports for each test performed. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory shall be allowed to secure necessary samples of proposed soil types for testing to insure conformance to specification requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. 02250 - 1 3.02 Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with applicable procedures. A. Building pad subgrade; compact upper 6 inches to 95% maximum dry density at +2% optimum moisture as defined by ASTM D698. B. Select fill under building slab and foundation: compact to 95% maximum density at ±2% optimum moisture as defined by ASTM D698. 3.03 Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 3.04 Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 3.05 Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. B. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D698 and TDH TEX -113- E, as applicable. C. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. D. Paved Areas and Building Slab Fill: Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and elevations as directed. 02250 - 2 3.07 If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained. END OF SECTION 02250- 3 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 REFERENCES SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL A. Soil treatment for termite control below grade, at interior and exterior foundation perimeter. A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate each toxicant to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three (3) years experience approved by manufacturer and licensed by the State of Texas. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for application in accordance with EPA. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Apply toxicant immediately 12 hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs -on- grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA and Local authority approved; synthetically color dyed to • permit visual identification of treated soil. B. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer. 02281 -1 2.2 MIX A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment. B. Verify final grading is complete. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts. C. Re -treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. D. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re -test. 3.3 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work. . B. Do not permit soil grading over treated work. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Locations: 1. Under Slabs -on- Grade. 2. Both Sides of Foundation Surface. END OF SECTION 02281 -2 SECTION 02905 LANDSCAPING 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of soil, placement of plants, ground cover, seed, sod, and fertilizer. 1..2 QUALITY CONTROL A. Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plant life specified in this Section. B. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting. C. Maintenance Services: Performed by installer. 1..3 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty including one continuous growing season including coverage of plants from death or unhealthy conditions. B. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 GRASS A. Seed Mixture: 1. March 15 - October 15 - Permanent Turf Type a. Seed Mixture #1 `Topgun' primed Buffalo Grass: Wildflower mix: 10 -20 -10 Homogenized Fertilizer Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 2 lbs pls /1,000 sf 4 lbs pls /1,000 sf 6 lbs /1,000 sf 4 lbs /1,000 sf i. Apply this seed mixture 2 times as part of the base bid. If the initial application is March 15 through June 30, apply again between September 1 and October 1. 02905 - 1 ii. If the first application is after June 30, the second application, minus the wildflower mix, should be the following season between April 15 and May 31. 2. October 15 - April 15 - Temporary Turf Only a. Seed Mixture #1 Annual Ryegrass 15 lbs /1,000 sf Fertilizer 61bs /1,000 sf Wood Cellulose Mulch 45 lbs /1,000 sf Wildflower Mix 4 lbs /1,000 sf Should project timing require the application of a temporary turf, it shall be followed during the April to October planting season with the permanent turf mixes as specified. The base bid shall include all permanent turn establishment, regardless of whether the temporary seeding is applied. 3. Wildflower mix shall comprise equal amounts of Little Bluestem, Blue Gramma, Sideoats Gramma, Black -Eyed Susan, Coreopsis, Gayfeather, Hymenozys, Purple Coneflower, Yarrow, and Texas Bluebonnet. B. Sod: ASPA Approved Field grown grade; cultivated grass sod; with strong fibrous root system. 1. `Topgun' Buffalo Grass Type: 100 percent. C. Machine cut sod with minimum' inch (13 min) and maximum one inch (25 mm) topsoil base. 2..2 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER A. Trees, Plants and Ground Cover: Species and size identified in Plant Schedule as indicated on Drawings, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work. 2..3 SOIL AND SOIL ENHANCEMENT MATERIALS A. Topsoil: May be excavated from site and reused, minimum 4" depth. Balance of topsoil may be imported: Sandy loam, Fertile, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots. Mix thoroughly with reused site material where applicable. B. Fertilizer: Fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources, to the following proportions: Nitrogen 13 percent, phosphoric acid 13 percent, soluble potash 13 percent. 02905 - 2 2..4 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to ensure anchorage of sod on slope. B. Mesh: Interwoven plastic. C. Edging: Plastic. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that required underground utilities are in proper location. B. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches (75 mm). 3..2 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Rake smooth. B. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage. C. Place topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 6 inches (150 mm). D. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3..3 SEEDING A. Hydroseed with a seed slurry at a rate of 2.5 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. B. Immediately following seeding, apply agricultural mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches (3 mm). C. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. 3..4 LAYING SOD A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. 02905 - 3 B. Lay sod within 48 hours after harvesting; with tight staggered joints. C. On slopes 1:2 and steeper, place mesh over top soil, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs. D. Water sodded areas immediately after placement. 3..5 PLANTING A. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared topsoil mixture. Backfill soil mixture. B. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of top soil and again when full. 3..6 MAINTENANCE A. Water, mow, fertilize, re -seed as required to obtain complete coverage with no bare spots. B. Maintain until approval and acceptance by governmental authority. END OF SECTION 02905 - 4 DIVISION 03: CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. B. Openings for other affected work. C. Form accessories. D. Stripping forms. 1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication: Metal fabrications attached to formwork. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. C. PS 1 - Constructon and Industrial Plywood. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to meet design and code requirements, so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines, and dimensions. A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301. 03100 -1 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for Round Rock,Texas. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, and arrangement of joints and ties. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials under provisions of Section 01500. B. Deliver form materials in manufacturer's packaging with installation instructions. C. Store off ground in ventilated and protected area to prevent deterioration from moisture or damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one exterior side grade; sound, undamaged sheets with straight edges. B. Lumber: SYP species; #2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. C. Pan Type: Steel type: removable; of size and profile required. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Snap -off metal of fixed length; cone type; 1 inch break back dimension; free of defects that will leave holes no larger than one inch diameter in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood strips type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths. 03100 -2 D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with formwork. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Hand -trim sides and bottoms of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete. B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling, stripping, so that concrete is not damaged during its removal. C. Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores, where required to remain in place. 3.03 ERECTION A. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by construction loads. B. Camber slabs and beams to achieve ACI 301 tolerances. C. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. D. Provide chamfer strips on external comers of all exposed concrete. E. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances in accordance with ACI 301. 3.04 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. 03100 -3 B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive special finishes or applied coverings which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete. B. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. C. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.06 FORM REMOVAL A. Notify Architect/Engineer prior to removing formwork. B. Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal. C. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete surface coloration. - D. Do not remove forms and shoring until concrete has sufficient strength to support its own weight, and construction and design loads which may be imposed upon it. Remove load supporting forms when concrete has attained 75 percent of required 28 day compressive strength, provided construction is reshored. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds. B. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean- outports. C. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from forms. Do not use de -icing salts. Do not use water to clean out completed forms, unless formwork and construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air to remove foreign matter. END OF SECTION 03100 -4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Reinforcing steel bars, for cast -in -place concrete. B. Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, and spacers, for supporting reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete placement and vapor barrier. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. C. ANSI /ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ANSI /AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. CRSI -. Manual of Practice. G. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. H. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, and Documents 63 and 65. B. Conform to ACI 301. 03200 -1 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide reinforcement for field sample specified in Sections 03100 and 03300. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices. 1.07 CERTIFICATES A. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chemical analysis. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billet -steel deformed bars, uncoated finish. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type, or acceptable patented system. B. Metal Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. Supports to be spaced a maximum of 4' -0" on center each way. All supports shall be metal with sand plates. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315, providing concrete cover specified in Section 03300. B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress. Indicate location of splices on shop drawings. 03200 -2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings. B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from alignment or measurement. C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03300. END OF SECTION 03200 -3 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cast -in -place concrete foundation footings B. Floors and slabs on fill on vapor barrier. C. Concrete fill in Reinforced Unit Masonry. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03346 - Concrete Curing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. C. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. D. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. E. ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. F. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work. 03300 -1 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for RoundRock, Texas. 1.06 FIELD SAMPLES A. Cast field sample in formwork specified in Section 03100 under provisions of Section 01300. B. Use specified concrete. C. Obtain acceptance of surface finish. D. Maintain sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work. Remove when directed. 1.07 TESTS A. Testing and analysis of concrete will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work. C. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301. D. Tests of cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated herein. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu. yds of each class of concrete placed each day. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 1.08 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit product data under provisions Section 01300. B. Provide product data for specified products. 03300 -2 C Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type I Portland type; grey color. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. B. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A - water reducing. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Non - shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 5000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Provide concrete of the following characteristics: 1. Comprehensive Strength (28 days): 2. Slump: 03300 -3 3000 psi Slabs 5" All others 4" C. Provide a minimum of 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete, with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.58 for non - air - entrained concrete and 0.46 for air - entrained concrete. D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. E. Use set - retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. F. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work subject to freeze -thaw cycling. G. No water shall be added to concrete at the site without consent of the testing lab. H. The use of Fly Ash is not permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. At locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels, and set with Hilti HV A Adhesive or approved equal. C. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on fill. Lap joints minimum 6 inches tape and seal. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete. Repair damaged vapor barrier. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 36 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. C. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305. D. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306. 03300 -4 G. E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. F. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: Walls (Exposed to Weather or Backfill) Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth Slabs on Fill Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. H. Place floor slabs on fill in checkerboard pattern. 3.04 FINISHING A. Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth rubbed finish. B. Provide Class A tolerances to floor slabs according to ACI 301. C. Pitch to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal, or as shown on plans. 3.05 PATCHING A. Notify Architect/Engineer immediately upon removal of forms. B. Patch imperfections. 3.06 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 03300 -5 2 inch 3 inch 1 1/2 inch I. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required levels and lines, details, and elevations. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed or not of the specified type and/or compressive strength, at no expense to owner. A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01010. B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. END OF SECTION 03300 -6 DIVISION 04: MASONRY 1 1 1 1 1 B. Metal anchors, mortar, and joint pointing. C. Joint sealants. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 1.6 MOCKUP 1 SECTION 04410 MASONRY STONE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rough chopped stone veneer at exterior wall. ' A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shelf angles and supports. B. Section 90250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Formed steel or Wood framed supporting wall. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. B. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. C. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. D. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. E. IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two samples illustrating minimum and maximum stone sizes, color range and texture, mortar color, and markings. A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 04410 - 1 A. Construct rough stone wall mockup, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, including stone anchor accessories, sill and head flashings, window frame, and corner condition. B. Locate where directed. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and ambient air to a minimum 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of work. B. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, or during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non - staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. 1.12 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to coordinate the installation of stone work with installation of adjacent construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE STONE SUPPLIERS A. Texas Quarries. 2.2 STONE A. Stone: Quarried type, random ashlar limestone sawn with chopped face and two edges. Match stonework at existing water plant as closely as possible. B. Type: White or cream color, rough surface finish, premium grade; free of defects. C. Nominal Thickness: 4 inch. D. Nominal Face Size: 2" to 10" vertical, max. 24" length. 2.3 MORTAR 04410 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Mortar: ASTM C270 using Property specifications; with Type I Portland cement of white color, with Type S hydrated lime. B. Water: Clean and potable. C. Admixtures: Not permitted. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adjustable metal wall ties: Steel, galvanized after fabrication to ASTM Al23 1.25 oz /sq ft , of sizes and configurations required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads. B. Supports: Steel, galvanized after fabrication to ASTM Al23 1.25 oz /sq ft. C. Bolts, Washers and Nuts: Galvanized steel. D. Flashings: EPDM flexible type, 40 mil. Min. E. Weeps: sash cord type; 3/8" size. F. Joint Filler: Closed cell foam type. G. Bond Breaker: Sheet 10 mil thick plastic. H. Sealant: Non - staining, non - sagging type specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers; color to match stone color. I. Cleaning Solution: Type which will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces recommended by stone supplier. 2.5 MORTAR MIX A. Setting Mortar: Type S using the Property Method. B. Pointing Mortar: Type N using the Property Method. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration. D. Do not use anti - freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re- temper only within two hours of mixing. F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F (26 degrees 04410 - 3 C), or two - and - one -half hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 2.6 STONE FABRICATION A. Form stone corners to irregular joint profile. Clean jagged corners from stone in preparation for setting. B. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for shedding water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify that items built -in under other sections are properly located and sized. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Verify that items built -in under other sections are properly located and sized. C. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements which can mark or damage exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install (lashings of longest practical length and seal water tight to back -up. Lap end joint minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. B. Split stone at site only as necessary to produce clean faces. C. Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions. D. Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar. E. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity, visual variations, blend of stone unit sizes, and constant joint sizes throughout. F. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. G. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. 04410 - 4 H. Shore up units until setting bed will maintain panel in position without movement. I. Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch and brush joints clean to accommodate pointing mortar. J. Fill joints with pointing mortar. Pack and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to concave joint. K. Install weeps in vertical stone joints at 32 inches on center, horizontally; immediately above horizontal flashings, above.shelf angles and supports, and at bottom of walls. Do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space. L. Rake out joints '/a inch to accommodate sealant and joint filler at control joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and sealant upon completion of work. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION 04410 - 5 DIVISION 05: METALS SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted. B. Balusters and handrailing. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design railing, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 300 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. 1..3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. B. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Steel Plate: ASTM A283. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40. D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade B Structural Quality with galvanized coating. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized members. F. Handrail Fittings: Elbows, T- shapes, wall brackets, escutcheons; cast steel. 05500 - 1 G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. H. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type. 2..2 FABRICATION GENERAL A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent fetish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts, consistent with design of component. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication. F. Accurately form components required for anchorage .of railings to each other and to building structure. 2..3 FABRICATION - HANDRAILING A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site. B. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent fmish surface. C. Accurately form components to suit stairs and landings, to each other and to building structure. 2..4 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Shop prime items with one coat. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Galvanize items in accordance with ASTM A386 to minimum 1.25 oz /sq ft. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 05500 - 2 A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work. B. Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep Work in alignment. C. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates, to appropriate Sections. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads and provide temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components as indicated. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. D. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. END OF SECTION 05500 - 3 DIVISION 06: WOOD AND PLASTICS 1. PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural wall, and roof framing; built -up structural members; shop prefabricated trusses; wall and roof sheathing; preservative treatment; sill plates and flashings. B. Roof curbs; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed wood blocking. 1..2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of trusses, loads and truss cambers, framed openings. B. Product Data: Provide truss configurations, bearing and anchor details, briding and bracing. 1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. B. Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with Truss Plate Institute BWT -76, HET -80, TPI -85 including Supplement, QST -88. C. Design joists under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA. B. Beam Framing SYP species, #1 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. 06100 - 1 C. Joist Framing: SYP species, #2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. D. Rafter Framing: SYP species, #2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. E. Non - structural Light Framing SPF species, stud grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. F. Studding: SPF species, #2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. G. Sill Plate: Pressure treated. 2..2 SHEATHING MATERIALS A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; Exposure Durability unsanded. B. Particleboard Roof Sheathing: APA Oriented Strand Board; wood flakes set with waterproof resin binder; unsanded faces. C. Plywood Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure Durability unsanded. D. Particleboard Wall Sheathing: APA Oriented Strand Board; wood flakes set with waterproof resin binder; unsanded faces. E. Wall Sheathing: Moisture resistant gypsum sheathing, 'h inch thick, 24 x 96 inch sized sheets, tongue and groove edges, water repellant paper faces. F. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, sanded. 2..3 SHOP FABRICATED TRUSSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Textruss. 2. Trussway. 3. Laredo. B. Design Roof Live Load: 20 lbs /sq ft with deflection limited to 1/240. C. Truss Type: Plate connected. 2..4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere. 06100 - 2 B. Joist Hangers: Galvanized steel, sized to suit joists and framing conditions. C. Anchors: Epoxy type for anchorage to hollow masonry.Epoxy type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fasteners for anchorage to steel. D. Sill Flashing: 6 mil thick, clear polyethylene sheet. E. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt. 2..5 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 FRAMING A. Erect wood framing members in accordance with SBCCI code. Place members level and plumb. Place horizontal members crown side up. B. Place full width continuous sill flashings on foundations. C. Frame double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Frame rigidly into joists. Frame double joists under wall studding. D. Bridge framing in excess of 8 ft span at mid -span members. Fit solid blocking at ends of members. E. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Construct curb members of single pieces. 3..2 SHEATHING A. Install sheathing to two span continuous minimum length. B. Secure wall sheathing with ends staggered, over firm bearing. C. Place plywood or particleboard sheeting at building corners for a horizontal distance of 36 inches. D. Place building paper over wall sheathing; weatherlap joints and end laps, and staple in place. 06100 - 3 E. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof framing members. 3..3 SCHEDULES A. Sloped Roof Sheating: 5/8 inch thick, 24 x 48 inch sized sheets, square edges. END OF SECTION 06100 - 4 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items, shelving and cabinets other than shop manufactured casework; hardware and attachment accessories. 1..2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, fmishes, and accessories. B. Samples: Submit two, 4 x 4 inch size samples illustrating wood grain and specified finish. 1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Custom Grade in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent, Fir species, with flat grain. B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM -L -736; Custom Grade in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent, Oak or birch species, with plain sawn grain of quality capable of transparent finish 2..2 SHEET MATERIALS SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, Standard Sheathing Grade, Appearance Quality; face veneer of rotary cut; Fir species. B. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI /HPHA -HP; Custom Grade in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; face veneer of plain sliced grain; Oak or birch species. 06200 - 1 C. Wood Particleboard: Composed of wood chips made with waterproof resin binders, sanded faces. D. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder; tempered grade. 2..3. FINISH MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: 0.050 inch High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) Grade; color., pattern, and surface finish as selected from manufacturers full range. B. Plastic Laminate Backing: High pressure laminate without a decorative finish; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick. 2..4 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; electro galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity and treated wood locations, dull chrome finish at exposed interior locations. C. Contact Adhesives: Solvent release type. D. Wall Adhesive: Cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving durable bond. E. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. 2..5 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Rests: #255/256 inside cabinets; #87 at open utility shelving, manufactured by K &V. B. Shelf Brackets: #186/187 at open utility shelving, manufactured by K &V. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: US26D finish bent wire, or selected by the Architect. D. Drawer Slides: Grant #335, roller type. E. Cabinet door Hinges: Blum concealed self closing, 170° opening where allowed by adjacent wall. 06200 - 2 A. Fabricate shelves and cabinets to AWI Custom standards. 2..7 SHOP FINISHING A. Shop finish cabinet work in accordance with AWI Factory Finishing Section 1500. B. Transparent Finish Cabinets: System Number TR -2 catalyzed lacquer; Custom. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies in contact with cementitious materials, before installation. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom quality standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Install trim with nails. Fill smooth for transparent or painted finish. D. Install MDF stools with wall adhesive by the bead method. E. Cover exposed edges of shelving with 3/8 inch thick hardwood edging. F. Apply plastic laminate finishes with adhesive over entire surface. Apply laminate backing sheet on reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. G. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3..3 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. 3..4 PREPARATION FOR FINISH A. Sand work smooth and set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900, Painting. 06200 - 3 B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900, Painting. 3..5 SCHEDULE A. Exterior: 1. Wood Trim: Prepare for paint finish. B. Interior: 1. Cabinets: Red Oak or Birch, prepare for transparent finish. 2. Window Stools: MDF, paint fmish. 3. Shelving: Clear fir, or plywood, prepare for stained or painted finish as indicated. END OF SECTION 06200 - 4 DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt thermal insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall and roof construction. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System performance to provide continuity of thermal and vapor barrier at building enclosure elements in conjunction with vapor and air barrier materials. 1..3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber roll, friction fit; manufactured by Certainteed, Owens Corning, Manville, or U.S. Gypsum, conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance Facing (Walls Only) Thicknesses B. Sound Insulation: Acoustical 3 1/2" batts (sound attenuation batts) as manufactured by Owens Corning, minimum STC of 50. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION Ceiling /roof: R -19 Exterior walls: R -13 Faced on one side with Kraft paper Unface in ventilated attic space Appropriate lengths (no splices) and thicknesses for R values specified. 07210 - 1 A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesive. 3..2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION A. Install insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. C. Fit insulation tight in spaces. Leave no gaps or voids. D. Install friction fit insulation tight to framing members, completely filling prepared spaces. E. Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Attach flanges of facing to framing members. 3..3 SCHEDULES Refer to drawings for additional information/extent. END OF SECTION 07210 - 2 SECTION 07460 SIDING 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composition board and panel siding for walls and soffits. B. Related trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings. 1..2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, sizes, surface texture, finishes, and accessories. B. Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating surface texture and color. 1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASTM C1186 as grade II, type A material. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide fifty year express product warranty. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 SIDING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. James Hardie Building Products Style plank and soffit board. B. Portland Cement Composition Boards and Panels: 5/16" thickness factory primed. 2..2 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Corrosion resistant type, galvanized steel, non - staining, 11 ga. Roofing nails for blind nailing 07460 - 1 B. Building Paper: ASTM D226, No. 15 unperforated asphalt- saturated felt. C. Flashings: 26 gage metal. D. Accessory Components: soffit vents, panel divider trim; pvc type by Tamlyn. E. Prime Paint: Factory applied base primer enamel. 2..3 FABRICATION - BOARD SIDING A. Board Size: 5/16 inch thick, 9 1/2 inch high nominal board with min. 1 1/4 inch lap. B. Board Profile: Lap. C. Surface Texture: Select cedarmill. 2..3 FABRICATION - SHEET SIDING SOFFIT A. Sheet Size: 48 x 96 inch size sheet, 5/16 inch thick. B. Surface Texture: Smooth. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 PREPARATION A. Brush apply one coat of preservative treatment to water table trim. Site treat sawn ends. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Install one layer of 15# asphalt felt horizontally on sheathed walls. Weather lap edges and ends. Staple or Nail in place. B. Install siding and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Lap siding is to be blind nailed. C. Nail sheet siding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt joints tight with pvc H trim dividers. Miter external and internal corners. D. Nail to an aligned pattern. Blind nail except on overtrim. E. Install siding for natural watershed. 07460 - 2 F. Align level, and plumb. Locate cut board edges and ends over bearing. G. Install metal flashings at head of wall openings. H. Install starter strips, closures, and trim. I. Install sealant to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3..3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Site Finishing: Specified in Section 09900. END OF SECTION 07460 - 3 1 1 SECTION 07611 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precoated Galvanized steel roofing, associated integral flashings, and underlayment. B. Counterflashings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. B. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual - latest edition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, characteristics, and UL rating, and test results on air and water infiltration. D. Submit letters from manufacturer approving installer. E. Submit two samples 4 x 4inch in size illustrating metal roofing material and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturers standard details and requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in sheet metal roof manufacturing with minimum 3 years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roof installations with minimum two years experience, approved by the manufacturer and meeting the manufacturer's minimum criteria including insurance, workmanship and experieince. 07611-1 1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of other trades. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide two year installer's warranty. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Include coverage for degradation of metal finish, 20 year, integrity of seals, perforations, and structural failure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATORS A. MBCI Metal, "Craftsman" system small batten SB12. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre- Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A, G90 .5 oz /sf. zinc coating; 24 gage core steel. BASE BID: Manufacturer's standard silicone polyester finish of color as selected. ALTERNATE BID: Shop pre - coated with premium fluocarbon Kynar 500 coating of color as selected. Smooth texture finish. UL 90. 1" rib profile. 12" wide panel. 07611-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with factory applied coating of same material and finish as roofing metal, with soft neoprene washers. B. Clips: concealed panel clips for UL -90 rated system. C. Underlayment: 15# asphalt felt. D. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. E. Tape Seal: Pressure sensitive, 100 percent polyisobutylene compound approved by system manufacturer. F. Joint Sealant: One part elastomeric polyurethane type, approved by system manufacturer. G. Bedding Compound: Type approved by system manufacturer. H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type approved by system manufacturer. 2.4 SHOP FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet. C. Fabricate trim, flashings and accessories of same finish and material as sheet, continuous to detailed profiles. D. Form pieces in single length sheets up to 45 feet in length. E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. F. Form material with standing seams. 2.5 FINISH A. Factory applied silicone polyester finish, "Signature 200 ". B. Alternate Bid: Factory apply fluorocarbon Kynar 500, "Signature 300 ". 07611 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to valley or eaves. B. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and fastened. C. Verify correct placement of wood nailers. D. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, and nailing strips located. E. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. F. Insure that reduced clip spacings at eave, rake, ridge and corners are accommodated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to manufacturer's installation recommendations and shop drawings. B. Install in accordance in UL -90 Construction. C. Seal all laps, batten ends and seams in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide valley, rake, and eave trim with drip edge. E. Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.4 STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Conform to manufacturer's requirements and shop drawings. B. Install system weather tight, without warps, buckles, -or fastening stresses. C. Install panels plumb, level and straight with seams and ribs parallel. 3.5 FLASHINGS 07611 - 4 A. Conform to manufacturers details. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean work in accordance with manufacturers recommendation. B. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions. 1 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface. 1 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 07611 -5 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Placement of joint fillers, backing, and sealants. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System performance to achieve moisture and air tight joint seals. 1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Perform Work in accordance to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation. B. Perform Work in accordance with sealant manufacturers requirements for preparation of surfaces and materials installation instructions. Provide warranties for all sealants used. A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability, and backer rod sample, and surface preparation instructions. 1..4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 MANUFACTURERS 07900 - 1 A. A specific product or material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is "acceptable" (or "approved "), only if the specific product or material can evidence exact compliance with the contract documents. 1. Dow Corning 2. GE 3. Pecora 4. Sonnebom 5. Tremco 6. 3M 7. US Gypsum. 2..2 SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non - staining, non - bleeding, non - sagging, capable of continuous water immersion; color as selected by Architect manufactured. Elongation Capability 7.5 to 12 percent Service Temperature Range -13 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 25 to 50 Tensile Strength 60 psi Curing Time 14 to 21 days B. Butyl Sealant: Single component, solvent release, non - skinning, non - sagging; black color. Elongation Capability 7 to 10 percent Service Temperature Range -13 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 10 to 15 Tensile Strength 20 psi C. Polysulphide Sealant: Two components homogeneous mix, chemical curing, non - staining, non - bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non - sagging self - levelling type; color as selected by Architect. Elongation Capability 25 percent Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 40 to 55 Tensile Strength 500 psi Curing Time 3 to 6 days D. Polyurethane Sealant: Multi- component, chemical curing, non - staining, non - bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non - sagging self - levelling type; color as selected by Architect. 07900 - 2 E. Silicone Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non - sagging, non - staining, fungus resistant non - bleeding; color as selected by Architect. 2..2 ACCESSORIES 3. PART 3 EXECUTION Elongation Capability 25 percent Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 40 to 50 Maximum Joint Width 1 1/2" Tensile Strength 400 psi Elongation Capability 25 percent Service Temperature Range -65 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 40 to 50 Maximum Joint Width 1" F. Silicone Construction Sealant: ASTM C -920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, nono - staining, nono - bleeding, custyom color as selected by Architect. Sealant shall be capable of experiencing extreme movement from +100 to -50 percent of original joint width. A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work, and that joint measurements and surface conditions are as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which may impair adhesion of sealant. 07900 - 3 C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and C790 for latex base sealants. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Clean and prime seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and C790 for latex base sealants. C. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. E. Install joint backing to achieve a neck thickness dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. F. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. 3.3 SCHEDULE LOCATION TYPE COLOR A. Window perimeter Polysulphide, as selected single component B. Building Exterior Polyurethane, as selected multi- component C. Door Frame /Walls Acrylic (UNO), as selected Solvent Cure D. Under Thresholds Butyl Black E. Bathtub /Ceramic Silicone, Fungus White Tile (other wet areas) Resistant END OF SECTION 07900 -4 DIVISION 08: DOORS AND WINDOWS 1 1 SECTION 08111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - rated, fire rated, and thermally insulated steel. doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors. F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI /SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 08111 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut -outs for glazing, and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut -outs for hardware reinforcement. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /SDI -100 and ANSI A117.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated. Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B. B. Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500. B. Accept doors on site only in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of other trades. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 08111 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR MANUFACTURERS A. Ceco Corporation, Product: Imperial Series, or approved equal. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 DOORS A. Exterior Doors (Non - thermally Broken): SDI -100 Grade II 3. B. Interior Doors (Non - rated): SDI -100 Grade H Model 3. C. Interior Doors (Fire Rated): SDI -100 Grade II Model 3. 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI /SDI -100: 1. Exterior Doors: 18 gauge. 2. Interior Doors: 20 gauge. B. Core: Polystyrene foam. C. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R factor of 4, measured in accordance with ASTM C236. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, Z shaped, specifically for double doors: B. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. C. Attach fire rated label to each door unit so rated. D. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. 08111 - 3 2.6 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60. B. Primer: Air dried. C. Factory Finish Baked enamel Thermosetting epoxy of color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01041. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI /SDI -100 and DHI. B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. C. Install door louvers, plumb and level. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Touch -up factory finished doors. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1 /16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 08111 - 4 1 1 SECTION 08112 1 1 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - rated, fire rated, and thermally insulated steel frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors. 1 1 1 1 1 C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 1 1 1 1 1 1 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES C. Section 08211 - Wood Doors. D. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI /SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. E . NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, and finish. 08112 - 1 C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cut -outs for hardware, reinforcement. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /SDI - 100 and ANSI A117.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to UL 10B. B. Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as fire door. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of other trades. B Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAME MANUFACTURERS 08112 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink 1 1 1 1 B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. 1 C. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Ceco Corporation Product Series S, or approved equal. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness B. Interior Frames: 18 gage thick material, base metal thickness. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole. style tamper proof screws. C. Anchors for drywall partitions: Provide 4 Z anchors per 7' -0" height. D. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. E. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames of welded construction. D. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. E. Configure exterior frames with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping. 2.5 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60. B. Primer: Air dried. C. Factory Finish Baked enamel of thermosetting enamel color as selected. 08112 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions in the field. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI /SDI -100 and DHI. B. Coordinate with masonry and /or wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware and doors. E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner. END OF SECTION 08112 - 4 1 1 SECTION 08211 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non - rated. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Steel door frames. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting Site finishing doors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. B. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. C. AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. E. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. Warnock- Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Custom Grade. 08211 - 1 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door and Panel Construction: Conform to ASTM E152. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500. B. Accept doors on site only in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 • COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of other trades. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Life of Installation: Interior doors. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Buell 08211 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Mohawk C. Weyerhaeuser, Commercial Door Division. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches thick; solid core construction , fire rated and non fire rated, as indicated. 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Non - Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC -7 Particleboard. B. Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Custom quality red oak or birch, plain sliced, bookmatch cut, for stain finish. 2.4 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door. C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. D. Bond edge banding to cores. E. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. F. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions. 08211 - 3 B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of- tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire rated and non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard , NFPA 80 and to Warnock Hersey or UL requirements. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified and hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to AWI Section 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 08211 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum doors and frames. B. Vision glass. C. Door hardware. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back -up materials. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Mortised hardware reinforcement requirements affecting framing members. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this section. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum B. AAMA SFM -1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. C. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. D. ANSI /ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. E. ANSI /ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. F. ANSI /ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain 08410 - 1 Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum windows, entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory pre - finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass door hardware, and internal drainage details. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years documented experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect pre - finished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of related trades. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of air and vapor barrier components or materials. 1.16 WARRANTY 08410 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Provide year 1 warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Storefront and framing system: Kawneer Company, Inc., Product: Trifab II 400/451; or approved equal. Class 2, bronze anodized finish. Doors: Same manufacturer and finish as storefront and framing system; medium stile. B. Equal Products by Vistawall, Series 2000. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI /ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Glazing gaskets: Elastomeric extrusions. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 2 x 4 or 4 1 /2 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. Frames for interior glazing need not to be thermally broken. B. Door: 1 3/4 inches thick, minimum 3 ' inch wide top rail, 3 1/2 inch wide vertical stiles, 8 ' inch wide bottom rail; square glazing stops. 2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 and as shown on drawings. 2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Weather Stripping, Thresholds, Sill Pans, Sill Sweep Strips, Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application, class 2 bronze anodized finish. 08410 - 3 B. Push/Pull: Standard type to suit application; class 2 bronze anodized finish. C. Locks: Provided under Section 08700 - Hardware. D. Closers: Concealed overhead /single acting - LC /V 5030. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 607.1. B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Exterior anodized to class 2 bronze color, to 0.0007 inch thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum entrance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. 08410 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. F. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. G. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. H. Install hardware using templates provided. I. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800. J. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07900. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove protective material from pre - finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect finished Work from damage. END OF SECTION 08410 - 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWDARE 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for doors. See Schedule following this Section. B. Thresholds. C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors: Furnish templates for door preparation. B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Furnish templates for frame preparation. C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors; Furnish templates for door preparation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Cabinet hardware. B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors. C. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. D. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Texas Vernon Civil Statutes Article 9102 and ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute - Quality Standards. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. E. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 08710 - 1 F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. G. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. C. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, and templates. D. Samples: Submit 1 sample of each type of hardware illustrating style, color, and finish. E. Samples: Acceptable samples will be incorporated into the Work. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Texas Vernon Civil Statutes, Article 9201. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. NFPA 101. 3. NFPA 80. 4. NFPA 252. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this 08710 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 A. Conform to applicable codes for referenced requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 section with minimum three years experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with two years experience. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ a qualified person to assist in the work of this section. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.11 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. C. Provide secure lockup. Any hardware items lost, damaged or stolen after delivery to site shall be replaced at Contractor's cost. D. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of related trades. B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for each type of hardware under provisions of Section 01700. 1.15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700. B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware 08710 - 3 component. C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide three extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. J. May, Best Locking Systems, Dorma Door Controls, Glynn Johnson, Falcon, Hager Hinge, H. B. Ives, LCN Closures, National Guard Products, Quality Hardware, Stanley Hardware, Von Duprin, Trimco Mfg. 2.2 KEYING A. Door Locks: Keyed differently as directed by Owner. Grand master keyed. Include construction keying. Key to existing keying system as directed by Owner. B. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. 10 master keys. 2. 5 grand master keys. 3. 3 change keys for each bitting. 4. 12 construction master keys. 2.3 FINISHES A. Finishes: 26D unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 2.4 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, prepared for machine screw installaltion. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self - tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. B. Screw: Furnish screws required with each hardware items. Provide flat -head phillips screws, except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed screws to match hardware finish, including "prepared to paint" in surfaces to receive paint finish. 08710 - 4 C. Concealed Fasteners: Do not use thru -bolts for installations where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed except where detailed as such. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. D. Hinges: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Nonferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Number of Hinges: Provide not less than 3 hinges for each door leaf for doors under 90" in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. Exterior doors: Non - removeable pins Interior doors: Non - rising pins Tips: Flat button and matching plugs; finish to match leaves. E. L ka: Lock throw minimum 1" deadbolt throw exterior doors. Comply with UL rating for throw on fire -rated doors. F. Identification: Do not use product which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removeable nameplates) except those required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. Manufacturer's identification acceptable on rim of lock cylinders only. G. Door Stops: Provide number in locations as directed by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item shall be coordinated with Architect if not shown on drawings. Mounting heights shall not exceed reach tolerances referenced in Texas Vernon Civil Statutes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 08710 - 5 A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 13. Provide Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. C. Replace any unit which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW1 Door #100; to have: HW2 Door #101, 102, 105, 109 to have: 1- ' Pr. Butts 1279 - 4 1/2 x 4 ' 1 Lockset F52IDL -DG - ICC /7 - ASA 1 Stop W302T 3 Silencers GJ64 HW3 Door #108; to have: 1 Cylinder C987/C953 - ICC /7 Note: Balance of hardware by door supplier 1- 1 /2 Pr. Butts BB1279 - 4 ' x 4 ' 1 Lockset LM571 - ICC /7 1 Overhead Holder GJ70M - TB 1 Threshold 896V 1 Set Seals 5050 - BN 1 Rain Drip 16A - 4" 08710 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HW4 Door #104, 106; to have: HW5 Door #111; to have: HW6 Door #110; to have: 1- ' Pr. Butts BB 1279 - NRP - 4 ' x 4 ' 1 Lockset LM571 - ICC /7 1 Overhead Holder GJ70M - TB 1 Kickplate 10 x 2" LDW 1 Threshold 896V 1 Set Seals 5050 - BN 1- 1 Pr. Butts BB 1279 - 4 'h x 4 ' 1 Privacy F301- DG -ASA 1 Closer P7601 - SNMS1 - SEC 1 Kickplate 10 x 2" LDW 1 Stop 431ES 1 Set Seals 5050 - BN 1- l Pr. Butts BB1279 - 4 ' x 4 ' 1 Push Plate 40 -4x16 1 Pull Plate 1610A - 4 x 16 1 Closer 7601 - SNMS1 - SEC 1 Kickplate 10 x 2" LDW 1 Stop W302T 1 Silencers GJ64 END OF SECTION 08710 - 7 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 08800 GLAZING A. Glass and glazing for Sections referencing this Section for Products and installation. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass. 1..3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Types Specified: Provide full schedule of glazing types and their locations. Provide physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, and special installation requirements. B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. 1..4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1..5 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty including coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 08800 - 1 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: 1. PPG. 2. Spectrum. 3. Guardian. 4., Ford Glass. 5. Equal to the above. B. Float or Plate Glass (Type FG -A): Clear, 1/4 inch thick, if not otherwise indicated, and tinted as indicated. C. Safety Glass (Type FG -B): Clear and tinted as indicated; heat strengthened fully tempered 1/4" and 1" insulated as indicated on drawings or as required by code. D. Tinted Glass Single Glazing (Type FG -C): Float type, heat strengthened tempered, as required by code and when indicated on drawings, Light reducing in gray color to be selected; shading coefficient of .70 approximately 1/4" inch thick. E. Spandrel Glass (Type FG -D): Heat strengthened tinted with ceramic fused frit or opacifier of color to match vision units. 2..2 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. Insulated Glass Units (Type SG -A): Double pane; outer pane of tinted gray glass, inner pane of clear glass, interpane space purged dry air; total unit thickness of 1 inch. 2..3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning. 2. GE. 3. Tremco. 4. Pecoa. B. Glazing Compound (FSTT-G-410): Modified oil, grey color. C. Butyl Sealant (FSTT -S- 001657): Single Component; Shore A hardness of 10 -20; non - skinning. D. Acrylic Sealant: Refer to Section 07900. 08800 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Polysulphide Sealant (FSTT -S -227): Class A, Type 2, two component, chemical curing, non - sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 -25. F. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non - staining, non - bleeding, non - sagging type, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35. G. Silicone Sealant: Refer to Section 07900. 2..4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Tremco Glazing Systems or Sonneborn. B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 80 - 90 Shore A Durometer hardness. C. Spacer Shims: Neoprene; 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, self adhesive on one face. D. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 -15 shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper. E. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; color by Architect. F. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized, within tolerance, and glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. 3..2 EXTERIOR - WET /DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops. Seal corners with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. 08800 - 3 C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with 1/4 inch sight line. F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with type sealant referenced in Section 07900, to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of compatible type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3..3 INTERIOR - WET /DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1 /16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with type sealant as referenced in Section 07900, to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 3..4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass. END OF SECTION 08800 - 4 DIVISION 09: FINISHES SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal channel ceiling framing. B. Gypsum board with taped and sanded joint treatment. C. Textured surfacing. 1..2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood Stud Framing. B. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Acoustic Insulation. 1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GA201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings and GA216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. U.S. Gypsum. 2. Gold Bond. B. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ANSI /ASTM C645. C. Fasteners: ANSI /ASTM C646 hardened screws. D. All Gypsum Board Types: 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges; unless noted otherwise in the following Paragraphs. E. Standard Type: ANSI /ASTM C36. 09260 - 1 F. Moisture Resistant Type: ANSI /ASTM C630. 2..2 ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads: Metal and paper combination. B. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216, Type to suit application. C. Joint Materials: ANSI /ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. D. Adhesive: ANSI /ASTM C557. E. Textured Surfacing: manufactured by U.S. Gypsum. Sand not acceptable in texture surfacing material. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 INSTALLATION - CEILING FRAMING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. C. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. D. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3..2 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fasten gypsum board to furring or framing with bugle head drywall screws. C. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required. D. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. E. Install moisture resistant gypsum board at all areas subject to moisture. 3..3 JOINT TREATMENT 09260 - 2 A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/16 inch. C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile. D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3..4 TEXTURE A. Provide light orange peel texture, spray applied. Sand textures are not acceptable. 3..5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in any direction. END OF SECTION 09260 - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. PART .1 GENERAL • 1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 09300 TILE 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finish using the thinset application method. B. Thresholds at door openings. 1..2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts. B. Samples: Submit two tile sample panels illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI /TCA A108.3, ANSI /TCA A108.4. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 TILE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. American- Olean. 2. Dal -Tile. B. Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: ANSI/TCA A137.1; 2 x 2 inch size, matt, non -slip surface fmish; color as selected from full range available. C. Ceramic Wall Tile: ANSI /TCA A137.1; 4 1/4 x 4 1/4 inch size, gloss glazed surface finish; colors as selected from full range available. D. Cove Base: Match wall tile as selected for surface finish, color. 2..2 SETTING MATERIALS A. Thinset Mortar Materials: ANSI/TCA A118.1, Portland cement, sand, latex 09300 - 1 additive, and water. - 2..3 GROUT MATERIALS A. Grout: Cementitious type; resistant to shrinking with latex additive. Color as selected. 2..4 ACCESSORIES A. Thresholds: Marble type, color to match tile finish, full depth and width of frame opening, bevelled both sides, radiused edges. 2..5 GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion setting bed and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Install adhesive, tile, threshold, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Lay tile and accessories to align wall and floor grout pattern. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations. Form corners and bases neatly. C. Grout tile joints. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout. D. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. END OF SECTION 09300 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring and base. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Floor Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 TILE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Standard Excelon. 2. Azrock B. Vinyl Composition Tile: 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick. 2..2 BASE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Roppe. B. Base: rubber: 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved. Continuous lengths. C. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops and extemal corners, of same material, size, and color as base. 2..3 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -floor Filler: Type recommended by floor material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, type recommended by floor material manufacturer. 09650 - 1 C. Edge Strips: Vinyl. D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by floor material manufacturer. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 3/16 inch in 10 ft. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, and dusting. C. Fill low spots and other defects with sub -floor filler. D. Vacuum clean substrate. 3..2 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spread adhesive and set flooring in place. Press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. C. Install tile flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. D. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor fmish is dissimilar. Install edge strips where flooring terminates. E. Scribe flooring to appurtenances to produce tight joints. F. Install floor pattern where indicated. Fit joints tightly. 3..3 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL A. Adhere base tight to wall and floor surfaces. B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. 3..4 CLEANING 09650 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Remove excess adhesive from surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 09650 - 3 SECTION 09680 CARPET 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpeting. 1..2 ALLOWANCES A. Cash Allowance: Included under provisions of Section 01020. B. Allowance includes purchase only, delivery and installation of carpeting to be in base bid. 1..3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Carpet Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1..4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. 1..5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 4 sq yds of carpeting of each color selected. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 CARPETING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Lees. 2. Shaw. 3. Mohawk. B. Woven Carpet: Conforming to the following criteria: Pile Fiber 3rd generation nylon Static Control Fiber BASF 09680 - 1 Electrostatic Charge 3 Kv @ 20 percent R.H. maximum Rows per Inch -8.5 min. Wire Height 1/8 inch Pile Weight 26 oz /sq yd. Density Factor 4.6 kilotex Backing Interlock Ro11 Width 12 ft. Color as selected 2..2 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, strippable type, recommended by carpet [and cushion] manufacturer. C. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, color as selected. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm in 3 m,) and are ready to receive work. B. Fill low spots and other defects with sub -floor filler. C. Vacuum floor surfaces. 3..2 INSTALLATION - ADHESIVE APPLIED CARPET A. Apply adhesive and carpet in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Double cut carpet to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, free of gaps. C. Cut and fit carpet tight to interruptions. Terminate carpet with edge strips. 3..3 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION 09680 - 2 1..3 SUBMITTALS 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 MATERIALS SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and finishing. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Finish Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel/smoke rating requirements. A. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products. B. Samples: Submit two samples, in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. C. Furnish a "Detailed Painting /Staining Schedule" including brand designation, for approval by the Architect. Indicate type of surface, type of paint material, and number of coats required, as set forth in the schedule hereinafter specified. Approval of this by the Architect must be received by the Contractor before delivering material to the site. D. Provide color mockups on proper surface treatments for approval by Architect prior to proceeding with project paint applications. L.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store and apply materials in environmental conditions required by manufacturer's instructions. Temperature ranges for paint /stain application is 45 to 90 degrees F. B. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating to maintain temperature range for 24 hours before, and 48 hours after application of finish. 09900 - 1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Devoe. 2. Pittsburg Paints. 3. Sherwin Williams. 4. Glidden. 5. Benjamin Moore. 6. Porter. 7. Tnemec. 8. Olympic. B. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings, of good flow and brushing properties, capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials required to achieve the finishes specified. 2..2 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. Color schedule will be provided by Architect after submittals received. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive Work. B. Measure moisture content of porous surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content is Less than 12 percent. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect Work of this Section. D. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish Remove foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri- sodium phosphate, rinse well and allow to dry. G. Uncoated Ferrous Surfaces: Remove scale by wire brushing or sandblasting; wash clean with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution. Prime 09900 - 2 paint after repairs. H. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust, feather edges; clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. I. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe surface clean; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. J. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. 3..2 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Sand transparent finishes lightly between coats to achieve required finish. C. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. D. Back prime interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to receive paint finish with primer paint. E. Back prime interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3..3 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Color code items in accordance with requirements indicated. B. Paint shop primed equipment. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels and paint separately. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convectors, and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas, 09900 - 3 except prefinished surfaces. G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, Tight fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3..4 CLEANING A. As work proceeds, promptly remove spilled, splashed, or spattered finishes. 3..5 SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Exposed surfaces of lintels and other exposed -to- weather fabrications listed under that section. 3..6 GENERAL SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES Refer to drawings for type used for more specific locations /extent. A. Wood - Painted 1. One coat primer sealer. 2. Two coats 100% acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss. B. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Cement Plaster 1. One coat block primer. 2. One coat primer sealer latex. 3. Two coats 100% acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss. C. Steel - Shop Primed 1. Touch -up with zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, high gloss. D. Steel - Galvanized 1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, high gloss. E. Composition Siding and Soffits - Shop Primed 1. Two coats 100% acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss. 3..7 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES Refer to drawings for type used for more specific locations /extent. A. Wood - Painted 09900 - 4 1. One coat alkyd primer sealer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi- gloss. B. Wood - Transparent 1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). 2. Two coats stain. 3. One coat sealer. 4. Two coats varnish or lacquer, satin. C. Steel - Unprimed 1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi- gloss. D. Steel - Primed 1. Touch -up with original primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi - gloss. E. Steel - Galvanized 1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi - gloss. F. Plaster, Gypsum Board 1. One coat alkyd primer sealer. 2. Two coats 100% acrylic latex enamel, semi - gloss. END OF SECTION 09900 - 5 1..3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1..6 EXTRA MATERIALS SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and prime painting. B. Wall covering. 1..2 ALLOWANCES A. Cash Allowance: Included under provisions of Section 01020. B. Allowance includes purchase only, delivery and installation of wall covering to be in base bid. A. Wall Covering Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel /smoke ratings of 25/35/50 when tested to NFPA 255. 1..4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout. B. Product Data: Provide data on wallcovering and adhesive including test reports verifying flame /fuel /smoke ratings, when tested to NFPA requirements. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 8 1/2 x 11 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture for full range of manufacturer's wall covering. 1..5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply primer or adhesive when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature is below 60 degrees F or relative humidity is above 40 percent. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during and after installation of adhesive wall covering. 09950 - 1 A. Provide 25 lineal ft. of each color of wall covering selected. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bolta. 2. Genon. B. Wall Covering: Vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following: 1. Total Thickness 7 mil min. 2. Total Weight 15 oz /sq yd min. 3. Color as selected. C. Adhesive: Recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application; water base contact type. D. Substrate Filler: Recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. E. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Alkyd enamel type. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are flat and prime painted, ready to receive work. B. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. Vacuum clean surfaces. C. Apply one coat of primer to substrate surfaces, allow to dry, sand lightly. Vacuum clean. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. 09950 - 2 C. Apply adhesive and wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Ensure full bond to substrate surface. D. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. E. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. F. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in sequence from roll as recommended by manufacturer. G. Apply fabric covering to electrical, telephone and wall plates prior to replacing. H. Remove excess wet adhesive from seams. END OF SECTION 09950 - 3 DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1..1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet and washroom accessories. 1..2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Conform to applicable handicap (ADA) codes and install work in conformance with ANSI A117.1. 1..3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on all accessories describing size, fmish, details of function, attachment methods. B. Samples: Submit written information and samples of each component illustrating color and finish. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2..1 MATERIALS . Manufacturers: 1. ASI, or equal. SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES B. Sheet Steel: ANSI /ASTM A366. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Tubing: ASTM A269 stainless steel. E. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot - dipped galvanized steel, tamper -proof type. 2..2 FABRICATION A. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Weld and grind joints smooth. 10800 - 1 B. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. C. Back paint components to prevent electrolysis. D. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. E. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 2..3 FINISHES A. Anchors: Galvanize to 1.25 oz /sq yd. B. Ferrous Metals - Shop Primed: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat and clean, apply one coat primer and two coats electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome /Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2; polished finish. E. Stainless Steel: Polished finish. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3..1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. B. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. - C. Verify that adequate blocking in walls is in place. 3..2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. END OF SECTION 10800 - 2 DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS SECTION 12345 LABORATORY CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnishing, delivering to the building, uncrating, setting in place, leveling and anchoring all Casework and Equipment listed in the specification and/or shown on the drawings. B. Furnishing plumbing fixtures and fittings as defined in the specifications, complete with tank nipples and lock nuts for mounting fixtures and fittings on tops. Final connections by Division 15000. C Furnishing electrical service fixtures directly attached to the Casework or Equipment as called for in the specifications, or as shown on the drawings. Fixtures supplied attached. Final connections by Division 16000. D. Furnishing sink bowls, complete with required overflows, plugs, strainers, tailpieces, and traps. Final connections by Division 15000. E. Furnishing and installing filler panels and scribes as required for a finished installation. F. Removing all debris, dirt, and rubbish accumulated as a result of the installation of the Equipment, leaving premises broom clean and orderly. 1.2 WORK BY OTHER TRADES A. Furnishing all fume hood blowers. B. Furnishing, installing, and connecting all ductwork for fume hoods from duct collar to blowers, and from blowers to final point of discharge to atmosphere. C. Furnishing, installing, and connecting of all vents, revents, and special plumbing fixtures or piping to meet local codes, even though not specifically called for in the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. D Furnishing and installation of all rigid or flexible conduit, wire, pulling of wire, fittings and special electrical equipment and accessories, including boxes, receptacles, flush plates set loose. All shall be in accordance with local codes even though not specifically called for in the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. 12345 -1 E. Providing framing and reinforcements of walls, floors and ceilings necessary to adequately support the Equipment, and all bucks and plaster grounds required for proper installation of Equipment. F. Furnishing any miscellaneous materials, generally classified as maintenance or supply items. G. Providing protection and security during and after Laboratory Equipment installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The specifications and drawings define and show the essential minimum requirements as to the quality of materials, hardware, finish, construction, design, functions, and overall workmanship of the Equipment. All Equipment and Casework must strictly comply with these specifications. B. Where a definite material or manufacturer is specified, it is no the intent to discriminate against any product of another manufacturer. C. Minimum standards are set forth herein. Laboratory Equipment and Casework manufacturer (s) are cautioned that only Equipment meeting the standards set forth in this specification will be acceptable. D. Equipment and Casework manufacturer shall have been manufacturing Science Laboratory Casework for a minimum of ten (10) years. E. Construction of Equipment and Casework shall be within the requirements for accessibility as required within the Equipment Schedule or shown on the drawings, and as governed by the "Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)." The successful bidder shall be responsible to insure compliance with applicable ADA codes. Items where noted, shall be manufactured as described, with all materials and functions per this specification. - F. Any bidder proposing to supply Equipment and Casework differing from these standards must clearly state in writing how the Laboratory Equipment and Casework he proposes to furnish differs from the specification requirement. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed change, modification, or substitution is upon the bidder. The architect's decision of approval or disapproval of the proposal shall be final Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. G. To insure that all bidders are bidding equal Equipment, all requests for changes, modifications, substitutions, approvals, etc., will be set forth in an addendum. Any item not receiving prior approval will rightfully be construed as based upon supplying the essential requirements, design, construction, and material as called for in . this specification. 12345-2 H. Catalogs of Sheldon Laboratory Systems, a Division of General Equipment Manufacturers, Jackson, MS, have been used for the purpose of identification, function, and design. Where such catalog designations are given for the items of Equipment, these items shall be complete as described and shown in the catalog, unless exceptions are especially mentioned in the Equipment Schedule or described within these specifications. I. The listed manufacturers' Casework has been determined to be representative of the Casework requirements of the Owner. a) "Series 100 Wood" Sheldon Laboratory Systems, a Division of General Equipment Manufacturers, Jackson, MS, standard product modified as required to meet specifications listed herein. b) Units of the following manufacturers are also acceptable, subject to meeting the intent and requirements of the design, materials, construction of Sheldon Laboratory Systems casework specified. c) Units shall be of the type size scheduled on the drawings and specified herein, including all accessories standard to the product of the referenced manufacturer or as indicated. Kewuanee Manufacturing Campbell Rhea HeritageOak as manufactured by Mohon International. d) Product substitutions or other manufacturers: Submit substitution request to bid as an alternate no later than 10 days before Bid Date. Approved manufacturers will be set forth in an addendum. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings for Casework showing plans elevations, end cross - sections, service run spaces, location and type of service fixtures with lines thereto, based on actual measurements obtained in the field. 2. Show details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors, walls and bases. 3. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows, and other building components. 4. Coordinate shop drawing with other trades involved. B. Samples 12345 - 3 1. Submit 4" x 4" samples of specified finishes, including top materials. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color, texture, and pattern only. Compliance with other specified requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the supplier. 2. Submit one (1) full sized sample of a finished base cabinet with one drawer and cupboard below, with adjustable shelf, complete with all hardware and without fmished top. Sample may be incorporated into the work if approved. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver Laboratory Equipment and Casework only after wet operations in building are completed. B. Store Laboratory Equipment and Casework in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 60 %, or less at 78 degrees F. C. Protect sanded and finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Definitions: The following definitions apply to Laboratory Equipment and Casework: 1. Exposed portions of Casework include all surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed. Bottoms of cases more than 4' -0" above the floor shall be considered exposed. All visible members in open cases or behind glass doors also shall be considered as exposed portions. 2. Semi - exposed portions of Casework include those members behind opaque doors, such as shelves, divisions, interior faces of ends, dust panels, drawer sides, bottoms and the back face of doors. Top of cases of 6' -6" or more above the floor shall be considered as semi - exposed. 3. Concealed portions of Casework include backs, sleepers, web frames, toe spaces, bottom underside, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation. 2.2 CASEWORK CONSTRUCTION - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. All manufacturers are cautioned the Laboratory Equipment and Casework is not necessarily the standard of any one manufacturer. All manufacturers shall adhere to these specifications, even though such construction features may vary from standard 12345 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 construction or design practices of the manufacturer. Bids based on "Manufacturer's Standard" will be rejected. B. Cabinets and cases shall be assembled in accordance with Laboratory Grade Cabinet construction methods using reinforcing at all major points of strain, properly glued and further reinforced with screws, or steel power lock pins. C. All base cabinets shall have a four -sided top frame of solid hardwood for maximum stability. Base cabinet bottoms shall have a solid hardwood front and back rail securing a 1/2" thick hardwood plywood panel. Frame members shall be a minimum 1 -1/4" thick x 1 -1/4" wide. D. All upper cabinets and tall cases shall have solid hardwood horizontal frame members at the front and back, at the top and bottom. Frame members a minimum 1 -1/4" thick x 1- 1/4" wide. E. All end panels shall be 3/4" thick, 7 ply hardwood plywood with a solid Oak front edge banding. Exposed ends shall be of Oak veneer. F. All tall cases and upper cabinets shall have a 1/2" thick hardwood plywood top and bottom panel secured between the front and back horizontal rails. G. All cabinet back panels shall be 1/4" thick. Base cabinets shall be hardboard; Upper cabinets and tall cases shall be hardwood plywood. Hardboard panels within upper cabinets and tall cases are unacceptable. H. All shelves shall be Laboratory Grade, 1" thick 7 ply hardwood plywood with solid hardwood front edge banding. I. All shelves to be adjustable on 1 -1/4" centers. J. All drawers supported on Laboratory Grade epoxy coated steel slides having a maximum load capacity of 100 lbs. per pair. K. All drawers shall be constructed of solid hardwood or hardwood plywood a minimum of 1/2" thick, with the bottom a minimum of 1/4" thick composition board secured within groove and further secured by mechanical fasteners. Drawer fronts shall be removable /replaceable and not be a part of drawer construction. 2.3 COLOR SELECTIONS A. All Casework shall be finished on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces in a color selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart. B. Door and drawer fronts shall be stained Oak wood veneer. 12345 - 5 C. Trim group: 1. Wood "flush overlap" fronts: Pulls and hinges in black with 3mm solid oak or PVC edge banding. All interior hardware furnished in manufacturer's standard finish 2.4 LABORATORY GRADE WOOD FINISH 1. Exposed wood parts shall be finished in manufacturers standard finishes. 2. All parts shall be carefully sanded and buffed in preparation for the finishing processes. The first coat shall be a stain and sealer coat of synthetic resin. The product is then cured at elevated temperatures. The product shall then be sanded, wiped clean and then two more coats of an acid resisting synthetic resin shall be applied and cured at elevated temperatures. a. Interior of cabinets with solid doors receive one sealer coat and one coat of an acid resisting synthetic resin. 3. Cabinet Finish Chemical Test and Evaluation a. All manufacturers proposing to submit a bid must provide certification that their finish will meet the following requirements. b. Chemical Resistance Chemical Reagents - withstand one hour contact with ten (10) drops of (1/2 m/1) covered by watch glass, convex side down in center of pool to prevent evaporation. Hydrochloric Acid, all concentrations Nitric Acid, 30% Sulfuric Acid, 50% Acetic Acid, all concentrations Phosphoric Acid, 75% Ammonium Hydroxide, all concentrations Sodium Hydroxide, all concentrations Potassium Hydroxide, all concentrations Zinc Chloride, saturated RESULT - No visible effect other than slight discoloration, change of gloss or temporary softening of film. 4. Solvents - withstand contact with ten drops (1 /2m1.) placed on surface until evaporated. Benzene Methyl Alcohol 12345-6 2.6 TOPS Toluene Ethyl Alcohol Chloroform Ethyl Ether Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Naptha RESULT - No visible effect other than slight discoloration, change of gloss or temporary softening of film. 5. Heat Resistance - Hot water (190 -205 degrees) trickled down surface (tilted 45 degrees) for five minutes. No visible effect. 6. Moisture Resistance - Cellulose sponge (2" x 3" x 1 ") soaked with water and placed on finish for 100 hours and kept constantly wet. No effect. 7. Fade Resistance - 100 hours exposure to Sylvania 275 R.S. sun lamp placed 10" above surface. Slight discoloration. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Pulls for doors and drawers: Black, metal or ABS plastic. For sliding doors, provide recessed flush pulls. Provide two (2) pulls for drawers over 24" wide. B. Hinges: 2 -1/2" high institutional type with hospital corners, tight pin, five knuckle with offset in leaf attaching to cabinet to establish a 5/16" door overlap of cabinet frame. "Accent front" cabinet hinges shall be .095" thick black colored powder coat. All hinges shall be capable of supporting 150 lbs. of weight placed 12" from hinge center with door open 90 degrees, with a minimal deflection or distortion. C. Drawer runners: Embossed and formed 20 gauge epoxy coated steel channel shaped to accommodate rollers with nylon wheels and shall interlock into side tracks on cabinet. Runners have instant removal, stop to prevent inadvertent removal, and positive closing action. Runners shall have a maximum load capacity of 100 lbs. per pair, based upon an 18" slide length. D. Shelf supports: Nickel plated metal clips fitted into holes on cabinet ends. E. Locks: Provide locks where indicated on drawings. Locks shall be 8 disc tumbler type of die cast zinc alloy plated cylinder. Locks shall be provided with (2) keys and keyed differently. F. Bases: Provide 4" height base at all cabinets. Base shall be covered with vinyl base by General Contractor /flooring subcontractor, see specification section 09650 for base material specification. 12345 -7 A. Counter top depths shall be 30" (Unless noted on drawings) B. Backsplash height shall be 4" C. Molded epoxy resin (Shelresin) 1. A modified epoxy resin specially blended to produce a high chemical material. Tops shall be 1" thick. a) Physical and mechanical properties: b) Tensile strength, psi 12,500- 13,500 c) Compressive strength, psi 38,000- 39,000 d) Flexural strength, psi 18,000- 20,000 e) Hardness, Rockwell "M" 114 f) Density, gr /cc 10,011 2.7 SINKS, TROUGHS AND SERVICE TURRETS A. Epoxy resin 1. One piece construction, without cemented joints. Inside comers and bottoms covered for easy cleaning. 2. Surface shall be stain free, "non - glaring" black, inert to action of all chemicals in normal laboratory usage. 2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All laboratory fixtures to meet SAMA standards with all working parts removable and interchangeable with fixtures of same type and number. Buttons clearly marked in accordance with SAMA standard color code. All fixtures provided with vacuum breaker and aerator. B. All fixtures where required by catalog number, shall have the main body cast in one piece 5A- ASTM -30 brass. Tubing shall not be a part of its structure. 2.9 DRAIN FITTINGS A. All sinks provided with outlet, stopper, tailpiece and trap. 2.10 ELECTRICAL FIXTURES A. Electrical fixtures, a part of, or installed in the equipment shall be approved by the National Board of Underwriters and must conform to city and state building ordinances. 12345 - 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Knock out boxes, where indicated, installed by equipment installer. C. Receptacles, grounded type, voltage and amperage as indicated. All receptacles, switches, indicator lights, motor starters and light fixtures to be quality equal to Hubbell, Arrow, Bryant or Killark specifications. All receptacles shall be of GFI type. 2.11 SPECIALIZED EQUIPMENT A. Safety Center Item #66100 (Meeting ADA requirements) Size: 35 "L x 22 "D x 85 "H overall Unit shall be constructed as detailed within "Casework Construction" section of this specification. Unit provided with two (2) gentle spray eyewash outlets located 34" above finished floor for individual in wheelchair accommodation. Eyewash assembly located over special depth and size stainless steel basin receptacle. Overhead shower modified to have proper distance from case to accommodate emergency individual and with proper pull handle a maximum of 54" above finished floor. %" thick white self edged plastic laminate top with 4" high backsplash on three (3) sides. Unit shall have one (1) fixed shelf for storage of fire blanket or first aid kit (not included). Unit shall have removable back panel, and a lower removable molded fiberglass reinforced polyester plumbing enclosure properly contoured for required clearance to accommodate individual in wheelchair. Unit shall include a sign indicating the "International Symbol of Accessibility." 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 'FABRICATION A. Fabricate Laboratory Equipment and Casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown on the floor plans to fit actual field conditions. B. Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practical to minimize field cutting and jointing. Mortise and tenon, glue and screw joints for maximum strength using precision jigs and clamps to insure square corners and vertical plumb surfaces. 3.2 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims. Where Laboratory furniture abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with fasteners concealed where needed. 12345 - 9 B. Base cabinets 1. Set cabinets straight, plumb and level. Adjust tops within 1/16" of a single plane. Fasten each individual cabinet with no less than 2 fasteners into floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets. 2. Where required, assemble units into one integral unit with joints flush, tight and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 ". C. Wall cabinets 1. Securely fasten to solid supporting material, not plaster, lath, or wallboard. Anchor, adjust, and align wall cabinets as specified for base cabinets. 2. Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall mounted cabinets will be done during wall erection by trades involved, but the responsibility for accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is part of this work. D. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF TOPS A. Field jointing, where practical, makes in same manner as factory jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown on accepted shop drawings so there is no job site processing of top and edge surfaces. B. Workmanship 1. Abut top edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. 2. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures. 3.4 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship of equipment provided on this contract for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. Any defective . materials or faulty workmanship occurring within that time shall be replaced or corrected promptly without charge upon notification by the Owner or his designated representative. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion or installation. 12345 - 10 B. Clean shop finished casework. Touch -up as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas. C. Protection: Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed Casework and Equipment from damage by the work of other trades until acceptance of the work by the Architect. Advise Contractor of the required temperature/humidity conditions which must be maintained during the remainder of the construction period. D. Cover casework with 4 mil polyethylene film for protection and damage during the remainder of construction. END OF SECTION 12345-11 DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mechanical Specifications Division 15 Myers & Associates 2300 S. IH 35, Suite 200 Round Rock, Texas 78681 W/WW Lab -RR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The work of Division 15 consists of providing labor, materials, products, and all operations required for the complete operating installation of all mechanical systems as shown and specified, in strict compliance with applicable drawings, specification, tenns and conditions of the contract and all applicable codes and ordinances governing the installation of the various mechanical systems. Contractor shall provide all equipment and materials necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications or on the drawings. All work shall be fully correlated with the work of other crafts. This section of Division 15 is a part of all other sections of Division 15. 13. Each Contractor shall study the Contract Documents included under this contract to determine exactly the extent of work provided under this contract, as well as to ascertain the difficulty to be encountered in performing the work on the drawings and outline hereinafter and in making new connections to existing utilities, installing new equipment and systems and coordinating the work with the other Trades. C. Notwithstanding any approvals or instructions which must be obtained by the Contractor from the Architect in connection with use of premises, the responsibility for the safe working conditions at the site shall remain that of the Contractor's and the Architect or Owner shall not be deemed to have any responsibility or liability in connection therewith. D. The Agreement Forms, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 00 and Division 01 of the specifications shall apply to the work specified in Division 15. E. Additional Site Visit Costs: Contractor shall be charged with any cost resulting from uncompleted items that require additional site trips by the Architect/Engineer. F. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees associated with his work. 1.02 SITE INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site verifying all existing items and familiarize himself with existing work conditions and understand the conditions which affect performance of the work of this Division before submitting bids for this work. The submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence of such visits and examinations. B. All bids shall take the existing conditions into consideration and the lack of specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be allowed for work or change related to failure to examine site conditions. 1.03 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY A. Streamlining: In many instances, the products, reference standards, and other itemized specifications have been listed without verbiage. In these cases, it is implied that the Contractor shall provide the products and perform in accordance with the references listed. B. "Furnish" means to purchase and deliver material as shown and specified, including mark -ups, and cart the material to an approved location at the site or elsewhere, as noted or agreed. 15010 - 1 "Provide/Install ", as used in these specifications, means famish all material, labor, sub - contracts, and appurtenances, including mark -up required for a complete, operating, finished system. "Rough -in and Connect Only" means provide an appropriate system connection, such as supplies with stops, continuous wastes with traps, shut -off valves required, and all piping connections, testing, etc., for proper operation, and to install equipment furnished. Equipment fumished is received, uncrated. assembled and set in place by supporting crafts unless they make prior arrangements to hire the mechanical installer for this work. "Accessible" means arranged so that an appropriately dressed maintenance man may approach the area in question with tools and products necessary for the work intended, and may then position himself to properly perform the task to be accomplished, without disassembly or damage to the surrounding installation. "Serviceable" means arranged so that the component or product in question may be properly removed, and replaced without disassembly, destruction, or damage to the surrounding installation. "Product" is a generic term which includes materials, equipment, fixtures, and any physical item used on the project. Wherever the term "shown on drawings" is used in the specifications, it shall mean "noted ", "indicated ", "scheduled ", "detailed ", or any other diagrammatic or written reference made on the drawings. "Conduit" includes, in addition to conduit, all fittings, hangers and other accessories relative to such conduit. "Piping" includes, m addition to piping, all fittings, valves, hangers and other accessories relative to such piping. "Concealed" means hidden from sight m chase's, fluxed spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, crawl spaces, etc. 1.04 DIAGRAMMATIC DRAWINGS A. Drawings and specifications encompass a system that will integrate with the structural, electrical, and Architectural design of the building. 1. Drawings and specifications are complementary, each to the other; what is shown on one is a binding as if called for in both. 2. Where drawing details, plans, and/or specification requirements are in conflict, and where conduit, duct and piping sizes of the same run are shown to be different between plans and specifications or details, the most stringent requirement will be included in the Contract. Systems and equipment called for in the specification and/or shown on the drawings shall be provided under the contract of each Trade as if it were required by both the drawings and the specifications. However, prior to ordering or installation of any portion of work which appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought to the Architect's attention for direction as to what is to be provided. B. The drawings are partly diagrammatic in character and do not show exact locations, all offsets or give exact elevation in piping, fittings, duct, conduits, etc. Also, the drawings do not necessarily show in minute detail all features of the installation. Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available and shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions, arrange work accordingly and provide a complete and satisfactorily working installation. Provide all work shown on the drawings and specified, unless otherwise stated. No subsequent allowance will be made due to failure to coordinate work prior to installation. C. The Architectural, Structural, Civil and Electrical plans and Specifications and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are a part of these Specifications and the accompanying Mechanical Drawings and shall be complied and coordinated with in every respect. All drawings and specifications mentioned above shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to examine all drawings for 15010 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 coordination and quantities shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and no subsequent allowance for time or money will be allowed. 1.05 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Each Contractor shall compare his Drawings and Specifications with those of other Trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect and obtain from the Architect written instructions to make the necessary changes m any of the affected work. All work shall be installed m cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, all trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect. B. Each Contractor shall coordinate the location of his systems so that all outside air intakes, plumbing vents and exhaust fans are located in such a way as to prevent cross - contamination. Such a distance shall be not less than 10 feet. C. Locations of conduit, ducts, piping, sprinkler heads and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Exact routing a location of system shall be determined prior to fabrication or installation. Coordinate routing of major electrical conduits with Electrical Contractor prior to fabrication of duct work and piping. D. Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit, ducts and piping systems shall be made as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. E. Where discrepancies in scope of work as to what Trade provides items, such as starters, disconnects, flow switches and the like exist, such conflicts shall be reported to the Architect prior to signing of the Contract. If such action is not taken, the various Trades shall furnish such items as part of their work for complete and operable systems and equipment, as determined by the Architect. F. The Electrical Subcontractor shall verify with the HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection Subcontractors available electrical characteristics for all motors and equipment before ordering and submitting of electrical gear. Verify actual connection points prior to installation and roughing -in. G. The Contractors are to avoid routing conduit through fire rated assemblies where practical. Each trade is responsible for proper coordination of required sleeves or block -outs with rated assembly installers. Each trade is responsible for providing sleeves, as required, for his work. Each trade shall verify acceptable tolerances around penetrating item in fire assembly before beginning fire sealing. 1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and other Subcontractors in ample time of the location of all chases, sleeves and openings required in the construction for the proper installation of his work. The Contractor shall do all core drilling of individual holes and all cutting for his work except square or rectangular openings in the structural slabs which shall be cut by the Contractor at locations shown on the drawings. In no case, however, shall a beam or column be cut without the approval of the Project Structural Engineer. B. On completion of this work or as work progresses the Contractor shall make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of the work under this contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original conditions and to the satisfaction of the Owner. C. Any cutting and patching necessary as a result of the Contractor's failure to notify the General Contractor of all the required openings shall be at the expense of the Contractor's. 1.07 OBLIGATIONS/RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the Owner in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the Architect/Owner, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner /Architect. 15010 - 3 B. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, safety, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the work under his Contract. C. The Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of the work, even though not particularly specified or indicated, and if he has good reason for objecting to the use of a material, appliance, or type of construction shown or specified, he shall register his objections with the Architect/Engineer, in writing; otherwise, he shall proceed with the work under the stipulation that a satisfactory job is required. 1.08 REVIEW OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 15 and shown on the drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Fumish equipment submittals in the manner described elsewhere in these specifications. In addition, include data for review, and organize data, as noted below. B. Substitutions: 1. Equipment listed as equal is indicated to be equal in quality to equipment designed around. It does not mean equal in dimension or fit. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm dimensional differences and space requirements. 2. Request for proposed substitution of materials, methods, or processes shall be made to the Architect and if found acceptable, will be confirmed by an addendum to the Construction Documents. Where proposed substitutions are not incorporated into the Construction Documents by addendum PRIOR to time of the General Contract bid opening, all bids shall be held to have been made on the basis of the materials, methods and processes required by the Construction Documents. 3. Equal Materials: It is not the intent of the Specifications to limit materials to the product of any particular manufacturer. Where defmite materials, equipment and/or fixtures have been specified by name, manufacturer or catalog number, it has been done so as to set a defmite standard and a reference for comparison as to quality, application, physical conformity, and other characteristics. 4. Acceptance of substitution by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper operation of the systems, compliance with specifications, necessary changes due to dimensional differences or space requirements, and of work on schedule. 5. Where equipment of the acceptable manufacturers' requires different arrangement or connections from those shown, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the original intent of the drawings and specifications. When directed by the Architect, the Contractor proposing substitutions shall submit drawings showing the proposed installation. If the proposed installation is- approved, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes in all affected related work provided under other Sections, including location of rough -in connections by other Trades, conduit supports, insulation, etc. All changes shall be made at no increase in the Contract amount or additional cost to the other Trades and/or Owner. C. Data Required for Review: Mark submittal literature and shop drawings clearly, bind 8 1/2 x 11 literature in hard backed looseleaf binders by individual sets, and include all equipment and material shown on drawings and specified. Provide four (4) complete sets. ANY DATA NOT CLEARLY MARKED OR NOT APPROPRIATELY SUBM111LD WILL BE RETURNED WITHOUT CHECKING. Indicate the following: 1. Specification reference and/or drawing reference for which literature is submitted for review with an index, following specification format- and item by item identification. 2. Manufacturer's name, address, and phone number; supplier's name, address, and phone number; Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 15010 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 a 1 1 a 1 1 1 3. Catalog designation or model number. 4. Rough -in data and dimensions. 5. Performance curves and rated capacities with perfomrance data marked. 6. Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams. 7. Operation characteristics. 8. Complete customized listing of equipment_ characteristics, accessories, etc., specified. Indicate whether item is "As specified ". Mark out all non - applicable items. The terminology "As specified" used without this customized listing is not acceptable. 9. Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation. 10. Working construction drawings (shop drawings). Provide one (1) sepia and two (2) blueline prints. D. Partial Submittals: If other than a complete submittal is made, the Contractor may make partial submittals separated into complete specification section classifications. E. Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only and does not relieve the Contractor from any of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity, dimension, fit or proper technical design of manufactured equipment. Where deviations of substitute product or system performance have not been specifically noted in the submittal by the Contractor, provision of a complete and satisfactory working installation is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. F. Submittal data required but not limited to the following: I.09 SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED Ductwork Shop Drawings Fire Dampers Pipe Fire Damper Installation Detail Isolators Controls Valves Valve Tags/Markers Relief Valves Access Panels/Doors Gauges Flexible Connectors Chillers Pumps Air Handlers Boilers Condensers Pipe Identification Labels Flexible Ductwork Water Heaters Insulationlnternal Lining Plumbing Fixtures and Trim Metal Jacket & Fittings Cleanouts Exhaust Fans Floor Drains Exhaust/Relief Caps Condensing Units/Heat Pumps Volume Dampers Duct Tape Supply Fans Grease Traps Air Extractors Lint Trap Grilles /Registers/Diffusers Acid Dilution Basin Unit Heaters Fire /Smoke Dampers Spin -in Fittings Fire /Smoke Damper Installation Detail 15010 - 5 A. Prepare and submit working construction drawings as requested, specified, and otherwise necessary to demonstrate proper planning for installation and arrangement of all work. Layout drawings to scale and show dimensions where accuracy of location is necessary for coordination or communication purposes. Show work of all trades, including Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical items which may be pertinent to proper and accurate coordination. Provide shop drawings for all products, ductwork, systems, system components, and sprdal supports which are not standard catalog products and which may be fabricated for the Contractor or by the Contractor. Identify all shop drawings as to which section and paragraph of the specifications and/or drawing number the item is covered under. Ductwork layout/shop drawings to be done at a minimum 1/8" = 1' -0" scale, except in mechanical rooms where they are to be at a minimum of 1/4" = 1' -0 ". B. ALL SHOP DRAWINGS OF MECHANICAL ROOMS SHALL BE DONE AT A MINIMUM SCALE OF 1/4 INCH EQUALS 1 FOOT. SHOW ALL FLOOR DRAINS, EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING ELECTRIC PANELS, TRANSFORMERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCH LOCATIONS. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. C. Submission of copies of the Engineer's drawings does not constitute shop drawings and is not acceptable. D. Submittal of shop drawings and complete engineering submittal data shall be made in sufficient copies to provide one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Architect, one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Engineer, two (2) copies of all data to be accumulated for the Owner, additional copies as required by the Contractor. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Reference requirements stated elsewhere in the Specifications. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAPE ALL ADDENDA ISSUED DURING BIDDING TO HIS CONSTRUCTION AND RECORD DRAWING SET PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. PAY REQUESTS WILL NOT BE PROCESSED UNTIL THE CONTRACTOR HAS COMPLIED WITH THIS REQUIREMENT. C. In addition to other requirements, a master Record Drawing blueline set (separate from field sets) shall be kept in the General's site trailer and marked up weekly as the work progresses, to show exact dimensioned location and routing of all mechanical work which will be permanently concealed. Show routing and location of items cast in concrete or buried underground. Show routing of work in permanently concealed blind spaces within the building. Work located in spaces with access, or above suspended ceilings, is not considered permanently concealed. Show complete routing and sizing of any significant revisions to the systems shown. Show the location of all valves and their appropriate tag identification. Indicate locations of all existing active and inactive piping uncovered during construction. Keep marked up set at site for review at site meetings. D. Contractor shall indicate progress by coloring -in various conduits, pipes, ducts, and associated appurtenances exactly as they are erected. This process shall incorporate both the changes noted above and all other deviations from the original drawings whether resulting from job conditions encountered or from any other causes. E. The marked -up and colored -up prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work installed. They shall be inspected periodically by the Architect and Owner's Representatives, and they shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. This procedure is mandatory. F. No monthly pay applications will be reviewed if the Record Drawings are incomplete or are unavailable for inspection. G. At the completion of the job, these prints shall be submitted to the Architect for final review and comment. The prints will be returned with appropriate comments and recommendations. These corrected prints, together with corrected prints indicating all the revisions, additions and deletions of work, shall form the basis for preparing a set of record drawings. 15010 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 H. The Engineers original tracings may be borrowed by the Contractor for his Trade, to obtain a set of mylar reproductions. Engineers seal shall be removed from this set of mylars. Each Contractor shall then transfer all work to his mylar set and shall add the date of printing and the legend "Record Drawing Set" and submit a set of reproducible sepias to the Architect for his review. The Architect shall comment on the set of sepias and shall return this set to the Contractor to make any final modifications to the drawings. After all corrections are made, the Contractor shall add the date of printing and the legend "Record Drawing Set" on the mylar set. I. Using the "Record Drawing Set ", the Contractor shall print one (1) complete set of reproducible mylars and two (2) sets of prints for submission to the Owner. Contractor shall bear all the costs of reproducing the original tracings, making all the necessary changes and printing the mylar sets for the work m his charge. K. Final payment will be withheld until all Record Drawing Sets are submitted to the Owner. 1.11 CODES AND ORDINANCES Comply with the applicable local, state and federal codes and ordinances affecting materials and methods of installation of the Mechanical Systems. Follow recommended practices as set down by ASME, SMACNA, ASHRAE, NFPA, Uniform Buildin.2 Code, Uniform Mechanical Code, Uniform Numbing Code, National Electrical Code, AGA, ADA, Architectural Barriers and OSHA, as they apply to this project, except in cases where statutes govern. B. In cases of difference between Building Codes, State Laws, Local Ordinances and Industry Standards and the Contract Documents, each Subcontractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any such difference, as applicable to his work. C. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and the requirements of any Code or Authorities having jurisdiction, the most stringent requirements of the aforementioned shall govem. D. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable Building codes, State laws, Local Ordinances and Industry Standards, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies, as approved by the Architect. 1.12 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Electrical Specifications: Division 16. B. Unless otherwise indicated on the Electrical Drawm s or in Mechanical Specifications, provide all mechanical equipment motors, motor starters, disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, control relays, time clocks, thermostats, motor valves, damper motors, electric switches, electric components, wiring, and any other miscellaneous Division 15 controls. C. Carefully coordinate all work with the electrical work shown and specified elsewhere in these documents. D. Motors: Furnish electric motors designed for the specific application and duty applied, and to deliver rated horsepower without exceeding temperature ratings when operated on power systems with a combined variation in voltage and frequency not more than plus or minus 10 percent of rated voltage. E. Verify from the drawings and specifications the available electrical supply characteristics and furnish equipment that will perform satisfactorily under the conditions shown and specified. F. Size motors for 1.15 service factor, not to exceed 40 degrees temp. rise above ambient. G. Provide self- resetting thermal overload switch for fractional horsepower motors. 15010 - 7 H. Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install temperature control wiring and conduit. All control wiring inside structure shall be in metallic raceway. All control wiring outside shall be in liquid tight conduit. When Mechanical Contractor fumishes motor starter, provide each three phase motor 25 HP and larger with phase failure and phase reversal monitoring relay in all three phases. Relay shall open motor starter contacts at 10% voltage unbalance and shall automatically reset when voltage returns to normal. Provide adjustable time delay set at .2 second on drop -out to prevent nuisance tripping on momentary voltage dips. J. Duct smoke detector in supply and return air or fire stat to be provided by Electrical Contractor, installed by Mechanical Contractor, tied into fire alarm panel by Electrical Contractor. K. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings and any change in motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution of mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. 1.13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Schedule, obtain, and pay for all fees and/or services required by local authorities and by these specifications, to test the mechanical systems as specified in these specifications. B. Request For Tests: Notify the Architect a minimum of 24 hours in advance of tests. In the event the Architect does not witness the test, certify in writing that all specified tests have been made in accordance with the specifications. C. Deficiencies: Immediately correct all deficiencies which are evidenced during the test and repeat test until system is approved. Do not cover or conceal piping, equipment or other portions of the mechanical installations until satisfactory tests are trade and approved. D. Operating Tests: Upon request from the Architect, place the entire mechanical installation and/or any portion thereof, in operation to demonstrate satisfactory operation. E. Log of Tests: The Contractor shall set up a testing log form to be kept at the job site with the record drawings. All tests shall have pertinent data logged at the time of testing. Pertinent data is to include: date, time, description, personnel, system tested (and extent), test conditions, test results, etc. F. Completion: Upon completion of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Architect's satisfaction that the systems have been installed in a satisfactory manner in accordance with the plans, specifications, and applicable codes. Demonstrate dynamic operation of all systems. Show that all controls are operable and are properly adjusted in accordance with the requirements of the. final systems balance, that all systems are properly balanced, that all equipment operates properly, that filters and strainers are clean, and that all components of all systems are installed and adjusted for proper operation. 1, Prior to final inspection, all work under this Division to be completed, all equipment to insure operational and final testing and balance reports submitted and approved. 1.14 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION A. All equipment and materials shall be protected from physical and weather damage from the time of delivery until completion of the project. This includes erection of temporary shelters and covering items in the building with protective covering. Store items subject to moisture damage such as control in dry, heated space. Failure to comply with the above to the satisfaction of the Owner /Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the equipment or material in question. Upon such rejection, the damaged equipment or material will be completely replaced with new by the Contractor at no charge to the Owner. 15010 - 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. The Manufacturer's directions are to be followed from delivery, storage, protection and installation of equipment and materials. Notify the Architect in writing of conflicts between requirements of Contract Documents and manufacturer's direction. C. Large pieces of equipment which are too large to permit access through doors, stairways or access opening shall be placed in the space before enclosing the structure. After equipment is placed, it shall be thoroughly protected from damage. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct an authorized representative of the Owner on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems. equipment, and controls under this contract. Make available a qualified technician for each component of the installation for this instruction. Give these operation instructions after the operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished to the Owner. Submit written certification, signed by the Contractor, and an authorized representative of the Owner, that this has been completed. 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals for training of Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and related equipment in the manner described elsewhere in these specifications. In addition, organize manuals and include data and narrative as noted below (bind each manual in a hard- backed looseleaf binder. Use 8 -1 /2" x 11" white paper). B. Operating Sequence and Procedures: C. Maintenance Instructions: I. Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task: i.e., cleaning, inspection, etc. D. Manufacturer's Brochures: Include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering all appurtenances used in each system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Provide nearest manufacturers' representatives name, address and phone number. E. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected, approved submittals and shop drawings covering equipment for the project either with the manufacturers' brochures or properly identified in a separate subsection. F. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment furnished for project, with a tabulation of descriptive data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or systems. Properly identify each part by part number and manufacturer. 1.17 GUARANTEE 1. Contents: In each chapter, describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter. Also, include a copy of System Balancing Report. 2. Typewritten Operating procedures: Write procedures for start -up, operation, and shutdown. a. Start-up: Give complete step -by -step instructions for energizing equipment, making initial setting and adjustments whenever applicable. b. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after opetation. If a particular sequence is required, give step -by -step instruction in that order. A. The Contractor and Manufacturer's shall provide a ONE (1) YEAR guarantee for all work under the Electrical, HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection Trade. However. such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and Contractor may have by 15010 - 9 law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. In any case, such guarantees and warranties shall continence when the Owner accepts the mechanical/electrical system, as determined by the Architect, and shall remain in effect for a period of ONE (1) YEAR thereafter. S. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under each Section shall carry a ONE (1) YEAR warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault under any Contract, due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship or design which may develop shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the Contractor for the work under his Contract, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other system resulting from this failure. C. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the system. which are to be provided under his Contract. are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated. D. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of any systems or equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by the Contractor for his respective work, as applicable. E. Furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements. F. Reference other guarantee information elsewhere in these specifications. 1.18 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION A. When any piece of mechanical or electrical equipment is operable and it is the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly supervises the operation. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the benefit of the Owner. B. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust the equipment and complete all punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and the start of the warranty may no be the same date. 1.19 RECORD FOR OWNER A. Each Contractor shall accumulate and bind in an "Operating and Maintenance" manual the following data to be presented to the Owner at the completion of the Project. 1. All warranties and guarantees and manufacturers instruction on equipment and material covered by the contract. 2. Approved equipment brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams and control diagrams. 3. Copies of approved shop diagrams. 4. Operating instructions for heating and cooling and other mechanical systems. Operating instructions shall also include recommended maintenance and seasonal changeover procedures. 5. Repair parts lists of all major items and equipment including name, address and telephone number of local supplier or agent. 6. Valve tag charts and diagrams herein before specified. 7. HVAC balance and test results. "As- Built" Drawings as specified under "Construction Drawings" (these are not to be bound in the 0 & M Manual). 15010 - 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Z 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. All of the above data shall be submitted to the Owner for approval no less than two (2) weeks before final inspection. 1.20 SITE OBSERVATION A. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to personally make a careful inspection trip of the entire project, assuring himself that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance before calling upon the Owner, Architect or Engineer to make final acceptance of the work. B. The final acceptance of the work will be made jointly by the Architect and the Owner. END OF SECTION 15010- 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes specific requirements, products. and methods of execution which are typical throughout the mechanical work of this project. Additional requirements for the specific systems will be found in the sections specifying those systems, and supersede these requirements. B. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. Obtain approval from Architect prior to cutting or drilling any building elements. B. Structural Interferences: Should structural members prevent the installation of piping, ducting or equipment, notify the Architect before proceeding. Consider minor changes in position of equipment, piping, or ducting, as part of the contract at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Coordinate with Structural and Architectural work to determine acceptable locations for sleeves and supports which are required but may not be specifically shown on the plans. Schedule installation of sleeves and special supports in a manner timely to the work of other crafts. Anticipate minor offsets necessary for proper coordination with other work, and reroute systems appropriately. D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to properly use all information found on the Architectural, Structural, Civil and Electrical Drawings where such drawings affect his work. 1.03 DIMENSION AND FIT A. Cut materials accurately from measurements taken on the JOB SITE. B. Do not spring or bend pipe to fit conditions or make up joints. 1.04 SERVICEABILITY OF PRODUCTS A. Furnish all products to provide the proper orientation of serviceable components to access space provided. B. Coordinate installation of piping, ductwork, equipment coils, system components, and other products to allow proper service of all items requiring periodic maintenance or replacement. C. Replace or relocate all products incorrectly ordered or installed to provide proper serviceability. 1.05 ACCESSIBILITY OF PRODUCTS A. Arrange all work to provide permanent, convenient, and safe access to all serviceable and/or operable products. Layout work to optimize net usable access space within confines of space available. Advise Architect, in a timely manner, of areas where proper access cannot be maintained. Furnish layout drawings to verify this claim, if requested. 15050 - 1 B. Provide access doors in ceilings, walls, floors, etc, for access to traps, valves, dampers, automatic devices, and all serviceable or operable equipment in concealed spaces. Location of panels shall be submitted for approval in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work. 1.06 ROUTING A. Route all pipelines and ductwork parallel with building lines, and as high as possible, except where under ground or shown otherwise on the plan. B. Route piping and ducts to clear all doors, windows, and other openings and to avoid all other pipes and ducts. light fixtures, and similar products. C. Conceal all pipes and ducts where routed through finished areas, unless authorized by Architect or otherwise indicated on plans. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL PRODUCTS A. Provide all products new, unused, and undamaged, of standard manufacture, and of latest design and best quality. B. When a manufacturer's name appears in these specifications or schedule, it is not to be construed that the manufacturer's material does not have to meet the full requirements of the specifications or that his standard catalogue item will be acceptable. C. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service and local stock of repair parts. 2.02 Where more than one type of material is specified, the Contractor may choose one type; however, he must state which type of material he proposes to use in his submittal. Only one type of material may be used in a specific piping system. 2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded: Schedule 40, ASTM A53 grade B or ASTM Al20, American Standard pipe thread. Malleable iron 150 lb. fittings. 2. Welded: Schedule 40 black, ASTM A53 grade B or ASTM Al20, ANSI B16 butt weld fittings of type and wall thickness to suit pipe. Weld -O -Lets and Thread -O -Lets may be used on pipe 2" and larger where branch is a minimum of two pipe sizes smaller than main. Pipe under 2" made up with weld fittings. 3. Grooved Pipe: Schedule 40 ASTM Al20 or ASTM A53 grade. Standard cut groove to coupling manufacturer's specifications. Do not use m systems exceeding 200 operating temperature. B. Copper Pipe: a. Couplings: Standard weight with gasket selected by manufacturer for service intended. b. Fittings: Full flow malleable iron, ductile iron or steel. c. Submit calculations of expansion allowance of joints and obtain approval prior to eliminating any special expansion compensators, swing joints, flexible connections, or vibration isolators_ d. Manufacturer's: Victaulic or Grinnel. 15050 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 Type "K" or "L" hard drawn copper with wrought copper fittings with openings machined to accurate capillary fit for the pipe. Pipe to conform to Standard Specifications for copper water tube. 2. Solder joints using 50/50 lead tin solder for systems operating below 180 F. 3. Solder joints using 430 silver solder for systems operating at 180 or above. 4. Use "lead free" solder for all domestic water piping. 2.04 VALVES A. Select valves of the best quality and type suited for the specific service and piping system used. Minimum working pressure rating 125 psig steam or 150 psig W.O.G. B. Manufacturer: Nibco, Hammond, Jenkins, Milwaukee, Stockham, other recognized manufacturer of equal reliability. C. Gate Valves, 2" and Smaller: Bronze body and trim, rising stem, solid wedge. D. Gate Valves, 2 -1/2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, flanged. E. Globe Valve 2" and Smaller: Teflon disc, bronze body, bronze trim. F. Ball Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, virgin TFE seat rings, blow -out proof stem, reinforced thrust washer, 1/4 turn full open/full close. G. Globe Valve 2'1/2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, Runa -N disc, flanged, bronze disc hot water, Bursa -N disc cold water. H. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, horizontal swing, Y- pattern, renewable disc. I. Swing Check Valves 2 -1/2" and Larger: Iron body, horizontal swing, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, flanged, non -slam type. J. Drain Valves: }lose end gate valve or gate valves with hose connection. Do not use sillcocks in lieu of drain valves. K. Valves Specified Elsewhere: Provide special valves such as motor operated valves, relief valves, temperature regulating valves, etc., as specified under the individual system or as indicated on the drawings. L. USE BALL VALVES RATED FOR SERVICE INTENDED FOR ALL ISOLATION VALVES TWO INCHES (2 ") AND SMALLER. 2.05 BALANCING VALVES A. Provide balancing valves for all cooling and heating flows and at all pump discharge lines. B. Valves, rated at not less than 150 psi, furnished with three self - lubricating bronze or teflon- coated stainless steel bushings with shaft seals at each bushing; seals to be hard back resilient type and shall be field replaceable; discs shall be bronze, aluminum- bronze, or semi -steel with welded nickel edge. C. Valves 4" and smaller insulated with removable foam polyurethane Dry Cap. Series 400, D. Valve 2 -1/2" through 6" shall be lever operated. Butterfly valves, lug body indicating locking type with adjustable memory stop, may be used at Contractors option at each location where gate valves or globe valve is indicated on water line 2 -1/2" and larger. E. On valves 2" and smaller, use FlowSet balancing valves system consisting of: 300 lb. rate flow measuring bronze body ball valve with integral venturi and temperature and pressure taps; flow 15050 - 3 F. Manufacturer's: DeZurik, Olympic Valve, Inc., Jenkins, Nibco, B & G, Hammond, Presso or approved equal. 2.06 UNIONS A. Provide unions, flanges, or wing couplings adjacent to all tanks and equipment and where required for disconnect and maintenance of equipment. B. Union for Steel Pipe: Ground joint malleable iron. C. Union for Copper Pipe: All brass. D. Union Between Dissimilar Metals: Dielectric type, designed and advertised to be unaffected by heat, cold or fluid in pipe. EPCO or approved equal. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS A. Escutcheons: Nickel or chrome plate with screws or springs for holding plate in position. B. Gaskets: Gaskets 1/16 inch thick for all pipe sizes 10 inches and smaller and 1/8 inch thick for all pipe sizes 12 inches and larger. Gaskets to be ring type between raised face flanges and full face type between flat face flanges with punched bolt holes and pipe opening. Gasket material shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer: Crane, John- Manville, or equal. 2.08 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: setting 300 Ib. butterfly valve assembly with stainless steel disc and viton seats dual -core temperature /pressure test port and external lockable memory stop. Fumish valves with insulation sleeve for ease of access to temperature /pressure ports and to allow adjustments of valve handles without removing insulation. Manufacturer: FlowSet by Olympic Valve, Inc. At the Contractor's option, use Presso B -Plus balancing valves with extension handle and extension P/T plugs. B. Pipe Supports: Securely fasten all mechanical work to the structure to prevent hazard to human Life and limb, and to prevent damage to products of construction under all conditions of operation. Single Pipes: a. Support all horizontal runs cast -iron soil pipe on hangers spaced not more than 5 feet on centers. Support piping in a manner to prevent binding, undue swing, and the transmission of vibration to the structure. Support plastic piping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and the applicable ASTM standard. Support fuel gas piping per code. Support horizontal steel and copper piping at not more than the following spacing, and at valves and similar point loads, and at elbows. Schedule 40 Type L Type M O D. Size In Steel Copper Drain 1/2 6 4 3/4 7 5 5 1 7 6 6 1 1/4 8 7 7 1 1/2 9 8 8 2 10 8 8 2 1/2 11 9 15050 - 4 1 S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 b. Support single pipes from clevis hangers equal to Grinnel No. 104. Install hangers for insulated piping outside the insulation using high density section of insulation and sheet metal shield or saddle. Provide copper plated hangers or plastic shields in contact with copper pipe. 2. Trapeze Hangers: Where pipes are clustered, parallel, and in same plane, they may be supported by trapeze hangers. Provide rods and angle -irons sized to suit load imposed. 3. Piping on Walls: Secure with hook - plates, clips or fabricated steel brackets. 4. Supports from Steel Beams and Similar Construction: Use appropriate beam clamps. 5. Provide inserts for poured concrete and expansion bolts for pre -cast slabs. 6. Guide and anchor piping where necessary to control expansion and contraction. Provide supports and hangers with non - corrosive and rust-resistant finish Galvanize or plate hanger rods after threading. Hangers other than those specified not permitted. 7. Provide single pipe supports not less than the following schedule: E. Miscellaneous Iron and Steel: 3 12 10 4 14 12 6 17 14 8 19 10 20 12 20 14 20 16 20 18 20 20 20 PIPE SIZE - INCHES ROD SIZE - INCHES 1/2" through 2" 3/8" 2 -1/2 " through 3" 1/2" 4" through 6" 5/8" 8" through 12" 3/4" 8. Manufacturer's: Grinnel, C & P, Fee and Mason, Elcen, SuperStrut. 9. Chilled and Hot Water Piping on Roof: a. Support piping on roller stands, with cast iron rollers, all galvanized, similar to Grinnell fig271. b. Equipment Support Curbs: Secure stands to equipment support curbs, of galvanized steel, with wood nailer strips, 13" high, similar to Pate type es -2. Refer to Architectural detail. Where pipe must be vertically stacked for space reasons, provide galvanized support structure on curb. C. Ductwork Support: Refer to Section 15810, Air Distribution. D. Inserts: Provide all inserts required for installation of horizontal piping. In poured concrete provide wrought steel or malleable iron and adjustable type. \Vhere expansion bolts are necessary to secure piping or equipment, use malleable iron type with expansion case, to be inserted by drilling concrete. Power driven inserts not permitted for supporting piping to ceiling. Provide all steel supports and hangers to support all equipment or materials unless noted otherwise. 15050 - 5 2.09 ACCESS DOORS 2.10 GAS VENTS 2. All work shall be cut, assembled, welded and finished by skilled mechanics. Welds shall be ground smooth. Stands, brackets and framework shall be properly sized and strongly constructed. Measurements shall be taken on the job and worked out to suit adjoining and connecting work. All work shall be performed by experienced metal- working mechanics. Members shall be straight and true and accurately fitted. Welded joints shall be ground smooth where exposed. Drilling, cutting and fitting shall be done as required to properly install the work and accommodate the work of other Trades. 5. Members shall be generally welded except that bolting may be used for field assembly where welding would be impractical. Welders shall be skilled and certified. 6. All shop fabricated iron and steel work shall be cleaned and dried and given two (2) coats of weatherproof primer paint on all surfaces and in all openings and crevices. A. Doors shall be Karp, Inland Steel Products, Milcor, Miami or Walsh- Hannon, constructed of steel with primer coat of rust inhibitive paint, and continuous piano hinge. Doors shall be key operated with flush operated cylinders, keyed alike. Key lock system shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall be approved by the Architect. Provide six (6) keys of type used for access panels for Owner's use. Obtain receipt of key delivery and submit to Architect for record. 1. Suspended lath and plaster ceilings - Style: "M" with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel. 2. Masonry non -rated walls - Style: "M" with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel. 3. Masonry fire rated walls - fire rated with UL, 12 hour "B" rating, 16 gauge frame, 20 gauge sandwich type insulated panel. 4. For access doors larger than 16" in either direction, provide two (2) locksets. A. Gas vents shall be suitable for the equipment actually provided. Vent type shall be at least Type B. In addition, provide positive pressure type sealed vent system where the vent will be under positive pressure. B. Type B Vent (3" - 48 "): 1. Factory- built; labeled and tested for use with building heating equipment. 2. Double wall pipe; galvanizedsteel outer.pipe. heavy gauge aluminum inner pipe. 3. Supply with support pieces, adapters, fittings and ventilating thimble. 4. Provide vent and cap for all suitable gas consuming equipment. Size vents for the actual layout and the flow and pressure requirements of the equipment provided. Submit sizing calculations for review. In no case shall the pipe be smaller than the equipment connection size. 5. Provide flashing base, truncoated 12" high cone flashing to match roof slope (may be shop built if slope does not match standard manufactured slopes), and sealed storm collar. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer's: Metalabestos Type RV or QC or Metalfab. C. Pressurized Vent (6" - 48 "): 15050 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Factory built; labeled and tested for use with building heating equipment to 1400` F continuous duty and 60" w.g. 2. Double wall pipe; aluminized steel outer pipe, Type 304 stainless steel inner pipe; sealed joints. 3. Supply with support pieces, adapters, fittings, ventilating thimble and rain with bird screen. 4. Provide vent and cap for all suitable gas consuming equipment producing positive flue pressure or high temperature. Size vents for the actual layout and the flow and pressure requirements of the equipment provided. Submit sizing calculations for review. In no case shall the pipe be smaller than the equipment connection size. 5. Provide flashing base, trimcoated cone flashing to match roof slope (may be shop built if slope does not match standard manufactured slopes), and sealed storm collar. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer's: Metalfab Type PIC or Metalabestos. D. Vent caps: Breident or Acme with 1/4" bird screen. 2.11 STARTERS A. When specified, or integral to the equipment scheduled, starters shall be integral to the equipment and may be definite purpose type conforming to Division 16 specifications. B. Generally, separate starters, starters in motor control centers, and variable speed drives are under Division 16. 2.12 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. B. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 with 2- degree scale divisions (0 to 115 C with 1- degree scale divisions). 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 F with 2- degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 C with 1- degree scale divisions). 3. Hot Water: 30 to 300 with 2- degree scale divisions (0 to IA) C with 1- degree scale divisions). 4. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 F with 2- degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 C .with 1- degree scale divisions). 2.13 DIRECT -MOUNT FILLED - SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Type: Vapor actuated, universal angle. B. Case: Cast aluminum, glass lens, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. C. Adjustable Joint Finish to match case, 180 - degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360 - degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor bronze bourdon pressure tube. E. Movement: Brass, precision geared. F. Scale: Progressive, satin faced, nonreflective aluminum, permanently etched markings. 15050 - 7 G. Stem: Copper - plated steel, aluminum, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation. 2.14 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Thermometer Wells: Stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure; with 2- inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap. 2.15 PRESSURE GAGES A. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon -tube type, bottom connection. B. Case: Drawn steel fiberglass reinforced polyproylene, cast aluminum, stainless steel or brass, glass lens, 4 -1/2- inches diameter, glycerin filled. C. Connector: Brass, I/4 -inch NPS. D. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings. E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. F. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi. 2. All fluids: 2 times operating pressure. 2.16 PRESSURE GAGE ACCESSORIES A. Syphon: 1/4 -inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each end. B. Snubber: 1/4 -inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion - resistant porous metal disc. Disc material shall be suitable for fluid served and rated pressure. 2.17 WINDOW -TYPE FLOW METERS A. Type: Window -type flow meters designed for installation on hydronic piping and measure flow directly in gpm. B. Construction: Bronze body and impact tube, integral self - closing valve, glass calibrated tube with indicator ball, and protection shield. Meters shall be pressure rated for 150 psig and temperature rated for 240 F (116 C). C. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent. PART 3- EXECUTION 301 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. Provide equipment concrete pads, treated support numers, roof curb supports, mounting accessories, supports, hangers, expansion joints, adapters and any other appurtenances to adapt fixtures and equipment supplied to the conditions of use. B. Independently support piping and ductwork at equipment so that no weight is supported by the equipment. C. Securely fasten fixtures and equipment to the building structure in accordance with manufacturer's reconunendation. 15050 - 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Provide steel base plates for floor mounted fixtures and equipment to distribute the weight so that the floor load is not more than 100 lbs. psf, unless special structural reinforcement is submitted for review. E. At wall attached fixtures and equipment weighing less than 50 pounds, provide backing plates of at least 1/8 x 10 inch sheet metal or 2 x 10 inch fire retardant treated wood securely built into the structural walls. Submit attachment details of heavier equipment for review. F. Electrical conduit shall not be hung from equipment or mechanical systems. 3.02 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves as required where pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings. Make sleeves as follows: 1. In non -fire rated bearing walls, foundations, masonry or concrete walls and floors above grade, use schedule 40 black steel pipe. 2. In slabs on grade use Schedule 40 PVC. 3. In non rated construction, use minimum 20 gauge galvanized sheetmetal. 4. In fire rated walls, floors and assemblies install sleeves as required by UL System Number. B. In non fire rated areas install sleeves flush with surfaces. In mechanical rooms or any wet floor where seepage may occur install sleeve 1 inch above floor and caulk. Caulk both sides of penetration using UL listed one part firestop synthetic elastomer sealant, flexible at normal working temperatures, having smoke developed 50, fuel contributed 50, and flame spread 25 rating. Install thickness per manufacturer's recommendation. Manufacturer: Dow Corning FireStop 2000 Sealant, Flame Stop V, 3M: CP -25. C. Waterproof all sleeves through building exterior skin, including walls, roofs and interior floor penetrations to prevent leakage. Coordinate with the Architect on caulk material to use at exterior. D. Size sleeves for cold piping to allow for continuous insulation through sleeve. 3.03 SEALING AND FIREPROOFING A. SEALING OF PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS, FLOORS, CEILING AND ROOF ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER UL "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY". UL SYSTEM NUMBERS INDICATED ARE FOR A PARTICULAR LISTED INSTALLATION AND ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION AND INTENT. OTHER LISTED UL SYSTEM DESIGNS MAY BE USED. IN ALL CASES, SUBMIT MATERIALS, UL SYSTEM DESIGN NUMBERS AND UL DETAILS TO BE USED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT AND IDENTIFY WHICH DETAIL IS TO BE USED FOR EACH SPECIFIC CONDITION. POST REVIEWED DETAIL AT JOB SITE FOR REFERENCE. 1. Only materials tested in the specific UL System Number maybe used. a. Wrap Strip (UL System No. WL 5001): Nominal 1/4" thick by 2" wide intumescent elastomeric material. Manufacturer: 3M Type FS -195. 1) Use one (1) wrap strip for up to one inch (1 ") thickness insulation. 2) Use two (2) wrap strips for 1 1/2" inch and larger thickness insulation. b. Caulk Manufacturer: 1) 3M Type CP -25 WB+ for all assemblies requiring 3M caulk. 2) For WL3045 and 3046 use Hilti FS611A Sealant. 15050 - 9 c. Steel Sleeve (stud wall) (UL System 1003): Cylindrical sleeve shall be fabricated from minimum 0.019" thick (no. 28 gauge) galvanized sheet steel and having a minimum 2" lap along the longitudinal seam. Length of steel sleeve to be equal to thickness of wall plus 1" such that, when installed, the ends of the sleeve will project approximately 1/2" beyond the surface of the wall on both sides of the wall assembly. The diameter of the openings cut on each side of the wall assembly (concentric with pipe) to be 2 to 2 1/2" larger than the outside diameter of pipe such that, when the steel sleeve is installed, a 1 to 1 1/4" annular space will be present between the steel sleeve and the pipe around the entire circumference of the pipe. Install sleeve by coiling the sheet steel to a diameter smaller than the through opening, inserting the coil through the openings and releasing the coil to let it uncoil against the circular cutouts in the gypsum wallboard layers. d. Steel Sleeve (concrete or block wall): For cables, provide sleeve cast in floor /wall or mortared into CMU wall; optional sleeve for UL System No. CAJ1 I75. e. Forming Material: Minimum one inch (1") thickness mineral -wool batt insulation _., material. Tightly pack into sleeve with minimum 1 /2 ". recess on ends. Manufacturer: Thermafiber Safing Insulation. 2. Wire /Cables: a. For gypsum frame wall (single cable): Fireproof per UL System No. WL300I. Opening for cable to be hole -sawed through gypsum wall board layers. Diameter of opening to be 3/8" to 5/8" inch larger than outside diameter of cable. Cable to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Caulk to fill annular space throughout thickness of gypsum wall board layers and apply 1/4" bead of caulk to perimeter of cable at its egress from wall (both sides). b. For gypsum frame wall (multiple cables): Use UL System No. WL3021, WL3045, WL3046 or equivalent to maintain rating of wall. c. For concrete walls /floors or CMU walls (single or multiple cables): Fireproof per UL System No. CAJ3030. Cables to be a minimum ten percent (10 %), maximum thirty-three percent (33 %) of cross - sectional area of opening. Recess minimum one inch (1") thickness of mineral wool material into opening around cables. Caulk openings around cable to minimum depth of one inch (1"). Optional sleeve may be used per UL detail requirements. 3. Firestop system shall be installed at top surface of floor and symmetrically on both sides of wall assemblies. 4. Materials used in firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, provided with materials for specific UL System No. 5. Reference Architectural for the exact location of all rated walls, floors, ceilings and ceiling/roof assemblies. B. Manufacturer's: 3M, Metacaulk, Hilti, BioFireshield or equal. C. In non -rated walls identified for sound insulation, provide 1/2" space between pipe and sleeve packed with multiple layers of forming material. Allow 5/8" minimum space on each side and caulk with acoustical sealant. D. Final condition to prevent passage of fire, smoke. noxious gas and water. E. For non -rated mechanical/electrical room walls: Seal all piping and ductwork passing through walls, floors and ceilings with 3M caulk, Type CP -25 +. 15050 - 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 $ 1 1 1 Z 1 1 1 3.04 WATERPROOFING AND COUNTERFLASHING A. Provide and install all counterflashing of all conduit, pipe or duct and equipment which penetrates roofs, walls and other weather barrier surfaces. Verify detail with Architect before installation. B. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner to assure weatherproof installation. Any leaks developed shall be repaired at his expense, to Architect's satisfaction. C. Conduits, pipes or ducts passing through slabs shall have the sleeve extended above floors to retain any water and the space between the conduit, pipe or duct and sleeve caulked with lead wool. The top shall be sealed with lead and the bottom shall be sealed with monolastic caulking compound. D. All waterproofmg, flashing and counterflashing shall be installed by the Roofing Contractor and shall be compatible with roofing system so as not to void any roof warranties. Confirm installation with Architect. 3.05 LABELING AND TAGGING A. .Tag all valves with heat resistant laminated dark plastic labels engraved with readily legible white lettering 1/4" high indicating fluid in pipe and a P (plumbing) or M (HVAC) number. Securely fasten to the valve stem or bonnet with beaded chain. Provide a self - closing aluminum valve chart and frame with glass cover for typewritten director. Install where directed. Refer to Section 15010, and Manuals. B. Label all equipment with heat resistant laminated plastic labels having engraved lettering 1/2" high and fastened in place with rivets or screws. Example "WH -1, AHU -1, etc." If items are not specifically listed on the schedules, consult the Architect concerning designation to use. Refer to Section 15010. Label all equipment served by emergency electrical panels with red labels. C. Label all thermostats and controllers with heat resistant laminated plastic labels having engraved lettering 1/4" high and fastened in place with rivets or screws. Label is to correspond to equipment controlled. D. Provide access panel markers (laminated engraved plastic type) to indicate ceiling tile to be used for access for all A/C equipment, terminal units and plumbing shut -off valves. Use light green for plumbing and light blue for A/C equipment. Label attached to ceiling grid. E. Manufacturer: Seton Pipe Marking Products or equal. 3.06 TYPICAL PIPING A. Provide insulating couplings or unions to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals when use of dissimilar metals cannot be avoided in one system. B. Close all openings in pipes with appropriate caps, plugs, or covers during storage and progress of the work to preclude introduction of contaminants. C. Arrange systems and locate valves so that either entire system or separate sections thereof may be drained for service. All service valves located no more than 24 inches above the ceiling and normally accessible from an 8 foot ladder. D. Provide valves and unions adjacent to all tanks, batteries of plumbing fixtures and equipment, for disconnect purposes. Install all valves with stems vertical wherever possible, and in no case with stems below the horizontal. E. Ream ends of all pipe to full diameter. F. Provide pipe anchors, swing joints, guides, and expansion compensators as necessary to control the expansion of pipelines. G. Reduce pipe sizes using reducing tees or reducing fittings. Bushings not permitted. 15050 - 11 14. Provide escutcheons on all pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas where piping is m counters, closets or cabinets, and subject to view when doors are open. Cover the pipe sleeve and secure plate in position. I. Install hangers at each change in direction and within 2 feet at each elbow or tee. J. Pipe hooks, wire, chains or perforated metal shall not be used for pipe supports. K. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping with at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. L. Install piping not to interfere with removal of equipment, ducts, and devices or block access to door or access openings. M. Piping serving plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be securely supported near the point where pipes penetrate the fmished wall. N. Test all piping in accordance with accepted trade standards if not specified elsewhere. O. Branch connections of chilled and hot water piping above the roof shall be made with a swing joint with a minimum of 3 - 90 elbows after tap. 3.07 THREADED PIPE A, Cut all threads true and of depth to make up properly without leaks. B. Make connections to show at least two threads and not more than four threads when tight. C. Make up joints with Teflon tape only as recommended by tape manufacturer, or as specified in specific piping sections. 3.08 MANUAL AIR VENTS A. Install at highest point of chilled and hot water system, at chilled and hot water coils and at points necessary to relieve air in piping. B. Route 1/4" copper line from discharge of air vent to floor drain in mechanical room. Slope to drain. C. Provide where indicated. 3.09 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS A. Provide shut -off valve to facilitate maintenance of air vent. 3.10 PAINTING AND CODING A. Ductwork and Piping: Paint all exposed angle braces, hanger rods or straps, damper rods, and quadrants with one coat aluminum paint after removing scale and rust. Paint ductwork and piping exposed in finished rooms to match room finish. Coordinate painting and color with Architectural paint specified elsewhere. All painting done by persons regularly employed at and skilled in that trade. B. Grilles, Registers, Etc.: Furnish all grilles, registers, etc., other than extruded aluminum or plastic with prime coat paint by manufacturer. Furnish all ceiling grilles, registers and diffusers with factory applied baked enamel to match ceiling tile. Paint all ductwork and/or conduit visible through registers, grilles and other openings with one coat of flat black paint to a point four feet (4') from opening on straight duct or around bend, whichever applies. C. Pipe Coding: Identify piping with pressure- sensitive coded pipe marker at piping adjacent to equipment. at intervals along all piping not to exceed 50' and at points where piping disappears into or 15050 - 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.11 CONDENSATE DRAINS emerges from floors, walls, or ceiling. Secure both ends of marker with pressure sensitive tape with flow arrow on roll to indicate flow direction. Color code pipe markers and arrows indicating the liquid and/or use of the pipe. 2. Code piping to the following schedule: (SUBMIT ALTERNATE CODING) Cold Water CW Hot Water HW Hot Water Circulating HWC Chilled Water Supply CHS Chilled Water Retum CWR Hot Water Supply HWS Hot Water Return HWR Gas FUEL GAS Heat Pump Supply HPS Heat Pump Return HPR Condenser Water Supply CWS Condenser Water Return CWR Sprinkler SPKR Condensate Condensate 3. Manufacturer: Seton Pipe Marking Products or equal. A. Provide metallic condensate piping to hub drains. Condensate drains may be combined according to following schedules. EQUIPMENT CAPACITY *MINLMUIvi PIPE SIZE Up to 2 tons of refrigeration 3/4" 3 to 5 tons of refrigeration 1" 6 to 23 tons of refrigeration 1 -1 /4" 24 to 50 tons of refrigeration 1 -1/2" 51 to 170 tons of refrigeration 2" 171 to 200 tons of refrigeration 2 1/2" *Minimum size of drain shall not be smaller than dram outlet size for unit. B. Coordinate mounting heights of units to allow 1 /4 " /ft. slope for condensate piping to disposal point. C. Provide cleanout plug at each change of direction. D. Direct drainage into hub drain. Maintain required air gap. END OF SECTION 15050 - 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 15180 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Description B. SPECIAL NOTE_ All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE RATING OF MATERIALS This section describes specific requirements, products and methods of execution which relate to the insulation of ducts, pipes and other surfaces of the mechanical installation. 2. Insulation is provided for the following purposes: a. Energy conservation b. Control of condensation c. Safety of operating personnel A. Provide all insulation products used above ground in buildings with burning characteristics not to exceed the following ratings according to NFPA 255 -1972 "Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ": Flame Spread 25, Fuel Contributed 50, Smoke Developed 50. B. Insulation specified for use underground and above ground away from the building, might have other burning characteristics. Use such products only where specifically required. 2.02 INSULATION A. TYPE "A ": Pre- molded Fiberglass Piping Insulation: 1. Jacket Type: a. Thermal conductivity K = 0.24 at 100 F mean temperature. b. Factory applied_kraft- reinforced .vapor barrier flame retardant all service jacket and tape, with permeability rating - 0.02 perms. c. Provide insulation sections with self - sealing pressure sensitive adhesive on both overlap seam and mating jacket surface. d. Fitting insulated with pre -cut insulation inserts covered with PVC fitting cover. e. Manufacturer: Owens - Coming Fiberglass, Certainteed, Knauf, Schuller/Manville AP- TPLUS. PVC Jacketed Insulation (Mechanical Room Piping Only): a. Shall be used in all mechanical/boiler rooms for all insulated piping to within two inches (2 ") of interior wall surface of mechanical/boiler rooms. This includes all satellite mechanical rooms containing air handlers. 15180 - 1 b. Thermal conductivity K = .24 at 100 F mean temperature. c. One (1) piece "hinged" construction_ d. Entire piping system in mechanical rooms to be covered with high- impact, UV- resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing with gloss white finish. e. Fitting insulated with pre -cut insulation inserts covered with PVC fitting cover. f. Manufacturer: Schuller/Manville Micro -Lok, Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Certainteed, Knauf B. TYPE "B": Cellular Piping Insulation: 1. Thermal conductivity K = .27 @ 75 F mean temperature. 2. Elastomeric thermal insulation with permeability rating of .17 perms. 3. Temperature range from -40 F to 220 F. 4. Approved for installation in return air plenum 5. Manufacturer's: Armstrong Armaflex Type AP Pipe Insulation, Rubatex, Halstead. C. TYPE "C ": Blanket Type Duct Wrap Fiberglass Insulation: 1. The Contractor may use a 3/4, 1 or 1 1/2 pound density product with a minimum thickness of two inches (2 ") and a minimum installed R -value of 6.0. Density, thickness and installed R -value to be clearly indicated on submittal. Installed R -value must be 6.0 or higher. 2. Fiberglass duct wrap insulation is to have a factory FSK or FRK facing which acts as the vapor barrier. Maximum permeability rating is 0.02 perms. 3. Use only labeled Type UL181AP tape. Maintain a complete vapor barrier throughout all ductwork insulation applications. 4. Manufacturer's: Knauf, Schuller/Manville, Certainteed or Owens - Corning. D. TYPE "D ": Rigid Fiberglass Board Insulation: 1. One inch (1") thick Type 475 with a minimum R -value of 4.3. 2. Rigid board composed of resin bonded glass fibers faced with reinforced foil vapor barrier with permeability rating.of.02 perms..:_.,_.. _ ..... Meet UL181 test and classified as Class I Air Duct. Maximum operating temperature of 250 F. 5. Tape joints using heavy duty foil tape, UL181A labeled, 7.5 mils thick, 3 inches wide, FSK Facing Tape Venture or equal. 6. Manufacturer's: Certainteed Ultra Duct Board. Knauf, Schuller /Manville, Owens - Corning. E. TYPE "E ": Semi -rigid Fiberglass Insulation Board: Semi -rigid glass fiber bonded insulation not affected by moisture, resistant to fungi and bacteria. 2. Permit expansion and contraction of metal without cracking or shrinking. 15180 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum operation temperatures of 850 F. 4. Manufacturer's: Certainteed 850 Fiberglass Insulation, Knauf, Schuller/Manville, Owens - Corning. F. TYPE "F ": Rigid Hydrous Calcium or Perlite Silicate Insulation (Asbestos Free): 1. Average conductivity K = .40 @ 400° F mean temperature. Minimum dry density of 14.0 lbs. per cubic foot for calcium silicate and twelve (12) pounds per cubic foot for Perlite. 2. Asbestos free identification system shall be integrated into insulation to comply with OSHA Regulations. 2.05 METAL OR VINALUM JACKETING Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTME -84 - flame spread '0', smoke developed '0'. 4. Pipe fittings to be insulated with mitered sections of rigid hydrous calcium silicate pre- formed pipe insulation or pre - formed sections of Perlite pipe insulation. Valves are to be insulated with sections of oversized pipe insulation. 5. Pipe application: Pre- formed pipe insulation to be mechanically fastened by wiring in place using 16 gauge wire of nine inch (9 ") centers and subsequently covered with trowel coat of insulating cement prior to application of suitable canvas jacket. Duct application: Slab insulation to be mechanically fastened with bands wired or welded to rods or studs. Finish with trowel coat of insulating cement over wire mesh, prior to application of suitable canvas jacket. Canvas cawed and insulating cement for application to rigid hydrous calcium or Perlite silicate shall be as recommended by rigid insulation manufacturer. 8. Manufacturer's: Owens - Corning "Kaylo ", Schuller/Manville, Calsilite, Pabco "Super Fire Temp", Knauf "Perlite ". 2.03 INSULATED FITTING COVERS AND JACKETING A. High - impact, UV- resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing with gloss white finish. B. Pre -cut curled jacketing, 30 mil. thickness. Sized to snugly fit pipe diameter with thickness of insulation specified. C. Joints and seams sealed with Perma -Weld Adhesive to form a complete vapor barrier for chilled water and domestic cold water systems. Use tack and tape for heating water and domestic hot water systems. Installation of adhesives, tacks and tape shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. Submit installation instructions with submittal of materials. D. Fitting Covers: Covers shall be pre - formed for fitting shape. E. Manufacturer: Schuller/Manville Zeston 2000, Owens - Coming Fiberglass, Certainteed, Knauf, Proto. 2.04 CANVAS JACKETING A. Insulating Lagging Canvas: 8oz. /sq. ft. minimum, 28 threads per inch minimum, Osnaberg or equal. B. Lagging Adhesive: Plastic synthetic resin emulsion adhesive; watertight, mildew resistant, fire retardant; Miracle LA69, Borden Aerobol or equal. A. Material shall be minimum .016" thick aluminum jacket or vinalum .020" thick aluminum faced PVC jacket with integral factory applied vapor barrier. 15180 - 3 B. Elbows, fitting and valves shall be metal prefonned fitting covers (no gores acceptable). Valves made from M20 metal. All valves ends and where insulation reduces shall have Pittsburgh seams. 1. All straight line metal to be Z- locked jacket held in place with 3/4" wide aluminum bands at nine inches (9 ") on center with wing seals. C. All joints and seams shall be watertight with Childers Chil -Joint Cp -70. D. Manufacturer: "Strap -On" Childer Cawed Systems or equal. 2.06 COATINGS A. All coating to bear the UL label. B. On cold or dual service lines, use vapor barrier type coatings. 2.07 METAL SHIELDS A. Metal Shields curved to fit it to midpoint of the insulated pipe. B. Metal shields shall be 16 gauge, twelve inches (12 ") long for pipes up to two inches (2 ") and 14 gauge, sixteen inches (16 ") long for piping 2 -1/2" and larger. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION AND WORKING CONDITIONS A. Apply all insulation, fitting covers, mastics and sealants per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not apply insulation materials until all surfaces to be covered area clean and dry and all foreign materials such as rust, dirt, etc., is removed. C. Keep insulation clean and dry during installation and during the application of any finish. D. Do not install the insulation on pipe fittings, and pipe joints until the piping is tested and approved. E. Do not apply under conditions of excessive humidity or at temperatures below 50 F or above 100 F. 3.02 TECHNIQUE FOR APPLICATION TO PIPES A. Close longitudinal joints of pipe insulation firmly and butt insulation sections firmly together. B. Neatly and smoothly adhere all laps and butt strips. Adhere three inch (3 ") wide self - sealing butt joint strips over end joints. C. Replace all insulation having loose joints or laps. Sloppy work will not be acceptable and such work shall be removed and re- applied. D. Provide 1/2" over the thickness of insulation specified at all insulated piping in outside walls. E. Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, it shall be sealed. Ends shall not be left raw. F. On water piping use sheet metal shields outside the insulation at hanger locations. In addition, provide: A molded vegetable cork or foam glass insert not less than twelve inches (12 ") long of same thickness and contour as insulation between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 15180 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Heavy density insulation minimum six (6) pounds per cubic foot under entire length of metal shield. G. Where piping and fittings are installed out of doors, provide two -layer glass cloth and four -layer weatherproof vapor barrier adhesive coating, in addition to jacket specified vapor barrier jacket, cover with metal or vinalum jacket with seams located c i bottom side of horizontal piping. 3.03 TECHNIQUE FOR APPLICATION TO PIPE FITTINGS, UNIONS AND VALVES A. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittir••as, unions, valves and flanges including Victaulic and Gustin -Bacon to the same thickness as the pipe insulation. B. Any of the following methods of insulation is acceptable: 1. PVC Snap Form Fitting Covers: Wrap all valves and fittings with precut fiberglass insulation wraparound inserts. Brush vapor barrier mastic on adjoining section of pipe insulation and on overlapping edges of jacket and throat seam before applying preformed fitting. Secure cover with stainless steel tacks. Tape joints with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape. 2. Blanket Wrap: Wrap the fitting with compressed glass fiber blanket. Wire the blanket securely in place, then cover with a smooth layer of insulating/finishing cement. Cover with glass mesh tape, adhering it with an adhesive coating. 3. Fabricated Segments: Cut mitered segments from pipe insulation that has the same wall thickness as adjacent pipe insulation, to form a cover which will fit snugly around the fitting. Wire the segments firmly in place and seal the joints with insulating/finishing cement. Apply adhesive coating and wrap with glass mesh tape. then apply another layer of the same coating over the whole assembly. 4. Cement: Apply insulating finishing cement, molding it to the contour of the fitting. When area is large, apply an under layer of cement, wrap this with glass mesh tape, then apply an outer layer of cement. If the insulation is not concealed, the exposed surface of insulating/ finishing cement is to have a final glass mesh tape wrap embedded in adhesive. C. In each of the listed methods, to protect the insulation against contact damage, apply an adhesive coating when the cement is completely dry and hard, then wrap with glass mesh tape. Apply another coating of adhesive over the whole assembly. 3.04 TECHNIQUE FOR APPLICATION TO DUCTWORK Impaling Over Pins: Install all insulation with edges tiglaly butted. Impale insulation on pins welded to the duct and secure with speed clips. Trim off pins close to speed clip. Space pins as required to hold insulation firmly against duct surface, but not less than one pin per square foot. Seal all joints and speed clips with glass fabric set in_adbesive. Provide metal angle at comers to protect edges of insulation. B. Other Method of Securement: If the welded pin method is impossible, secure the insulation to the duct with adhesive. Cover the entire surface of the metal with adhesive when applying to the underside of horizontal ducts. Application to top and sides may be in strips with a minimum of 50% coverage. Additionally, secure insulation with No. 16 galvanized wire on not more than twelve inch (12 ") centers. Provide metal angle at corners to protect edges of insulation. Seal joints as above. 3.05 COLD PIPING INSULATION A. Insulate piping for domestic cold water, using one inch .1") Type "A" insulation. B. Provide a complete vapor barrier throughout the entire system. Use only vapor barrier adhesives and coatings. Stapling of jacket not permitted. Penetrations in vapor barrier jacket, joints, and seams sealed vapor proof with Childers CP -30 (white) mastic. 15180 - 5 C. Cover ends of insulation sections with an adhesive coating at intervals of not more than twenty feet (20'). Insulate accessories, valves, flanges, etc. D. Cover insulation on fittings with spiral - wrapped glass mesh tape. Finish with a vapor barrier coating applied approximately 1/16" thick. E. Insulate all horizontal runs at primary and overflow roof drain rain leader piping from bottom of roof deck to include roof drain body, to one foot (1') past tum down fitting in vertical direction. Vertical ram leaders need not be insulated when concealed, routed inside wall cavity. 3.06 HOT PIPING INSULATION A. Insulate domestic heating hot water, and circulating lines using Type "A" insulation one inch (1") thickness for 1/2" to one inch (1 ") piping, 1 -1/2" thickness for 1 -1/4" to two inch (2 ") piping and two inch (2 ") thickness for 2 -1/2" to six inch (6 ") piping. B. Staples may be used to seal jacket. C. Insulate unions, valves and flanges in boiler room only for piping over 140 F. Insulate with same method used for cold pipe fittings, except vapor barrier mastic is not required. D. Do not insulate valves, flanges, and unions for domestic hot water piping systems below 140 F, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations, E. Insulate hot water expansion tank and air separators with one inch (1 ") Armaflex sheet type insulation. 3.07 SPECIAL PIPING INSULATION REQUIREMENTS A. Insulate buried domestic cold water lines under building with 3/4" Type "B" insulation. Bond joints using an adhesive; apply surface treatment as recommended by insulation manufacturer, taping not permitted. Set in sand bed and cover with minimum five inches (5 ") sand. B. Insulate all refrigerant piping for heat pump systems and suction lines only for all other systems with Type "B" insulation: 1/2" thickness for piping up to 1" and 3/4" thickness for piping larger than one inch (1"), apply per manufacturer's recommendations. Glue all joints and seams with Armstrong 520 Adhesive. Protect all insulation on piping outside with two (2) coats of "WB" Armaflex Finish Coating for weather protection. C. Insulate all exposed p -traps and water connections for handicapped lavatories with "Handi Lav- Guard" Insulation Kit (203- 875- 2868). D. Insulate p -trap of all floor drains and deep seal traps above the first floor that receive condensate. Insulate with 3/4" thick Type `B" insulation. E. Insulate chilled water expansion tank & air separator with one inch (1 ") Armaflex sheet type insulation. 3.08 DUCT INSULATION REQUIREMENTS A. Insulate ducts as follows: 1. Thickness and type: a. Exhaust air: Extemally wrap with Type "C" insulation; insulate from roof deck/wall exterior back three feet (3') into space. b. Supply air: Externally wrapped with Type "C" insulation. c. Return air: Externally wrapped with Type "C" insulation, unless specifically noted otherwise. 15180 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 d. Outside Air: Externally wrapped with Type "C" insulation. 3.09 CONDENSATE PIPING INSULATION A. PVC piping to be insulated with Type "B" insulation 1/2" thick. Insulate pipe from unit connection to a point six feet (6') downstream of trap. Glue all joints. 13. Condensate piping to be insulated with Type "B" insulation 1 /2" thick. Entire condensate system to be insulated when copper pipe is used. 3.10 CHILLED WATER PIPING INSULATION Apply per manufacturer's recommendations. Glue all joints and seams with Armstrong 520 Adhesive. No tape will be allowed. Auxiliary condensate not required to be insulated. A. Insulate chilled water piping using Type "A" insulation. One inch (1") thickness up to two inch (2 ") piping and 1 -1/2" insulation from 2 -1/2" to ten inch (10 ") piping. B. Chilled water piping outdoors: 1. Piping to be pre - insulated type with two inch (2 ") foam -in -place polyurethane. Reference Section 2.07. 2. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. C. All hangers to be installed on the outside of the insulation and shall not be in contact with the pipe. Use metal shields between the insulation jacket and the hanger. Provide heavy density insulation or cork inserts at shields. D. Insulate all fittings with one (1) piece pre - molded PVC insulation fittings with insulation inserts to same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. E. Maintain complete vapor barrier throughout system. Seal all jacket penetrations, seams, edges, and joints with vapor proof mastic. 3.11 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATION SCHEDULE Insulation Jacket System J,ocation Type Tie Size Thickness Remarks Domestic Cold Water Indoors B - - -- All 1/2" 1. Outdoors B All I" Domestic Hot Water Indoors B - - -- All 1" Condensate Waste Indoors 13 All 3/4" Chilled Water Indoors H PVC <2" 1" 2 1/2 "+ 1 1/2" Outdoors H Metal <_2" 11/2" 2 1/2 "+ 2" Hot Water Indoors G PVC 52" 2" 2 1/2 "+ 21/2" Outdoors G Metal 52" 2 1/2" 21/2 "+ 3" 15180 -7 2. Cold Vessels Indoors J PVC All 1" Hot Vessels Indoors E PVC All 1" Hot Water Pumps Indoors 13 - - -- All 1" Remarks: 1. For first 20 feet from building entry. 2. Above grade. 3.12 DUCT SYSTEMS APPLICATION SCHEDULE System J.ocatinn Insulation Remarks Supply Air Indoor Type C Concealed only Return Air Indoor Type C Concealed only Exhaust Air -Low Temp Indoor Type C Where required Exhaust Air -above 120 ° F Indoor Type E 1. Exhaust Air -above 120 ° F Outdoor Type E 2. Notes: 1. Duct exposed below ceiling shall be in smooth 304SS jacket with metal edge seals, no sealant. Duct from that point to just below roof shall be in aluminum or galvanized jacket. Terminate insulation and jacket just below roof. 2. Duct exposed from above roof to fan flexible connector shall be in metal jacket. END OF SECTION 15180 -8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 W /WW Lab -RR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 15190 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION. BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. This section describes general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill, and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the structure. B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of every description and of whatever substance encountered to the depth indicated, or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawings. Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material. Compact backfill material. C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES A. Local Codes and Ordinances B. Texas Safety Standards C. OSHA - Section 1926.650 1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91 -696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of the provisions of this Act. In addition, on projects in which trench excavation will exceed a depth of five feet, the contractor and all of its subcontractors shall comply with all requirements of 29 C.F.R. Secs. 1926.652 and 1926.653, OSHA Safety and Health Standards. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maximum aggregate size passing a two inch (2 ") sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. C. For plastic and copper piping, bed pipe and surround for 2" in all directions, with washed sand free of stones. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL 15190 - 1 A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches (4 "). PART 3- EXECUTJON 3.01 EXCAVATION 3.04 TIMING A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner, and in conformance with safety codes. B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling. C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DEWATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. A. Do to backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested, inspected and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others, and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under, around, and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and to provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12" depth before adding other backfill. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade, or as shown MI the drawings. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95% of maximum density, taking care not to damage the pipe. 15190 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Compact all backfill under footings, slabs, and other structures to 95% of maximum density or more, if required by the Architect. C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlement, and at least 85% of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to prevent pipe damage. 3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations. B. Mininvze number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls. C. Support footings, foundations, and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible chance of damage, and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage. D. Backfill under footings and bearing walls, using maximum compaction or concrete of proportions as specified for footings. E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services, foundations, cables, conduit lines or foundations. Repair any existing underground work accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 UNDER EXISTING SLAB INSTALLATION A. When breaking out an existing floor slab, make a saw cut and remove concrete. When repouring concrete, compact the fill to the same specifications as the building fill. Re: Architectural/Structural. END OF SECTION 15190 - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W /WW Lab -RR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: PART 2- 1'RODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION 1. Section 15010 - General Provisions 2. Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Method_. 3. Division 2 - Site Work SECTION 15191 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION B. Description: This section described general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill, and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings. The arbitrary line of demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5' outside the building perimeter. C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91 -696. 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET, THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653, OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. D. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. maximum aggregate size passing a 2" sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. C. For plastic piping, bed pipe and surround for 2" in all directions, with sand free of stones. A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation If sufficient suitable trench backfill material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. maximum aggregate size 4 inches. A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings. B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner and in conformance with safety codes. 15191 - 1 C. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling. D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade, fill to required depth with granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DE- WATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested, inspected, and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under, around, and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and to provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6" depth before adding other backfill. D. Cover water line with 18" bedding material before backfilling. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade, or as shown on the drawing. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95% of maximum density, taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement- or at least to 90% of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Restore all surface areas to original conditions, or improve as shown on the drawings. Replace all paving, base course, gravel surfacing, sub -base, topsoil. or other existing finished surface as shown on drawings. C. Clean up and finish all construction areas to original condition or better. 15191 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 15400 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes specific requirements, products. and methods of execution relating to the domestic water distribution system for the project. B. The work of this section includes: All water distribution work inside the structure, and all outside distribution work up to and including connection to the water source, including provision of the outside water source, or water using apparatus, although the work of this section does include the interface connections at all of these related items. C. SPECIAL NOTE.' All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 CONNECTION TO UTILITY WATER SYSTEM A. Coordinate with site utilities to properly locate and interface with the water supply. Stub water 5' -0" outside the building and make connection to water supply. See Civil Drawing for site utility locations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID COPPER TUBING, 1/2" - 2 1/2" A. Pipe: Type "L" hard drawn copper. B. Fittings: Cast or wrought copper or brass. C. Joints: Sweat type, high temperature lead free solder. Threaded with union or flange at equipment connections. 2.02 CONTINUOUS COPPER TUBING, 1/2" - 2" A. Pipe: Type "K" soft drawn copper. B. Fittings: None below slab or grade. C. Joints: None below slab or grade. 2.03 STEEL, 4" AND LARGER A. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel. B. Fittings: 1. Threaded Schedule 40 galvanized malleable iron. 2. Galvanized steel Victaulic. C. Joints: Threaded with Teflon tape only, 15400 - 1 2. Rigid type 77 Victaulic couplings. 2.04 WATER METER A. Refer to Civil Drawings. 2.05 VALVES A. Refer to Section 15050. 2.06 TEMPERING VALVES PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL METHODS A. Make all joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The tools used shall be the tools adapted to that specific purpose. B. At all fixtures, install and connect hot water on left and cold water on right, as viewed when facing the fixture. C. Where required for connections to fixtures, equipment items, etc., employ lengths of red brass pipe with threaded ends of copper to IPS adapters, brass couplings, etc., to the end that there shall be no ferrous pipe in any water piping system. D. Provide valves on each branch line at the point of connection into the supply and circulating mains serving all batteries of plumbing fixtures. Provide stop valves in each water supply for every plumbing fixture. E. Provide air chambers minimum 18" long, same size as supply line or 3/4" minimum or PDI rated water hammer arresters with accessible isolation valve equal to Wade Shok -stops or Sioux Chief Water Hammer Arresters on cold water and hot water supplies to plumbing fixtures. Provide access door for all concealed arresters. Shok -stops shall not be installed in the pendant position. F. Install vacuum breakers on all plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur and on boiler make -up lines and hose bibbs. G. No pipe dope shall be employed upstream of flush valves and other control devices. 3.02 TESTING A. Test all water piping hydrostatically at 80 psig for a period of 6 hours. Observe piping during this period and repair all leaks. Protect vessels, relief valves, and other devices during test. B. Notify Engineer 24 hours before test. 3.03 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. Sterilize each unit of completed supply line and distribution system with chlorine before acceptance for domestic operation, or connection to supply. B. Accomplish sterilization as described below or by the system prescribed by the American Water Works Association Standard C -601. Apply the amount of chlorine to provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Provide chlorine manufactured in conformance to the following standards: Liquid Chlorine: Federal Specification BB -C -120. 2. Hypochlorite: Federal Specification 0- C -114a. Type 11, Grade B, or Federal Specification 0 -X -602. 15400 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. The sterilization process shall be done by persons whose major business is water treatment and sterilization. Pay all costs and charges associated to this test and certification. F. Certify in writing that sterilization has been completed in accordance with these requirements. 3.04 PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULE SYSTEM PIPF/FITTINGS JOINTS NOTFS Notes: C. Introduce the chlorinating material to the water lines and distribution system after piping system has been thoroughly flushed. After a contract period of not less than 24 hours, flush the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 part per million. D. Open and close all valves in the lines being sterilized several times during above chlorination. Hot and cold water Rigid Copper Sweat above slab or grade to 2 1/2" Hot and cold water Continuous Copper None (1) below slab to 2" Cold water above slab or grade, Steel A. Threaded 4" and larger B. Victaulic I) Includes work below grade, within a plan envelope 5' 0" outside the building envelope. Where PVC with solvent welded or mechanical joints is locally approved for water below grade, and is employed for site utility work, that piping may be continued from the 5' 0" point up to 6" above finished grade, and there be connected to the "above slab" piping material with a suitable flanged or union connection. END OF SECTION 15400 - 3 W /WW Lab -RR SECTION 15405 LIQUID WASTE TRANSFER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Description 1. This section describes specific requirements. products, and methods of execution relating to the transfer of liquid waste for the project_ The work of this section includes providing the following piped systems: a. Sanitary waste and vent. b. Storm and overflow. c. Indirect waste drain, vent and relief for plumbing equipment. d. Indirect waste drain, vent and relief not provided for project equipment in other Sections. B. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 CONNECTION TO UTILITY SEWER AND STORM SYSTEMS B. Final wastewater connection point to extend approximately five feet (5') outside the building, as indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with Civil Drawings for wastewater service point to within five feet (5') of the building. Coordinate with site utilities to insure proper inverts for all lines and connection point prior to installation. Contact Architect immediately if any conflict is discovered. Make final connection to service line. I 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CAST IRON PIPE WITH CAULKED JOINTS, 2" - 10" A. Pipe: Cast iron, service weight with hub and spigot joints. B. Fittings: Drainage pattern. C. Joints: Caulk with white oakum and lead. 2.02 CAST IRON PIPE WITH COUPLED JOINTS, 1 1/2" - 10" A. Pipe: Cast iron, service weight, with plain ends. B. Fittings: Drainage pattern. C. Joints: Tyler no -hub or Clamp -all couplings with Neoprene sleeve and stainless steel clamp and shield, Type 304. 2.03 CAST IRON PIPE WITH GASKETED JOINTS, 2" - 15" A. Pipe: Cast iron, service weight with hub spigot joint. B. Fittings: Drainage pattern. C. Joints: Tyler Ty -seal neoprene gaskets. 15405 - 1 2.04 CAST IRON PIPE WITH LOW PRESSURE JOINTS, 1 1/2" - 10" A. Pipe: Cast iron, service weight, with plain ends. B. Fittings: Drainage pattem. C. Joints: Clamp -all HI -TORQ 125 couplings with neoprene sleeve, Type 304 stainless steel clamp and shield, 15 prig FM working pressure rating. 2.05 PVC DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, Type 1, Grade 1120, per ASTM D -1784 with hole and spigot joints. B. Fittings: Drainage pattem. C. Joints: Solvent weld. 2.06 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS A. Copper or brass DWV piping, smaller than 2 ", for above grade use. Chrome plated if exposed. B. PVC where concealed and connected to PVC waste system. 2.07 STEEL A. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel. B. Fittings: Schedule 40 galvanized malleable iron, or galvanized Victaulic. C. Joints: Threaded or Victaulic Type 77 rigid coupling. 2.08 COPPER DRAIN A. Pipe: Copper, Type M (DWV). B. Fittings: Wrought or cast copper. C. Joints: Soldered. 2.09 COPPER PRESSURE A. Pipe: Copper, Type L. B. Fittings: Wrought or cast copper. C. Joints: Silver brazed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING A. Install pipe and fittings to required grade with hubs and bottom half section in undisturbed soil. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Refer to Section 15050. 15405 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.03 GRADING A. Grade all horizontal runs of pipe in building and under floor slab at 1/4" per foot downward in direction of flow. If it is absolutely impossible to maintain a grade of 1/4" per foot, piping four (4) inches in diameter and larger may slope to a minimum grade of not less than 1/8" per foot. 3.04 SUPPORTING A. Support all horizontal runs of pipe in building at intervals not to exceed 5' -0" and at each change of direction. Provide a support at the base of vertical risers with intermediate supports as required. Brace all adequately to prevent motion, per manufacturer's recommendation. 3.05 CLEANOUT TEES A. Provide cleanout tees as shown on plans and in an accessible location at base of all risers in soil, waste and drain piping and at each change in direction in horizontal runs of pipe. In long straight runs, provide a cleanout at every 75 feet (maximum) for piping four inches (4 ") and larger and at a maximum of every 50 feet for piping less than four inches (4 "). 3.06 VENTING A. Provide a vent for each trap and as shown on the drawings. B. Extend each vent vertically to a point not less than six inches (6 ") above the extreme overflow level of the fixture served before offsetting horizontally. Whenever two or more vent pipes converge, extend each such pipe at least six inches (6 ") in height above the flood rim level of the plumbing fixture it serves before being connected to any other vent and utilize only approved drainage fittings and materials to connect piping. C. Provide a building main relief vent for waste piping not provided venting by fixture branch connections. Vent size shall be per code requirement, based upon fixture unit loading in the pipe vented. 3.07 VENTS THROUGH ROOF A. Extend vents through the roof a minimum distance of 6" and terminate at least 15 ft. horizontally from operable windows, doors, or air intakes, and at least 3 feet above such opening. Do not terminate vents through roof at edge, ridge, or valley of roof. Secure vent below roof surface. B. Flash and counterflash vents through roof. Provide flashings not less than 18" square, with prefabricated 4 -pound lead counterflashing. Extend vertical portion of flashing up entire length of pipe and turn down inside the pipe at least 1 inch with turned edge hammered against pipe. Coordinate with type roof and Architectural details and flash them into roof according to the roofmg products manufacturer's recommendations. C. Protect the roof from tools and equipment. Remove all scraps on roof to prevent damage to roof. 3.08 GENERAL A. No piping shall be p.,.manently concealed before the examination is completed by the authorities having jurisdiction. B. All fixtures used in conjunction with the conveying of waste substance shall be connected by means of a trap. C. All connections for floor mounted water closets and waste piping shall be made with appropriate closet flange and wax gaskets. 3.09 TESTING A. Test all piping in accordance with the requirements of the applicable codes. 15405 - 3 B. Repair leaks and retest system, repeating this process until piping system is free of leaks. C. Test shall be conducted and completed before any joints are concealed or made inaccessible. D. Maintain a log of tests indicating date, time, result of test, person doing test, and observers. E. Notify Engineer 24 hours prior to test. 3.10 INDIRECT WASTE PIPING A. Indirect waste provided under other Sections: I. HVAC condensate. B. Final connection to Owner's Equipment shall be under Division 15. Notes: C. Route condensate drain line from plumbing equipment requiring drainage to nearest floor drain or disposal point. Coordinate locations and sizes with equipment actually furnished. Slope all piping to drain at minimum 1/8" per foot. Minimum size of dram shall not be smaller than drain outlet size for unit. D. Coordinate mounting heights of units to allow adequate slope for piping to disposal point. E. Provide cleanout plug at end of each main run. 3.11 PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULE SPEC WRITER NOTE: Not for high rise buildings. Select what applies SYSTEM PIPE/FITTINGS JOINTS NOTES Inside Building Gravity waste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked 5, 1, 4 above slab B. Cast Iron Coupled C. PVC Sch. 40 Solvent Weld 2, 5 Gravity waste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked below slab B. Cast Iron Gasketed 5 C. PVC Sch. 40 Solvent Weld 2, 5 Gravity waste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked below grade B. Cast Iron Gasketed 5 C. PVC Sch. 40 Solvent Weld 2, 5 Condensate drain A. Copper drain Soft solder B. PVC Sch. 80 Threaded C. Steel Threaded Relief A. Copper pressure Silver braze B. Steel Threaded OO tsi�ild Gravity waste and vent A. Cast Iron Caulked below grade B. Cast Iron Gasketed C. PVC Sch. 40 Solvent Weld 2 1) "Inside building" includes work within plan envelope 5' 0" from outside edge of building envelope. 2) Plastic only if allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. Plastic shall not be used in return air plenums, nor in opentop chases connected to plenums. 3) Couplings exposed to moisture shall be galvanized. 15405 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4) Pressure pattern fittings may be used on vent piping which is 6" above the flood rim of the highest fixture vented to a vent terminal if allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. 5) For sanitary waste piping receiving waste potentially above 120 degree F, neoprene gaskets and couplings are not permitted. If waste is above 140 degree F, PVC is not permitted. "Potentially" includes occasional use such as boiler and water heater drain, blowdown and relief valves, as well as regular use such as dishwasher and laundry drains. "Not permitted" means not permitted in any waste and vent connected to a common vent terminal and/or common building sewer with the drain receiving high temperature waste, and extending upward 6" above the flood rim of the drain and downward to the utility sewer connection. 6) See text. END OF SECTION 15405 - 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 15440 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes plumbing equipment and related work. B. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER A. Pre - wired. factory tested, NSF certified and with UL seal of approval. B. Tank: Glass lined and ASME approved for 150 psi working pressure with a minimum of 2" of high density foam insulation; Anode rods for electrolytic protection and hand hole inspection port. C. The complete system to be protected by energy cut off switches in the event of an over temperature situation. D. Manufacturer: State, PVI, A.O. Smith, Rheem, or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 RELIEF A. Provide ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. B. Pipe full size sloped to drain. Secure piping to prevent flow hammer. C. Direct outflow vertically down into drain receptor, maintaining required air gap, but not more than 6" above the drain rim. Arrange drain surface so relief does not splash out of receptor. 3.02 HEAT TRAP A. Arrange heat trap on cold water entry to heaters to protect vacuum breaker from heat and prevent heat loss to cold water riser. END OF SECTION 15440 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included I'ART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAINS 1. This section describes certain components of domestic plumbing systems, including related specific requirements, products and methods of execution. Plumbing water, waste and vent piping, and other primary distribution components of the plumbing system are included with related work specified elsewhere. B. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. A. All floor drains to be the same size as waste line size indicated on plans. If size not indicated, drain size shall be 3 ". Provide trap primer for each floor and hub drain unless noted otherwise. FD - (General Purpose): C.I. body, flashing collar, weepholes, adjustable satin nickel bronze square top (6" x 6 "). Josam 30000 -S Series. FD - (General Purpose): C.I. body, flashing collar, weepholes, adjustable satin nickel bronze round top (6" diameter). Josam 30000 -A Series. HD - (Hub Drain): C.I. body, round strainer with satin bronze finish. Josam 30000 -El Series. B. Manufacturer's: Josam, Wade, Zum, J.R. Smith. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be same nominal size of pipe lines up to four inches (4 ") and not less than four inches (4 ") for larger lines. B. Floor Cleanouts: Gas and watertight seal, internal taper ABS cleanout plug, satin nickel bronze finish scoriated.round top with countersunk screw„for installation flush with finish floor. In carpeted areas, provide carpet ring. Josam 56000 Series. C. Wall Cleanouts: Countersunk plugs, with smooth round or square access cover, polished stainless steel. D. Manufacturer's: Josam, Zuni, Wade, approved equal. 2.03 FIXTURES A. The fixtures are chosen from standard manufacturers. B. Provide all similar fixtures and trim from one (I) manufacturer, except where specified otherwise. C. Acceptable Manufacturer's: 1. Fixtures: American Standard, Crane, Eljer. Kohler, Oasis, Elkay, Universal Runde!. 15450 - 1 2.04 TRAPS, STOPS AND SUPPLIES A. Provide traps, stops and supplies for all fixtures. B. P- Traps: 17 gauge chrome- plated cast brass. Trap adapters shall be slip joint. C. Supplies: Flexible, chrome- plated, 7538 Series. D. Stops: Removable key type, 2302 Series. E. Acceptable Manufacturer's: American Standard, Brass Craft, McGuire. 2.06 Povide air chambers minimum eighteen inches (18 ") m length or PDI rated water hammer arresters equal to Wade Shok -Stops on cold water and hot water supplies to plumbing fixtures. Provide access door for all concealed arresters. 2.07 Fixtures Specified under other Divisions. Provide appropriate strainer, tailpiece, trap, waste and supplies. Rough -in and connect only. 2.08 No lead materials shall be used in construction of fixtures used in potable water systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Store all fixtures and trim above ground in a covered location not subject to accidental damage by traffic or other construction activities. Handle fixtures and trim carefully to avoid chipping, denting, scratching, or other damage. Replace damaged items with same item in new condition. 3.02 Provide permanent metal and wire positioners, supports and fixture carriers to secure fixtures and piping rigidly in proper alignment without sway or sideplay. 3.03 Anchor all fixtures securely to withstand applied vertical load of not less than 250 pounds on the front of the fixture, without noticeable movement. 3.04 Fixture setting: 2. FaucetsAmerican Standard, Moen, Bradley, Elkay, Chicago, Eljer, Kohler, T & S Brass. 3. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Bradley, Just. 4. Carriers: J.R. Smith, Josam, Zum. 5. Flush Valves: Sloan, Delaney. 6. Mixing Valves: Powers, Leonard, Symmons. A. At existing finishes: Install all fixtures plumb, level and flush to the finished Architectural surface, so that the maximum gap between the fixture and the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch. Grout under water closets to level fixtures. Caulk the edge of the joint between fixture and surface with silicone or butyl type waterproof caulking compound. B. At new finishes: Verify that fixture fits plumb, level and flush to the finished surface. Do not use grout to level fixtures. Caulk the edge of the joint between fixture and surface with silicone or butyl type waterproof caulking compound. 3.05 Adjust all functional components for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise directed. 3.06 Clean all fixtures and trim thoroughly to spotlessly clean condition. Obtain a written certification from the Architect that this has been accomplished. 3.07 Where floor drains or janitor sinks are located over any room, provide waterproof installation. 3.08 Ensure final location of cleanouts have ample clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. Check locations before installation. Contact Architect for alternate location if maintenance clearance is a problem. Cleanouts to be moved at no additional cost to Owner for failure to coordinate locations. 15450 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.09 Coordinate slope of floors to floor drains. Adjust height of floor drain grate top so it is slightly below the adjacent finished floor. 3.10 Provide all adapters, flanges, gaskets, etc. as required for proper installation of fixtures. Coordinate fixture placement before core drilling of floor or sleeve installation. 3.11 No offset flanges will be allowed for installation of water closets. END OF SECTION 15450 - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 15600 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT D - X SYSTEMS A. This section describes specific requirements, products, and methods and execution relating to the D -X mechanical equipment for the project. B. Provide complete operating installation for all systems shown and specified. Air handling unit and condensing unit shall be from single manufacturer. C. The manufacturer is to provide wiring diagrams for specific equipment to the Controls Contractor for proper coordination. D. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2- PRODUCT 2.01 AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Air handler shall be a factory assembled unit, UL listed with blower, heaters, steel casing, and completely wired. Air handler and coil section may be bolted together in field but must be a mated pair from a single manufacturer. B. Cabinet: 1. At least 22 gauge cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish. Interior of cabinet around electric heating elements shall be lined with 1/2 inch thick 1 1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation. Filter access panel shall have quick access latches (screw type fasteners not acceptable). 2. Internal drain pan (factory installed). C. Blower: 1. Centrifugal type, dynamically and statically balanced. 2. Direct driven multi-speed blower, factory installed with at least three blower speeds. D. Heaters: Nickel - chromium staged elements (over 5 kw) with 5 year warranty. Element sequenced on. 2. Each set of heaters shall be equipped with limit control with fixed temperature "OFF" setting and automatic reset with supplemental thermal cut -off safety fuses. 3. Provide fan time -delay relay and circuit breakers. Air handler shall have manually reset transformer. E. Cooling Coil: 1. Factory leak- tested, dehydrated, sealed and shipped with holding charge. 15600 - 1 2. Coil installed in baked on enamel finish insulated casing. 3. Staggered row copper tube, aluminum fins. 4. Coils to be ARI certified. 5. Provide with thermal expansion valve. F. Filter: 1. One inch (1 ") thick throw -away type as furnished by air handler Manufacturer, G. Electrical: 1. All units provided for single electrical connection point. H. Approved Manufacturer's: Trane, Carrier, Lennox or York. 2.02 CONDENSING UNITS/HEAT PUMPS A. Condenser coil shall have copper tubes with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded. B. Fans shall be direct driven propeller upflow type. 1. Fan motor thermostatically controlled, permanently lubricated, and designed with permanent protection. 2. Motors shall be resiliently mounted. 3. Each fan shall have a safety guard. C. Unit shall be capable of operation in the cooling mode down to a minimum of 45 unless otherwise noted. D. Compressor shall be of hermetic design with the following features. Each condensing unit shall have one (1) compressor. E. Controls: 1. Factory wired and located in separate enclosure. 2. High and low pressure cutout and condenser fan motor overload devices. 3. Off-cycle timer to prevent short- cycling of compressor and shall prevent compressor from restarting for 5 minutes if power is interrupted. F. Casing: 1. Externally mounted brass service valves with charging connections. 2. Crankcase heater (except on scroll compressor). 3. Resilient rubber mounts. 4. Compressor motor overload protection. ._... 4. Heat pump unit shall be supplied with outdoor air thermostat that will not allow simultaneous operation of compressor and heater. Set adjustable thermostat at 25 F. Fully weatherproof for outdoor installation. Baked -on enamel finish on all exterior surfaces. 15600 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Openings shall be provided for power and refrigerant connections. 3. Panels shall be removable for servicing. G. Provide charging valves for each unit. H. Thermostat: 1. Programmable Honeywell T7300 or T7400 as required. I. Manufacturer's: Trane, Carrier, Lennox or York. 2.03 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM A. Furnish and install refrigeration system complete as a system with all refrigerant, oil, valves, dehydrators, gauges, flex connections, and controls as required for proper operation. B. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM B 280 -83, "Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service ". C. Refrigerant Fittings: 1. Wrought hard temper Type "L" copper with long radius elbows. 2. Approved Manufacturer's: a. Mueller Streamline b. Engineer approved equal. D. Suction Line Traps: 1. Manufactured with one (1) 90 short radius elbow and two (2) 45 fittings. E. Connection Material: For Brazing- - a. Sil -Phos or Easy Flow (minimum 10% silver content). F. Expansion Valves: 1. Provide thermal expansion valve for each system. 2. Size valves to provide full rated capacity of cooling coil served. G. Filter -Drier: 1. On lines 3/4" outside diameter and larger. filter -drier shall be replaceable core type with non - ferrous casing and Schraeder type valve. 2. On lines smaller than 3/4" outside diameter, filter -drier shall be a sealed type using sweat copper fittings. Size shall be full line size. 4. If liquid line filter drier comes as and integral part of the condensing unit, additional filter driers shall not be installed. 5. Manufacturer's: Mueller, Alco, Sporlan. 15600 - 3 H. Sight Glass: 1. Combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap. 2. Sight glass shall be full line size. 3. Sight glass connections shall be solid copper or brass. 4. Required for each system utilizing expansion valve. 5. Manufacturer's: Mueller, Alco. Sporlan. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.02 LIQUID LINE 3.03 SUCTION LINE Manual Refrigerant Shut -Off Valve: 1. Ball valves designed for refrigeration service and full line size. 2. Valve shall have cap seals. 3. Valves with hand wheels are not acceptable. 4. Provide service valve on each liquid and suction line at compressor. 5. If service valves come as integral part of condensing unit, additional service valves shall not be installed. 6. Manufacturer's: Mueller, Superior 3.01 Refrigerant piping shall be installed by licensed refrigeration Contractor. Size per Manufacturers recommendation for length encountered. Submit isometric drawing from the manufacturer indicating routing, sizes and velocity in piping and pressure drop in piping. Provide minimum four inch (4 ") diameter PVC sleeves as required for each refrigerant line set located under slab and through walls. Use 22 1/2 sleeve fittings for all underslab installation. Seal watertight top of PVC sleeves as they penetrate grade. A. Install moisture indicator /sight glass at each condensing unit. B. Install properly sized filter -drier "in -line" type at each condensing unit if unit is not supplied with one. If unit is a heat pump, use bi -flow type drier. C. All valves, driers and indicators to be full line size and have sweat fittings. D. Maximum pressure drop in line shall be 10 psig. Size per manufacturer's written instructions. E. Insulate portion of liquid line exposed to direct sunlight. A. Every coil shall be trapped when vertical rise is more than five feet (5') . When the compressor is below the evaporator, provide a trap in the suction line by coil, raise line to a point above coil and slope suction Line down to compressor from that point. Trap shall be made up of one (1) short radius 90 and two (2) 45 fittings. For heat pumps, all horizontal vapor lines should be level. B. All rises in suction lines returning to compressor shall be trapped. Use double suction risers where necessary. All risers must maintain a minimum of 1000 fpm and a maximum of 3000 fpm. Line sized for a maximum of 3 psig pressure drop in system. Size per manufacturer's written instructions. 15600 - 4 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Insulate all suction lines, including the thermal bulb, from the thermal expansion valve. See insulation section for type and thickness. D. Slope suction lines down toward compressor one inch (1 ') /ten feet (10) or as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 The length of refrigerant line runs shall be kept as short as possible. It is preferred that they not exceed seventy feet (70) in running length, but in no one case should they exceed the cooling equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 All condensing units above roof shall have neoprene vibration isolation pads mounted under each corner and sized per manufacturer's recommendations. Secure unit to support and support to structure. 3.06 Circulate dry nitrogen throughout system during welding or brazing process. 3.07 Test all refrigerant piping and repair all leaks. Pressure test with dry nitrogen; use pressure reducing valve to limit pressure to 150 psig. After testing, evacuate and fully charge system with refrigerant per manufacturer's written instructions. Submit manufacturer's evacuation procedures with submittal. 3.08 General Contractor to provide level concrete pad for all condensing units/heat pump units. Verify actual size with equipment. 3.09 Pack fiberglass insulation and sealing material, such as permagum, around refrigerant lines where they penetrate exterior building envelope. 3.10 VIBRATION ISOLATOR A. Provide vibration isolation at each air handling unit. Vibration isolators are to be rubber in shear type. Isolators are to be sized for actual equipment purchased. B. Manufacturer's: Amber Booth, Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc., or equal. END OF SECTION 15600 - 5 WrWW Lab -RR SECTION 15810 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Description: This section describes specific requirements, products and methods of execution relating to the project air distribution systems. B. Provide all air distribution systems as shown and specified, complete in every detail, and in perfect operating order. C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of theses specifications. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 Provide all air distribution work in accordance with the minimum provisions of the latest approved editions of the following codes and standards. A. NFPA 90 A - Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. NFPA 9013 - Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning. C. SMACNA - Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards. D. TIMA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. E. SMACNA - Duct Liner Application Standard. F. SMACNA - Ducted Electric Heat Guide. G. AMCA Standard 210 -74 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. H. AMCA Pub. 261 Directory or Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. I. AMCA Standard 300 -67 Test Code for Sound Rating. J. AMCA Standard 301 -65 Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. K. AMCA Publication 511 -75 Certified Ratings Program for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. L. ASHRAE Standard 52 -76 Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. M. ASHRAE Standard 70 -72 Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 Where any references to "Sheetmetal work" or "ductwork" appears in this section of these specifications or on the drawings, it shall be construed to include outside air ducts, supply air ducts, return air ducts, exhaust ducts, relief ducts, plenums, duct taps, grille taps, diffuser connections and all other related pieces and parts of the air conveying systems. 1.04 Before starting shop drawings or fabrication of any duct work, the Contractor must have an approved reflected ceiling plan with which he can coordinate location of air outlets, lights, grille patterns, etc. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FANS A. General Requirements for All Fans: 1. All fans constructed to AMCA Standards, AMCA listed and labeled. 2. Bearings: a. At factory assembled package units 1 HP and larger, provide 200,000 hour bearings (AFBMA L -50) selected at maximum fan rpm. b. At packaged equipment 3/4 HP and smaller, provide manufacturer's standard bearings. 15810 - 1 3. Balance fans statically and dynamically at factory. 4. Factory paint fan housing, fan wheel (except aluminum), frame and support brackets with prime coat and enamel finish coat at factory, after properly preparing surfaces. 5. Arrange fans to be cleanable and so that wheel, bearings, shaft, and drive are removable. Provide plug type cleanout doors or split fan housing. Gasket joints and bolt airtight. 6. Provide vibration isolation for all fans per manufacturer's reconunendations. 7. Assemble fans at factory and test with permanent motor for proper operation, alignment and balance. B. Belt Drives (All Belt Driven Fans): Arrange equipment for easy access to lubrication fittings. Provide extended grease lines whenever easy access is not possible. 1. Provide v -belt drive with sufficient belts to prevent slipping at start-up. Select drive for 1.5 service factor. 2. On each fan 10 HP and smaller, provide variable pitch drive sheave with infinitely adjustable pitch diameter. Select drive sheave and fan pulley combination to provide fan rpm with drive adjusted to near mid -span. 3. On each fan 10 HP and larger, provide a fixed speed drive sheave. Change fan and drive sheave in field to attain specified air delivery at completion of balancing. 4. Provide belt guard with hinged tachometer cap. C. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans: 1. Direct drive or have adjustable pitch v -belt AS SCHEDULED. 2. Wheels shall be backward curved and housing shall be removable or hinged aluminum. 3. Isolate motor with vibration dampeners. 4. Provide with motorized dampers. 5. Insulated, pre - fabricated metal roof curb shall be for flat or sloped roof as required. 6. Provide with galvanized insect screen. 7. Manufacturer's: Greenheck, Acme, Loren Cook, ILG, Penn, Briedert and Carnes. 2.02 FAN ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Fan Connectors: 1. Provide at inlet and discharge of each fan. a. For standard application: 1) Material suitable to withstand the pressure encountered. Constructed from coated heavy glass fabric, flameproof and ozone resistant. Joints to be sealed airtight. Minimum of 4" flex connection to be used. 2) Manufacturer: Duro -dyne Corporation "Durolon" or equal. 15810 - 2 2.03 DUCTWORK b. For outdoor installations and where duct is exposed to toxic fumes: A. Low Velocity Ductwork Systems: 1) Material suitable to withstand the pressure encountered. Constructed from heavy glass fabric, double coated with Neoprene, non- combustible and fire retardant. Fabric to be waterproof and airtight. Minimum of 4" flex connection to be used. 2) Manufacturer: Duro -dyne Corporation Neoprene or equal. 2. Insulate over flex connection at inlet and discharge of all air handling units and rooftop units with two inch (2 ") Type "C" insulation. Hard cast insulation to ductwork and unit or use UL181A -P pressure sensitive tape. 1. Definition: Ductworle systems where duct pressures do not exceed 2" w.g. maximum static pressure and duct velocity does not exceed 2000 FPM. Ductwork Construction: a. Ductwork, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be constructed of new, prime grade, continuous hot dip mill galvanized, lock forming quality steel sheets and shall have a galvanized coating of 1 1/4 ounces total for both sides per square foot. The gauges of metal to be used and the methods of duct construction shall conform to the requirements for the class of work involved as set forth in the latest edition of "Standard Practice in Mechanical Sheet Metal" as published by SMACNA. Each sheet shall be stenciled with the gauge and manufacturer's name. If coil steel is used. coils shall be stenciled throughout on ten foot (10') centers with the gauge and manufacturer's name. Insulate per Specification Section 15180. b. All dimensions are inside clear dimensions. Sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct liner where applicable. c. Seal all transverse joints, seams and fitting connections with mastic to prevent air leakage. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable. Rectangular Ducts: a. Where special rigidity or stiffness is required, construct ducts of metal two gauge numbers heavier. b. Ducts larger than 96" require special field study for gauging and supporting and supporting methods. (Fumish shop drawings for supporting and construction requirements.) c. Rectangular low pressure ducts shall be constructed in the following minimum gauges: Largest Dimension of Dnct Gauge _DI Metal Up to 12" 24 min. 13" to 30" 24 31" to 54" 22 55" to 85" 20 86" and above 18 The above rectangular ducts shall be constructed- braced and reinforced in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National 15810 - 3 Association. 4. Round Ducts: a. Construct round ducts from steel sheets of the following U.S. Gauge thickness, using the seam method shown. b. Where special rigidity or stiffness is required, construct ducts of metal two gauge numbers heavier. c. Ducts 14" through 22" diameter, 24 gauge. Long or spiral seam. d. Ducts 2r throu 50", 20 gauge. Spiral lock seam duct. e. Ducts 51' through 80 ", 18 gauge. Longitudinal seam duct. 5. Transitions: a. Provide tapered transitions at changes in duct size and at connections to fans and other equipment. b. Offset not more than 20 ° , on diverging flow and 30 on contracting flow, unless called for otherwise on drawing. 6. Elbows and Turning Vanes: a. Use long radius, 45 and 90 fittings for all elbows and at tees unless otherwise shown. 1) Construct fittings with centline radius equal to 1 1/2 times the duct width at the turn. 2) Where square vaned elbows are used, provide access doors as detailed below. b. Turning Vanes: In all 90 square elbows provide 12" x 12" access door into duct on both sides of each vaned fitting to facilitate duct cleaning. 7. Flexible Duct: a. Do not use flexible duct unless specifically called for on the plans. b. At diffuser connections: 1) Provide duct listed as UL -181 Class I air duct, and constructed in compliance with NFPA 90A. 2) Minimum length 7 1/2 feet, maximum length 10 feet. Install with not more than one (1) 90 full radius degree bend. 3) Make joints with Nashua brand UL18IA -P duct tape and 1/2" wide positive locking straps. Use Panduit straps. 4) Minimum sound net insertion loss for duct as follows: BAND, HZ l25 250 500 1000 2000 Loss dB /ft. 2.1 3.0 2.7 3.0 2.7 5) Submit sound and construction data for proposed alternates. 15810 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.04 DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Air Volume Controls: 6) Tough vapor barrier reinforced metalized polyester jacket, tear and puncture resistant. 7) Airtight inner core with no fiberglass erosion into airstream. 8) R- Value: 6.0 @ 75 ° F. mean temperature. c. Manufacturer's: Atco 36 Series, Certainteed, Thermoflex, Wiremold, Genf lex, approved equal. 1. Provide air volume dampers, or other control devices as shown, at each low pressure duct main and branch for a balancer to adjust the system to produce the air quantities shown. Volume Dampers: a. Flat sheet. single leaf damper with a continuous rod; damper leaf two (2) gauges (minimum 16 ga.) heavier than the duct where installed. Provide locking quadrants with indicators located accessible without demolition. b. The locking -type quadrant operators for dampers, when installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, shall be provided with stand -off mounting brackets, bases or adapters to provide clearance, between the duct surface and the operator, not less than the thickness of the insulation. Stand - off - mounting items shall be integral with the operator or a standard accessory of the damper manufacturer. Volume dampers shall be provided where indicated. c. All operators accessible and lockable. Do not insulate over top of volume damper operator handle. d. Locate dampers a minimum of 7.5 feet from diffusers. 3. Extractors: a. Combination air straightening vanes and volume control with locking quadrant on outside or accessible through face of register. b. Manufacturer: Titus AG-45 or approved equal. c. Provide extractors at supply grilles attached directly to any main or branch duct serving more than one (1) grille. 4. Splitter Dampers: a. Construct damper using sheetmetal blade hinge mounted inside duct. b. Dampers or splitters shall be constructed from the same gauge metal as the ducts which they serve with a minimum of 22 gauge. Splitter length shall be 1 1/2 times the duct width up to 24" in size and above 24" in size shall be 1 l/4 times the duct width. Attach Duro -dyne SRP -40 series splitter damper bracket to blade. d. Connect 1 4" steel rod to damper bracket and extend through Duro -dyne SRP -14 ball joint damper casting mounting on outside of duct. Use 3/8" steel rod for splitter in ducts above 24" in size. e. Install assembly for full swing of damper blade. Lock damper in proper position. 15810 - 5 Opposed Blade Dampers: a. Gang operated opposed blades. b. Aluminum construction. B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers: 1. Provide backdraft dampers counter balanced to desired static pressure setting. Wide open static pressure drop not to exceed 0.15" W.G. 2. Damper blades aluminum with felt applied to tops of blades. Where dampers are exposed to outside temperature, provide neoprene edged blades. 3. Damper frames extruded aluminum; nylon bearings. Assembly designed for operation at 20 F. C. Access Panels and Doors: 1. Low Velocity System Access Panels: a. Sheetmetal doors reinforced, cross- bracketed or otherwise stiffened to prevent rattle or vibration. b. Seal doors airtight with felt edged gaskets. c. Secure with hinges and sash locks. 2.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Provide grilles, registers, and diffusers of the types and sizes called for on plans and in schedule on drawings. B. Finish with factory applied finish for extruded aluminum items, and with a prime coat for steel items. (Provide an additional factory baked enamel finish to match ceiling grid.) (Submit color sample for approval.) C. Equip diffusers with panels of the proper size to match the suspended ceiling layout or with the proper frame for surface mounting. Fully correlate diffuser and grille style, dimension, and fit with ceiling. D. Manufacturer's: MetalAire, Titus, Price, Krueger, Anemostat, Carnes, Nailor, and J & J. 2.06 LOUVERS AND HOODS A. Provide air exhausts through building skin, as shown. B. Louvers: Size as shown: air pressure drop not to exceed 0.13" W.G. when handling 1000 cfm per square foot of free area. 2. Blades 'S° shaped: with rainhook, bird screen on inside face. 3. Finishes factor applied or anodized dark bronze. 4. Manufacturers: Cames Model L40F, Ruskin, Empco or approved equal. C. Hoods: 15810 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Construction of heavy duty aluminum sheets with rolled interlocking seams with galvanized hood support members, similar to Greenheck Fabrahood or equal. 2. Provide with insect screen on outside air intake hood and 1/4" x 1/4" galvanized bird screen on relief hoods. 3. Curbs are to be a minimum of twelve inches (12 ") high. 4. Manufacturer's: Greenheck, Acme, Penn, Cook, Briedert, Carnes. 2.07 AIR FILTERS A. General 1. All air filters to be listed as Class 2 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., Building Materials Directory. All arrestance, efficiency (dust spot efficiency on atmospheric air) and dust holding capacities specified are to be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52 -76. Performance characteristics are to be verified by certified data published in manufacturer's literature or by copies of current test data from an independent authorized test laboratory. Test data, where required, shall be an integral component of the manufacturer's submittal data. 4. Provide and install one (1) clean set of filters in all air moving units that require filtration at completion of project. B. Disposable Panel Filters (for retum air filter grilles and/or unit filter racks): 1. Media: Non - woven, lofted cotton bonded to 96% free area welded wire support grid. Arranged in radially pleated configuration and bonded continuously to inside perimeter of high wet - strength beverage board cell sides. 2. Cell Design: One inch (1 ") deep with beverage board diagonal supports at entering air and leaving air faces of each cell. Air Cleaning Performance: Minimum 20% efficiency 85% arrestance. 4. Initial Resistance: 0.2" w.g. at 500 fpm face velocity. Dust Holding Capacity: Not less than 200 grams when operated at 500 fpm face velocity to a final resistance of.9 w.g. 6. Manufacturer's: Cam -Farr Company] Aeropleat II; AAF or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK A. Provide ductwork in accordance with SMACNA low velocity standards. B. Provide backdraft dampers for all exhaust fans if motor operated dampers are not called for. Provide one inch (1") mesh bird screen at all exhaust discharges. C. Seal all joints with Foster 30 -35. D. Where ducts, exposed to view, pass through walls, floors or ceilings, furnish and install sheetmetal collars to cover the voids around the duct. E. This work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from and after the date of acceptance of 15810 - 7 the job against noise, chatter. whistling or vibration and free from pulsation under all conditions of operation. After the system is in operation, should these defects occur, they shall either be removed and replaced or reinforced as directed by the Owner. F. Duct shall be erected in the general locations shown on the drawings, but must conform to all structural and fmal conditions of the building. Before fabricating any ductwork, the Contractor shall check the physical conditions at the job site, and shall make all necessary changes in cross sections, transitions, offsets, etc., whether they are specifically indicated or not at no additional charge to the Owner. G. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, breathing, vibration or unnecessary noise, such reinforcing to be as recommended in the SMACNA manual plus any additional reinforcing as may be required to meet job conditions. H. Provide manually operated volume control dampers in all branches, splits and taps for proper balancing of air distribution, whether shown on drawings or not, dampers to be either single blade or multiblade as shown in the SMACNA manual as required. They shall incorporate an indication ....3 device with lock to hold damper in position for proper setting. Damper operators in all rmfmished areas shall be Young Series 400 of the exact style, type and size required. All other operators shall be Young #315 and/or #896 opposite end from the operator. Where dampers are installed in ducts located above accessible type ceilings, damper operators shall not be extended through the finished ceiling. All square elbows shall have coming vanes per the SMACNA manual requirements. K. Where ducts connect to fans, including roof exhausters, flexible connections shall be made using "Ventglas" fabric that is fire- resistant, waterproof, mildew- resistant and practically air tight, and shall weight approximately thirty ounces per square yard. There shall be a minimum of two and one -half inches (2 1/2 ") distance between the edges of the ducts. There shall be a minimum of one inch (1 ") of slack for each full inch of static pressure on the fan system. L. Furnish and install screens on all ducts, fans, etc. furnished by the Contractor which lead to, or are outdoors. Screens shall be 16 gauge, one -half inch (1/2 ") mesh in removable galvanized steel frames. M. All holes in ducts for damper rods and other necessary devices shall be either drilled or machine punches (not pin punches), and shall not be larger than necessary. All duct openings shall be provided with sheetmetal caps if the openings are to be left unconnected for any length of time. All panels of uninsulated ducts twelve inches (12 ") and larger shall be cross broken. 3.02 DUCTWORK SUPPORTS A. Support all ductwork to prevent sag, undue play, and swing. Provide a hanger within twelve inches (12 ") from unit supply and.rearm. R/A plenums on back of air handling units must have a minimum of four (4) support straps. 13. Low Pressure Ductwork: 1. Duct 40" and Less: Provide with 1" x 18 gauge straps fastened to ductwork, and to building construction. Space not more than eight feet (8') on center. Hanger straps shall lap under duct a minimum of one inch (1") and have a minimum of one (1) fastening screw on the bottom and two 12 ■ on the side. 2. Ducts Over 40 ": Provide mild steel rods fastened to angle iron stiffeners with nuts and to building construction with appropriate inserts, flanges or clamps. Space not more than four feet (4') on center with rods and angle supports as follows: Angle Length Angle Rod Dia. 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/8" 1/4" 2" x 2" x 1/8" 1/4" 8' -0" 2" x 2" x 1/8" 3/8" 15810 - 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10' -0" 3" x 3" x 1/8" 3/8" C. Vertical ducts supported where they pass through the floor lines with 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/4" angles. D. Recommend methods of fastening bracing to ductwork, including riveting, bolting, and tack welding. E. Use minimum twelve (12! gauge wire with saddle for support of flex duct. Maximum permissible sag is 1/2" per foot of spacing between supports. Use one inch (1") strap (minimum) for all round sheetmetal runouts; minimum 8' -0" o.c. 3.03 ACCESS A. Furnish all fans with consideration of location of motor and drive. B. Furnish and install in the ductwork, hinged access doors to provide access to all manual and automatic dampers, fusible links, cleaning operations, etc. Where the ducts are insulated, the access doors shall be double skin doors with one inch (1 ") of insulation in the door. In rectangular ducts larger than twenty inches (20 ") in their smallest dimension, install access doors every twenty feet (20'). Where the size of the duct permin. the doors shall be eighteen inches (18 ") by sixteen inches (16 "). Factory fabricated doors as manufactured by Milcor meeting these specifications will be acceptable. Access doors shall be submitted for approval. C. Cycle damper after installation to insure free movement. Seal opening around fire damper with non - combustible material to maintain integrity of one (1) hour fire wall. 3.04 Fully coordinate and work directly with the Balancing and Testing Agency to provide all systems in perfect operating order. Make corrections and adjustments as required by the Balancing and Testing Agency in a timely manner. 3.05 Cap open ends of all ducts (including spin -ins) and equipment with minimum four (4) mil. plastic to prevent construction debris and dust from entering openings during construction. END OF SECTION 15810 - 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W /WW Lab -RR SECTION 15850 BALANCING AND TESTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The section describes general requirements and methods of execution relating to the testing and balancing of the mechanical systems provided on this project. 13. Scope: Furnish the services of a qualified and approved Balancing and Testing Agency to perform the work of this specification. 2. The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Testing and balancing HVAC systems and equipment. b. Providing a final report. C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of theses specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. SMACNA Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air Distribution Systems. 13. AMCA Publication 203, Field Performance Measurements. C. AMCA Standard 300 -67. Test Code for Sound Rating. D. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Recommended Procedures. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF AGENCY A. Subcontractor Minimum Qualifications Include: 1. Maintain a complete service organization that has operated within the Austin/San Antonio areas for at least three years prior to bid date of this project. 2. Demonstrate satisfactory completion of three projects of similar size and scope. Provide references if requested. 3. Bids by suppliers. Contractors or any firm that does not maintain a full -time staff of active and experienced HVAC systems balancers are not acceptable. 4. Independent, NEBB certified agency. 1.04 TIMING OF WORK A. Schedule the testing and balancing work in cooperation with other trades. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO BALANCING AGENCY A. Award the test and balance contract to the approved agency upon receipt of contract to allow the Balance and Testing Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with completion date. 15850 - 1 B. Put all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, equipment and controls into full operation for the Balancing Agency and continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. C. Provide scaffolding, ladders and access to each system for proper testing and balancing. D. Provide and change pulleys, belts and dampers, and add any dampers and test taps as necessary for correct balance as recommended by the Balance and Testing Agency, or as directed by the Architect after review of Balancing Report, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Statement B. Test Plan: Outline of the general sequence of work; test taps necessary; optimal and custom procedures to be used; trade coordination affecting this work including scheduling coordination test report forms. C. Preliminary Test & Balance Report: Provide one rough copy to Engineer as testing is accomplished; Do not hold until final report. D. Test & Balance Report: Completed test report forms. After review by Engineer, include in Owner's Manual. E. Operations Report: Verification that systems and equipment are operating properly in each mode. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 THIS PART NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTRUMENTS A. Maintain all instruments accurately calibrated and in good working order. Use instruments with the following minimum performance characteristics. B. Air Velocity Instruments: Direct reading in feet per minute, 2% accuracy. C. Static Pressure Instruments: Direct reading in inches water gauge, 2% accuracy. D. RPM Instruments: Direct reading in revolutions per minute, 1 /2% accuracy; or revolution counter accurate within 2 counts per 1000. E. Temperature Readout: Direct reading in degrees F., plus minus 0.1 degrees F. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR ALL SYSTEMS A. In cooperation with the Contractor's representative, coordinate adjustments of automatically operated dampers and valves, including the controlling thermostats, to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. B. Use manufacturers ratings on all equipment to make required calculations. C. MAKE FINAL ADJUSTMENTS FOR EACH SPACE PER HEATING OR COOLING COMFORT REQUIREMENT. State reason for variance from design cfm, i.e., "too noisy ", "too drafty", etc. 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS A. Identify each diffuser, grille, and register as to specific location and area. 15850 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Identify and list size, type. and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and all equipment tested. C. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers, include required fpm velocity, and required cfm and test cfm after adjustments. If test apparatus is designed to read cfm directly, velocity readings may be omitted, Identify test apparatus used. Identify wide open (W.O.) runs. D. Adjust all diffusers, grilles. and registers to minimize drafts and excess noise in all areas. 3.04 BALANCING LOW VELOCITY CONSTANT VOLUME DUCTWORK A. Adjust the fan for design airflow. B. Read and record the airflow at each inlet (or outlet). C. Adjust the branch dampers so that each inlet (exhaust systems) or outlet (supply systems) in the system is within ± 10% of design airflow. D. Adjust outside air or make -up air supply outlets to -0% to +15% of design air flow. E. Secure each branch damper and mark the balanced position of the damper quadrant. 3.05 FAN ADJUSTMENT A. Balance ductwork before making final fan adjustment. B. Verify that system is free of debris, that inlets and discharges ar not obstructed, and that filters are clean. C. Make pitot traverse of main ductwork to determine airflow and record. D. Adjust fan rpm to obtain design airflow. E. Test and record motor amperage and voltage on each phase leg. Reduce fan rpm if necessary, so that motor running amperage does not exceed motor nameplate amperage. Record fmal amperage and voltage. F. Record fan rpm. G. Test and record system suction and discharge static pressures. H. Record airflow. I. Test and adjust system for minimum design cfm outside air, as shown, where applicable. J. Test and record entering air temperatures across coils and fans. K. Test and record leaving air temperatures across coils. L. Test and record static pressure drop across each filter and coil bank. 3.06 BALANCING REPORT A. Compile the test data and submit 8 copies of the complete test data for forwarding to the Architect for acceptance and/or analysis and recommendations. B. Include a complete list of all test equipment used, including apparatus manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, and date last calibrated. C. Include complete identification of all elements. Identify by unit number, room name and number, air outlet symbol, etc., to clearly and positively identify the location of each element. 15850 - 3 D. Include all test data specified in addition to test data recommended in the applicable standards referenced in Part 1. Tabulate all nameplate data at all balanced equipment and at the associated motors. E. Tabulate data separately for each system. Describe balancing method used for each system. F. Include at the front of the report a summary of problems encountered, deviations from design, remaining problems, recommendations, and comments. END OF SECTION 15550 -4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I t 1 1 DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR Division 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electrical Specifications Myers & Associates 2300 S. IH 35, Suite 200 Round Rock, Texas 78681 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W /WW Lab -RR PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 16010 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise specified provide all labor, equipment, supplies, materials, superintendence and testing necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by these specifications and as shown on the Drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. Complete such details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems described on the Drawings. Include empty conduit as required for the telephone system. B. Submit a bid on the basis of a complete installation, including all labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, fees, and taxes. C. Include temporary electrical power and lighting that will be required for the interior of the buildings. Provide lighting to satisfy OSHA requirements. D. All Agreement Forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 of the specifications shall apply to the work specified in Division 16. E. Additional Site Visit Costs: The Contractor shall be charged with any cost resulting from uncompleted items that require additional site trips by the Architect/Engineer. F. No attempt has been made to show complete design details of building construction on the Electrical plans. Refer to Architectural, Structural and Mechanical plans for additional details which will affect electrical work. No extra cost will be allowed for offsets in conduit and wiring to avoid other work or when minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation or maintenance. 1.02 SITE INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site verifying all existing items and familiarize himself with existing work conditions and understand the conditions which affect performance of the work of this Division before submitting bids for this work. The submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence of such visits and examinations. B. All bids shall take the existing conditions into consideration and the lack of specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be allowed for work or change related to failure to examine site conditions. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Provide electrical connections and service to items described in all other sections of these specifications. 1.04 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Certain labor, materials, or equipment may be provided under other sections of these specifications, by utility companies, or by the Owner. When such is the case, the extent, source and description of these items will be as indicated on the Drawings or described in the specifications but the Contractor is responsible for verifying with all parties involved as to the extent of his requirements of work. B. Unless otherwise indicated motors shall be furnished by others, but connected by the Electrical Contractor as indicated on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise specified Mechanical equipment control wiring shall be provided and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. 1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1 A. Prior to bidding, examine the premises to determine if there are any special or existing conditions which may effect the work to be performed. B. Definitions: 1. "Provide" or "Install ": Includes all material, labor subcontracts, appurtenances and mark -up required for a complete operable system as shown and specified, set in place, connected and ready to use. 2. "Furnish': Purchase and deliver to job site, material as shown and specified. 3. "Record Drawings': Drawings that reflect the electrical systems as actually constructed by the Contractor. C. The Contractor binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the Owner hereto in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the Architect/Owner, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him hereunder, without -the previous written consent of the Owner /Architect. D. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, safety, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under his Contract. E. The Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of the Work, even though not particularly specified or indicated, and if he has good reason for objecting to the use of a material, appliance, or type of construction shown or specified, he shall register his objections with the ArchitecUEngineer, in writing; otherwise, he shall proceed with the work under the stipulation that a satisfactory job is required. F. Drawings: 1. The drawings are in general diagrammatic and the location of outlets, switches, motors, etc., on the drawings do not necessarily mean that such units shall be placed at that exact spot, as scaled on the drawings, but shall be located to function best. Use the drawings, and these specifications for guidance and secure the Engineer's approval of all changes in location. 2. Verify all measurements at the site. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between locations shown on the drawings and measurements at the building. 3. The Contractor is to draw electrical rooms to scale with approved equipment and submit to the Engineer prior to installation. The Contractor must insure that all minimum NEC working clearances are maintained. 4. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with structural members and mechanical or other equipment, provide all required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment. 5. The branch circuits and arrangement of home runs have been designed to compensate for voltage drop and other considerations to accomplish maximum economy. Re- circuiting will not be permitted without specific approval. 6. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 7. Drawings and specifications are complimentary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 8. Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or with the specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be used. 16010 -2 1 1 1 1 1 N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 9. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or area, without specific approval. shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect at no cost to the Owner. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans. The Architect shall have the right to make any reasonable change in outlet locations before rough -m without additional cost to the Owner. G. Substitutions: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, base bid on the equipment shown on the on the Drawings and hereinafter specified. 2. Request for approval to substitute materials, methods, or processes shall be made to Architect and if found acceptable, will be confirmed by an addendum to the Construction Documents. Where proposed substitutions are not incorporated into the Construction Documents by addendum PRIOR to time of the General Contract bid opening, all bids shall be held to have been made on the basis of the materials, methods and processes required by the Construction Documents. - 3. All substitutions shall be of equal or better quality to the equipment specified. 4. Acceptance of the substitution by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper operation of the systems, compliance with specifications, necessary changes due to dimensional differences or space requirements, and completion of work on schedule. 5. It is not the intent of the Specifications to limit materials to the product of any particular manufacturer. Where definite materials, equipment and/or fixtures have been specified by name, manufacturer or catalog number, it has been done so as to set a definite standard and a reference for comparison as to quality, application, physical conformity and other characteristics. H. Provide a completed Schedule of Values, see Specification Section 16060. Schedule shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer within sixty (60) days after the award of the contract. 1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Reference requirements stated elsewhere in the specifications. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAPE ALL ADDENDAS ISSUED DURING BIDDING TO HIS CONSTRUCTION AND RECORD DRAWING SET PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. PAY REQUESTS WILL NOT BE PROCESSED UNTIL THIS REQUIREMENT IS MET. C. In addition to other requirements, a master Record Drawing blueline set (separate from field sets) shall be kept in the job site trailer and marked up weekly as the work progresses, to show exact dimensioned location and routing of all electrical work which will be permanently concealed. Show routing and location of items cast in concrete or buried underground. Show routing of work in permanently concealed blind spaces within the building. Work located in spaces with access, or above suspended ceilings, is not considered permanently concealed. Show complete routing and sizing of any significant revisions to the systems shown. Indicate locations of all existing active and inactive conduit uncovered during construction. Keep marked up set at site for review at site meetings. D. The Contractor shall indicate progress by coloring -in various conduits, ducts, and associated appurtenances exactly as they are erected. This process shall incorporate both the changes noted above and all other deviations from the original drawings whether resulting from job conditions encountered or from any other causes. E. The marked -up and colored -up prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work installed. They shall be inspected periodically by the Architect and Owner's Representatives and they shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. This procedure is mandatory. 16010 - 3 F. No monthly pay applications will be reviewed if the Record Drawings are incomplete or are unavailable for inspection. G. At the completion of the job, these prints shall be submitted to the Architect for final review and comment. The prints will be returned with appropriate comments and recommendations. These corrected prints together with corrected prints indicating all the revisions, additions and deletions of work, shall form the basis for preparing a set of record drawings. H. The Engineer's original tracings and/or computer discs may be borrowed by the Contractor for his Trade, to obtain a set of mylar reproductions. Engineer's seal shall be removed from this set of mylars. Each Contractor shall then transfer all work to his mylar set and shall add the date of printing and the legend "Record Drawing Set" and submit a set of reproducible sepias to the Architect for his review. The Architect shall comment on the set of sepias and shall retum this set to the Contractor to make any final modifications to the drawings. After all corrections are made, the Contractor shall add the date of printing and the legend "Record Drawing Set" on the mylar set. Using the "Record Drawing Set ", the Contractor shall print one (1) complete set of reproducible mylars, two (2) sets of prints and a set of computer discs, in autocad version 14, for submission to the Owner. 7. The Contractor shall bear all the costs of reproducing the original tracings, making all the necessary changes and printing the mylar sets for the work in his charge. K. Final payment will be withheld until all Record Drawing Sets are submitted to the Owner. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer within sixty (60) days after the award of the contract a typewritten list of those items of equipment and appurtenances which will be furnished. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model or type, catalog number and manufacturer's printed information. The information submitted shall include overall dimensions, weights, voltage rating, phase, wiring diagrams, etc., and nameplate data. Assemble all submittals into one (1) brochure. The Engineers check will be general and does not relieve the Contractor of final responsibility to comply with the Contract Documents in all respects. B. Submit Shop Drawings for, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Devices 2. Safety Disconnect Switches 3. Panelboards 4. Interior Lighting Fixtures 5. Exterior Lighting Fixtures 6. Wire and Cable 7. Contactors 8. Transformers 9. Lamps 10. Photocells 1l. Time Clocks 12. Fuses 13. Cabinets and Enclosures 14. Distribution and Fuse Blocks 15. Electric room (coordinate with mechanical). Also, indicate other equipment and/or systems on plan. 16. Fire Rated Penetration Details C. When requested, present samples of all materials proposed for use to the Engineer for his approval. D. Certify Shop Drawings have been checked for compliance with Contract Documents. Certify that the materials submitted can be delivered and installed according to the construction schedule. 16010 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Select all other materials, not specifically described on the Drawings or in these specifications but required for a complete and operable facility, and submit to the Engineer for approval. F. Submit to the Engineer ii ithin thirty (30) days after the award of the contract evidence that all permits and fees have been paid to the local governing authorities. Evidence must be submitted to the Engineer prior to processing any pay application request. 1.08 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and all other applicable Federal, State and local codes. All codes and standards shall be per the latest edition with all supplements and official interpretations included. The Drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, standards, ordinances, and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the Drawings and specifications. B. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable Building Codes, State Laws, Local Ordinances and Industry Standards, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies, as approved by the Architect. C. Contractor is required to obtain all permits and licenses required by the jurisdiction having authority over his specific trade. Additionally, Contractor is required to submit to Engineer and/or Architect photocopies of all permits and licenses obtained from jurisdiction having authority prior to submittal of Contractor's fiat draw request. 1.09 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its fmal location. If necessary, the manufacturer shall be required to ship his material in sections sized to permit passing through such restricted areas in the building. B. Retain all portable and detachable parts or portions of installation such as fuses, key locks, adapters, blocking clips, and inserts until final completion of work. Deliver parts to the Owner or his authorized representative and attach an itemized receipt to obtain request for fmal payment C. Product Handling: 1. Use all means necessary to protect the work and materials of this section before, during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. 2. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide suitable box or crate electrical equipment and cover with waterproof covers to protect against dirt, moisture or accidental damage during shipment or outdoors at the job site. 5. Store all conduit on skids. 1.10 SERVICEABILITY OF PRODUCTS A. Furnish all products to provide the proper orientation of serviceable components to access space provided. B. Coordinate installation of piping, ductwork, equipment, conduits, panels and other products to allow proper service of all items requiring periodic maintenance or replacement. C. Replace or relocate all products incorrectly ordered or installed to provide proper serviceability. 16010 - 5 1.11 ACCESSIBILITY OF PRODUCTS A. Arrange all work to provide permanent, convenient and safe access to all serviceable and/or operable products. Layout work to optimize net usable access space within confines of space available. Advise Architect, in a timely manner, of areas where proper access cannot be maintained. Furnish layout drawings to verify this claim, if requested. B. Provide access doors in ceilings, walls, floors, etc. for access to automatic devices and all serviceable or operable equipment in concealed spaces. Location of panels shall be submitted for approval in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work. 1.12 UTILITY COSTS A. Pay all service charges required by the electric utility or telephone utility to facilitate construction. 1.13 CLEAN -UP A. Remove debris and waste materials from within the construction areas and transport off -site, daily. B. Keep the construction area clean, free from hazard, and orderly arranged. C. Pay all costs of waste removal and disposal. D. Dispose of waste materials in accordance with all regulations which govern. E. Take all precautions to protect persons who enter the construction area from hazardous conditions, hazardous waste, toxic waste, or other unsafe conditions. F. Upon completion of construction, remove all debris, waste materials, unused materials, temporary constructions, vehicles, tools, fencing, etc. to Owner's satisfaction. PART 2- FRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide only new equipment and materials. B. On all major equipment components, provide manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number permanently attached in a conspicuous location. C. All materials furnished under these specifications shall be the standard product of manufacturer's regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved standard design. D. Guarantees: 1. The Contractor and Manufacturers' shall provide a ONE (1) YEAR guarantee for all work under the Electrical Trade. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. In any case, such guarantees and warranties shall commence when the Owner accepts the mechanical/electrical system, as determined by the Architect and shall remain in effect for a period of ONE (1) YEAR thereafter. 2. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship, including lamps fumished under each Section. shall carry a ONE (1) YEAR warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault under any contract, due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship or design which may develop shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the Contractor for the work under his Contract, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure. 16010 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.02 STANDARDS PART 3- EXECUTION 3. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the system, which are to be provided under his Contract, are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated. 4. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of any systems or equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by the Contractor for his respective work, as applicable. 5. Fumish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements. 6. Reference other guarantee information elsewhere in these specifications. A. Where the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) have established standards and issued labels for a particular group, class or type of material, apparatus, appliance or device, provide the UL label on all such items in that category incorporated into the work. B. Where such items are not covered by UL standards, they shall meet or exceed the requirements of the current National Electrical Code (NEC), or if not covered there, by the applicable, published, recognized standard of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), or of the industry and of the related engineering society. Example: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to minimize cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, etc. Perform all cutting, channeling, drilling, etc., as required for the proper support, concealment, installation, or anchorage of raceways, outlets, or electrical equipment in a careful manner. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment, or defaced finish, tile, plaster, woodwork, or metal work shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of unfinished masonry, tile, etc., or cutting, drilling, anchoring to or welding of structural members shall be performed in a manner having the Engineer's prior approval. All openings made in fire rated or smoke rated walls, floors, and ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating or smoke rating for the enclosure. B. Where conduits pass through exterior walls, thoroughly caulk with sealant the annular space around the conduit to provide a watertight closure. Provide at least 1/2" annular space around the conduit. Provide and install all counterflashing of all conduit, pipe and supports which pierces roofs and other weather barrier surfaces. Verify detail with Architect before installation. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner to assure weatherproof installation. Any leaks developed shall be repaired at his expense, to Architect's satisfaction. All waterproofing, flashing and counterflashing shall be compatible with roofing system so as not to void any roof warranties. Confirm installation with Architect and Roofing Contractor. 3.02 SEALING AND FIREPROOFING A. SEALING OF PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS, FLOORS, CEILING AND ROOF ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER UL "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY". UL SYSTEM NUMBERS INDICATED ARE FOR A PARTICULAR LISTED INSTALLATION AND ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION AND INTENT. OTHER LISTED UL SYSTEM DESIGNS MAY BE USED. IN ALL CASES, SUBMIT MATERIALS, UL SYSTEM DESIGN NUMBERS AND UL DETAILS TO BE USED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT AND IDENTIFY WHICH DETAIL IS TO BE USED FOR EACH SPECIFIC CONDITION. POST REVIEWED DETAIL AT JOB SITE FOR REFERENCE. Only materials tested in the specific UL System No. may be used. 16010 - 7 a. Caulk Manufacturer: 1) 3M Type CP -25 W/13 + for all assemblies requiring 3M caulk, 2) For WL3045 and WL3046 use Hilti FS611A sealant. b. Steel Sleeve (stud wall) (UL System No. WL1003): Cylindrical sleeve shall be fabricated from minimum 0.019" thick (no. 28 gauge) galvanized sheet steel and having a minimum two inch (2 ") lap along the longitudinal seam. Length of steel sleeve to be equal to thickness of wall plus one inch (1") such that, when installed, the ends of the sleeve will project approximately 1/2" beyond the surface of the wall on both sides of the wall assembly. The diameter of the openings cut on each side of the wall assembly (concentric with conduit) to be 2 to 2 1/2" larger than the outside diameter of conduit such that, when the steel sleeve is installed, a 1 to 1 1/4" annular space will be present between the steel sleeve and the conduit around the entire circumference of the conduit. Install sleeve by coiling the sheet steel to a diameter smaller than the through opening, inserting the coil through the openings and releasing the coil to let it uncoil against the circular cutouts in the gypsum wallboard layers. c. Optional Steel Sleeve (concrete or block wall): Except for single insulated cables, provide sleeve cast in floor /wall or mortared into CMU wall; Schedule 40 or heavier, length to extend a maximum one inch (1") from top surface of floor or a maximum of one inch (1") from both sides of wall. d. Forming Material: Minimum one inch (1 ") thickness mineral -wool batt insulation material. Tightly pack into sleeve with minimum 1/2" recess on ends. Manufacturer: Thermafiber Safmg Insulation. 2. Firestop system shall be installed at top surface of floor and symmetrically on both sides of wall assemblies and one (1) side of floor. 3. Alternate floor penetration system (with firestop mortar): UL System No. CAJ1032. 4. Wires and Cables: For gypsum frame wall, single cable: Fireproof per UL System No. WL3001. Opening for cables to be hole -sawed through gypsum wall board layers. Diameter of opening to be 3/8" to 5/8" larger than outside diameter of cable. Cable to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Caulk to fill annular space throughout thickness of gypsum wall board layers and apply 1/4" bead of caulk to perimeter of cable at its egress from wall (both sides). b. For gypsum frame wall, multiple cables: Use UL system No. WL3021, WL3045, WL3046 or equivalent to maintain rating of wall. c. For concrete walls/floors or CMU walls, single or multiple cables: Fireproof per UL System No. CAJ3030. Install sleeve in assembly flush with both sides. Cables to be a minimum of ten percent (10 %) and a maximum of thirty-three percent (33 %) of cross - sectional area of opening. Recess minimum one inch (1 ") thickness of mineral wool material into opening around cables. Caulk openings around cable to minimum depth of one inch (1 "). Optional sleeve may be used per UL detail requirements. 5. Reference Architectural for the exact location of all rated walls, floors, ceilings and ceiling /roof assemblies. 6. Materials used in firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, provided with materials for specific UL System No. 16010 - 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. 7. Manufacturer's: 3M, Metacaulk, Hilti, BioFireshield or equal. In non -rated walls identified for sound insulation, provide 1/2" space between conduit and sleeve packed with multiple layers of forming material. Allow 5/8" minimum space on each side and caulk with acoustical sealant. C. Final condition to prevent passage of fire, smoke, noxious gas and water. D. For non -rated electrical/mechanical rooms: Seal all conduit passing through room walls, floors and ceilings with 3M caulk, Type CP -25 WB +. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. For the actual fabrication, installation and testing, use only thoroughly trained and experienced workmen completely familiar with the items required and with the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation. In acceptance or rejection of the installed work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. 13. Install all specialties as detailed on- plans. Whex details or specific installation specifications are not included herein, follow approved manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install complete, thoroughly check, correctly adjust, clean, and leave ready for operation all equipment and material connected with this project. D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. E. Electrical service stub locations, sizes and quantities for equipment are approximate only. The Contractor must verify all service locations, sizes and quantities with the equipment supplier before rough -in. F. The Electrical Contractor shall make all final connections to all electrical equipment furnished and set in place by others, including millwork with outlets. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install all disconnect switches as required. G. The Electrical Contractor shall provide /install all circuit breakers, power wiring, conduit systems and final connections required for operation of heating cable systems. H. Provide and install all adjustable mounting brackets, steel bar hangers, T -bar mounting clips, support channels and universal support bridges as required for installation of light fixtures, speakers, alarm devices and other ceiling mounted devices. Ceiling tile shall not be used to support ceiling mounted devices in lay -in ceilings. 3.04 BALANCING SYSTEM A. Balance the electrical system between the respective phases of the system. Balance individual circuits in each panel of the system. Where phase assignments or circuit numbers are indicated on the drawing, do not deviate without the Engineer's approval. All deviations shall be noted on panelboard submittals and on Record Drawings and schedules. 3.05 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS A. Cooperate with other Contractors so that the installation of the electrical materials and equipment may be properly coordinated. Where a conflict occurs with piping, duct work, etc., it shall be resolved as directed by the Engineer. 13. Interferences between conduit and other trades shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines requiring grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the following order of precedence shall generally be observed: Building Lines 16010 - 9 2. Structural Members 3. Soil and Drain Piping 4. Vent Piping 5. Refrigerant Piping 6. Supply, Return. 0 A Ductwork 7. Exhaust Ductwork 8. Chilled and Hot Water Piping 9. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping 10. Natural Gas Piping 11. Electrical Conduit 12. Fire Protection Piping 3.06 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Each Contractor shall compare his drawings and specifications with those of other Trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect and obtain from the Architect written instructions to make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other Trades installing inter- related work. Before installation, all Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect. 13. Locations of conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Exact routing and location of systems shall be determined prior to fabrication or installation. C. Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit systems shall be made as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. D. Where discrepancies in scope of work as to what Trade provides items such as starters, disconnects, flow switches and the like exist, such conflicts shall be reported to the Architect prior to signing of the Contract. If such action is not taken, the various Trades shall furnish such items as part of their work for complete and operable systems. E. Verify voltage, phase, termination points and required disconnects for all mechanical and/or Owner furnished equipment prior to rough -in. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer. F. The Contractors are to avoid routing conduit through fire rated assemblies where practical. Each trade is responsible for proper coordination of required sleeves or block -outs with rated assembly installers. Each trade is responsible for providing sleeves, as required, for his work. Each trade shall verify acceptable tolerances around penetrating item in fire assembly before beginning fire sealing. G. Verify voltage, phase, termination points and required disconnects for all electrical equipment provided by the Owner or other trades, prior to rough -in. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer. 3.07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91 -696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of the provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION, ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET, THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653. OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. 3.08 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide three (3) Operation and Maintenance manuals for training of Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and related equipment in the manner described elsewhere in these specifications. In addition, organize manuals and include data and narrative as noted below (bind each manual in a hard- backed looseleaf binder. Use 8 1/2" x 11" white paper). B. Operating Sequence and Procedures: 16010 - 10 3.09 IDENTIFICATION 1. Contents: In each chapter, describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter. 2. Typewritten Operating Procedures: Write procedures for start -up, operation and shutdown. a. Start -up: Give complete step -by -step instructions for energizing equipment, making initial setting and adjustments whenever applicable. 3. Shutdown Procedures: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step -by -step instructions in that order. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task: i.e., cleaning, inspection, etc. D. Manufacturers Brochures: Include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering all appurtenances used in each system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Provide the nearest manufacturers representatives name, address and phone number. E. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected, approved submittals and shop drawings covering equipment for the project either with the manufacturers brochures or properly identified in a separate subsection. F. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment fumished for the project, with a tabulation of descriptive data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or systems. Properly identify each part by part number and manufacturer. A. Equip the following items with nameplates: 1. Al] motor starters. panelboards and motor control centers. 2. Control/power equipment in separate enclosures including relays. 3. All main switchboard overcurrent devices and spares, and circuit breakers. 4. All branch circuit and power panelboards. 5. Safety disconnect switches. 6. Contactors. 7. Bypass Switches and Transfer Switches. 8. E -G sets. 9. UPS System and Battery Racks. B. No dymo (stick on indented plastic) type label will be permitted. C. Identify equipment listed above. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT NUMBERS WITH MECHANICAL Each piece of equipment shall be numbered consistently throughout. D. Fabricate nameplates as follows: Provide three (3) ply, 1/16" laminated plastic nameplate material with white core for lettering and black background. All nameplates, for equipment powered from emergency circuits, shall have white core for lettering and red background. Use capital letters. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum 3/4" high x 2" long nameplates with 1/4' letters. All labels shall be permanently affixed to the front of all required equipment using two (2 round head self tapping screws. Self- adhesive labels are not acceptable. Align labels wit equipment. 16010 - 11 E. All junction boxes shall have the panel /circuit number(s) identified on the blank coverplate, handwritten with a pemtanent black marker. Disconnects, combination motor starter /disconnects and manual motor starter shall have the paneVcircuit number(s) identified on the inside of the front cover, hand written with a permanent black marker. F. Provide engraved coverplates for all switches and control devices which are not otherwise clearly related to the equipment they serve. 3.10 TESTING A. Test and record results for all power feeders for megger readings, including phase to phase and phase to ground as recommended by the cable manufacturer. B. Measure service ground resistance. C. For all devices having ground -fault protection as required in NEC section 230 -95, the ground -fault protection system shall be performance tested when first installed on site. The test shall be conducted by a factory employed technician in accordance with instructions which shall be provided with the equipment. A written record of this test shall be made and shall be submitted in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3.11 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION A. Submit, at time of request for fmal inspection, a completed letter in the following format: I, (Name) , of (Firm) , certify that the electrical work is complete in accordance with Contract Plans and Specifications, and authorized change orders (copies attached) and will be ready for final inspection as of (Date) . I further certify that the following specification requirements have been fulfilled: Megger readings performed, six (6) copies of logs attached. Ground tests performed, six (6) copies of method used and results attached, including service ground readings. Operating manuals completed and instructions of operating personnel performed for all systems, (Date), (Signature, Owners Representative). 4. Record drawings up -to -date and ready to deliver to Engineer. 5. All other tests required by Specifications have been performed. 6. Final clean -up is completed. 7. All systems are fully operational. 3.12 DURING FINAL INSPECTION END OF SECTION 16010 - 12 Signed A. Demonstrate installation to operate satisfactorily in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Should any portion of installation fail to meet requirements of Contract Documents, repair or replace items failing to meet requirements until items can be demonstrated to comply. W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16060 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall breakdown the final Schedule of Values to be used for pay application into the following minimum categories. B. All categories shall have appropriate material and labor breakdown. 102 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Mobilization B. Service - wiring and conduit C. Gear 1 D. Lighting Fixtures E. Branch Circuit - wiring and conduit F. Feeders - wiring and conduit G. Devices H. Labeling of Equipment L Testing I J. Record Drawings and 0 & M Manuals END OF SECTION 1 1 T 1 1 1 I 16060 - 1 W/W W Lab - RR SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a complete conduit system as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Conform with the latest requirements of the NEMA, the National Electrical Code, and be UL listed. PART 2- PROIIUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rigid galvanized steel. B. 1MC C. EMT D. PVC - Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC Duct) shall be UL rated. Conduit fittings and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer and approved for such use. E. Flexible conduit. 1. Liquid -tight (vibration and/or wet areas) fabricate from continuous lengths of spirally wound galvanized steel snip interlocked with a gray polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the core to make the conduit liquid tight, oil proof and bendable to a small radius. 2. Greenfield (vibration and/or dry areas) a. Metal Clad (MC) cable shall be acceptable. 2.02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Perforated iron straps are not permitted for supporting conduits. Conduits run between the webs of bar joists may use tie wire for securing the conduits. 13. Support horizontal and vertical conduit runs by one -hole malleable straps, clamp -backs or other approved devices with suitable bolts. All conduits shall be supported a maximum of ten feet (10) on center. Also, support conduits within twelve inches (12 ") of any bends, outlet boxes, wall penetrations or joints in pipe. All conduits shall be secured to structure. Lighting fixture whips may be secured to ceiling tie wires with caddy clips or acceptable equal. Metal clad cables shall be secured directly to structure or on an acceptable hanging method. Groups of MC cable shall be gathered together, strapped with tie wrap at 2 1/2' increments and secured directly to structure or acceptable hanging method. 2.03 FITTINGS AND HARDWARE A. Provide fittings, locknuts. bushings, and hardware that are compatible with the type of conduit used. No indenter type of connectors and couplings are allowed. B. Provide screw -in type fittings for use with flexible conduit. C. Provide set -screw or compression fittings for EMT. D. Provide approved MC connectors. 16110 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Do not drill or pierce structural steel members under any circumstances without the Engineers specific approval. B. Do not install conduit that is crushed or deformed in any way C. Provide a nonmetallic (nylon, polypropylene, or approved equal) drag line of suitable strength in spare conduits and telephone conduits. Tightly plug spare conduits at both ends. D. Do not pull wire into conduit system until the conduit system is complete in all details; in the case of concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been completed. 3.02 INSTALLATION ABOVE GRADE A. Minimum size raceway is 1 2 inch. B. Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit for locations exposed to severe physical damage and in damp or wet areas and where underground conduit rises exposed above grade or exposed through slab. C. Install intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) Type I may be used as an option for rigid galvanized steel conduit in areas permitted by the National Electrical Code. D. Install electrical metallic tubing (EMT) within enclosed buildings, in furred ceilings or walls, in dry areas, and exposed above 8 feet above floor. Do not use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) where exposed to moisture. E. Provide liquid -tight flexible metal conduit for transformer terminations, motor terminations, and other equipment where vibration and moisture are present. For other equipment and/or lighting fixtures in dry areas, conduit may be galvanized, Greenfield. Minimum length is two feet (2') and maximum length is six feet (6') for all flexible conduit. [MC cable use is permitted to exceed six feet (6) in length for all uses except lighting connections.] Flexible conduit other than identified above is NOT acceptable. F. Follow manufacturers recommendations regarding installation, termination, bending, and coupling of conduit. G. Provide pull boxes as required or as directed by the Engineer. H. Where possible, conceal raceways within finished walls, ceilings, and floors other than slab -on- grade. I. Where practical, avoid routing conduit directly above or below equipment. Keep raceways six inches — (6 ") away from parallel runs of flues and hot water pipes. Avoid offsets where possible. Where necessary, make an approved offset with conduit bending machine. J. Route conduits and/or metal clad cables above slab parallel to and 90 to building structure. K. Route conduits from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, pull or junction boxes with locknuts and bushings in such manner that each system is continuous throughout. Conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 ° , total), including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. L. Do not suspend raceways or equipment from piping, ceiling grid or ductwork, but provide independent and separate support methods. Provide toggle bolts or expansion (spider type) anchors in hollow masonry units, lead expansion bolts in solid masonry or concrete (or preferably use pre -set concrete inserts in concrete), machine screws, bolts, and wood screws on wood construction. Note: Nails, of proper type and heads may be used to anchor in wood construction in lieu of screws only where rigid support will be provided by their use. Use of power - driven studs is prohibited and is not allowed on the job.. 16110 - 2 M. Provide fire sealing around conduits penetrating through fire resistance rated walls, partitions, floors and ceilings. Reference Specification Section 16010 for additional information. N. Provide maximum six feet t 6') of flexible conduit to each grid type light troffer. O. Coordinate all roofing penetrations with Mechanical and General Contractors in order to minimize the number of penetrations. P. Route conduit to rooftop equipment below the roof wherever possible. If possible, do not penetrate roof; go through a high all above the roof flashing or through a roof curb instead. If roof penetration is necessary, coordinate with the Architectural Specifications and penetrate as directly below the equipment disconnect or wiring connection point as possible. Q. No PVC conduit will be allowed above finished grade or finished floor. R. Conduits may be routed in bar joists and secured with tie wire. However, conduits routed below bar joists must utilize acceptable clamps (reference Specification Section 16110, 2.02). 3.03 INSTALLATION BELOW GRADE A. Minimum size raceway is 3.4 inch. B. Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit or PVC where conduits are installed in concrete floor slab or passing through any concrete structure. PVC conduit shall not penetrate slab above Finished grade. C. Provide rigid galvanized steel or PVC conduit where conduits are installed below grade. D. Swab clean all conduits before cable installation. Waterproof all conduit joints after cable installation. E. Provide conduit wall sleeves for all conduits penetrating walls, grade beams, etc. below grade and other locations shown on the Drawings. F. Where required to bend PVC ducts to satisfy indicated routing, preform ducts to allow ends of duct sections to be in a straight alignment. Accomplish preforming of ducts by utilizing proper duct heater units. G. Perform all necessary excavation and backfrlling for proper installation of work Take precautions not to excavate below depth required. Tamp backfill in six inch (6 ") layers to original grade, moistening as required for proper compaction. All backfilling shall be free from harmful materials. In areas to be paved, compact to density to receive pavement. Where pavement is broken for the installation of conduit, repair to original condition. Provide shoring, bracing, and de- watering if necessary for installation of work. Remove from site all materials encountered which are not suitable for backfill. H. When and if damage is caused to underground utility lines or structures, above ground utility lines or structures, or other purposeful surface conditions, either on or off the right -of -way, make immediate temporary repairs. At the first opportunity, make permanent repairs which are acceptable to the Owner. All such repairs shall be made at the Contractor's expense. 1. Where necessary, provide barricades around open excavations to prevent endangering the public. Provide warning beacon lighting at night to adequately mark all excavations. J. Where conduits embeddec 1. concrete floor or roof deck cross expansion joints, they shall be joined together using O.Z. Gedney type DX expansion fittings and bonding jumpers. Straight runs of conduit over 150' long shall have O.Z. Gedney Type AX expansion fittings installed to minimize movement. Fittings shall be installed at a maximum of 150' on center. K. Where horizontal runs of conduit transition to vertical and continue above finished grade or fmished floor; the transition shall be made with a 90 degree long radius sweep. The sweep may be PVC (2" and smaller) and shall be RGS (2 1/2" and larger). No PVC conduit will be allowed above finished grade or fmished floor. 16110 - 3 W /WW Lab -RR SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway systems as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified. Route all wire through an approved raceway unless otherwise indicated, regardless of voltage application. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Provide conductors in accordance with the applicable sections of UL and IPCEA Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop submittals for each type of wire and cable. B. Provide shop submittals which includes the following information: 1. Insulation type. 2. Insulation temperature rating, 3. Manufacturer. PART 2- I'RODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wire and Cables (600 Volts) 1. Provide copper wire and copper ground conductors. Conductors shown on plans are thusly sized. a. Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be #12, however, #I4 may be used for motor control circuits where specified on the drawings. For HVAC controls, #16 AWG may be used. b. All conductors #8 and larger shall be stranded. 2. Provide copper conductors of annealed, 98 percent conductivity soft drawn copper. Provide stranded conductors for control circuits. B. Metal clad cable shall be acceptable. Reference Specification Section 16110, 2.01 E. C. Insulation (600 Volts) 1. Provide all conductor insulation types rated for wet and dry locations and approved by the National Electrical Code for the particular application. Provide all wire and cable with the following (or better) insulation classes: a. All feeders and branch circuits are to be dual -rated Type THHN/THWN, except 250MCM and larger conductors which may also be Type XHHW. b. Insulation rated for operation at 600 volts. c. In areas where the temperature will exceed 167 provide wire rated 105 C. minimum and a type approved by the local code. Include any wiring within three feet (3') horizontally or ten feet (10') above any heating appliance. 16120 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 170/908 Volt Phase A - Black Phase B - Red Phase C - Blue Neutral - White Ground - Green D. Wire and cable (50 volts or less): PAkT 3.- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 2. Color code in accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with equipment. All wiring for control systems to be installed in conjunction with mechanical and/or miscellaneous equipment. Color code by line or phase all branch circuit wiring including circuits to motors and feeders as follows: Wire No. 6 and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire No. 4 and larger may he color coded by color taping within six inches (6 ") of exposed ends. B. Wire Connections and Devices 16120 - 2 277/480 Volts Phase A - Brown Phase B - Yellow Phase C - Purple Neutral - Gray Ground - Green 1. Provide copper wire, minimum size #16 AWG for controls, #18 AWG minimum for fire alarm and #20 AWG minimum for communications. All wire and cable shall be solid. Stranded conductors are not acceptable. 2. All conductors shall be routed in conduit or shall have an insulation approved for plenum installation, unless otherwise noted. A. Unless otherwise indicated wiring size noted on the drawings extend for the entire length of a circuit. Install wire in raceways in strict conformance with the manufacturer's reconunendations. Use a UL approved wire - pulling lubricant. Strip insulation so as to avoid nicking of wire. 1. Provide all terminating fittings, connectors, etc., of a type suitable for the specific cable. Make all fittings up tight. Make up all terminations in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations using special washers, nuts, etc., as required. 2. Connect No. 8 and larger wire to panels and apparatus with properly sized, solderless, or compression lugs or connectors. 3. Join No. 10 and smaller wire by twisting tight and applying UL listed twist -on connectors. 4. Leave at least an eight inch (8 ") loop of wire for ends at each outlet box for the installation of fixtures or devices. C. Flashover or insulation value of joints shall equal that of the conductor. Provide connectors rated at 600 volts for general use and 1000 volts for use within fixtures. D. Group conductors into conduit as indicated on the drawings. However, several branch circuit `home runs" (the distance from the supplying panel to the closest circuit utilization) may be grouped (except ground fault protected circuits) into one (1) conduit with a maximum of 3 phase conductors (each a different phase) and one (1) common neutral. No grouping allowed which would require derating by the National Electrical Code, unless specifically indicated on the drawings. E. Where the distance between the supplying panel and the first branch circuit receptacle or light is more than 100 feet, provide minimum No. 10 wire for this distance. F. Wiring for emergency systems shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment as required by Article 700 of the NEC. 3.02 TESTING A. Prior to energizing feeders. perform insulation resistance tests at 500 Volts D.C. for 30 seconds on each cable with respect to ground and adjacent cables. Maintain the following log for feeder tests: FEEDER DESCRIPTION: TESTERS NAME - TEST INSTRUMENT SERLAL #: TEST DATE. RESISTANCE: A� AC A -G B C 1=G C -G B. Test all circuits for proper neutral connections. C. Upon completion of all testing, prepare a detailed report of all voltage and insulation resistance measurements. Deliver report to Engineer with request for Final inspection. END OF SECTION 16120 - 3 W/WW Lab -RR PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide outlet boxes in accordance with the National Electrical Code at locations shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified. I'ART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide hot - dipped galvanized pressed steel boxes, minimum 1 -1/2 inches deep. B. Provide standard outle,Lboxes for junction and pull boxes of 150 cubic inches or less; cabinets with screw covers or as specifically noted for junction or pull boxes larger than 150 cubic inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION SECTION 16130 OUTLET BOXES, PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Through wall boxes and boxes mounted back -to -back are not permitted. Provide 8 inch minimum separation in order to minimize sound transmission. B. Set flush with wall or ceiling finish in accordance with N.E.C., Article 370. Extension sleeves are not permitted for boxes improperly set. C. Verify location of outlets prior to rough -in. When necessary, relocate outlets to avoid interference with other work or equipment. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling, provide a junction box and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceilings or walls with appropriate covers. D. Where more than one (1) switch or device is located at one (1) point, unless otherwise indicated, provide gang boxes and covers. When the voltage between switches exceeds 300 volts, provide barrier partitions between adjacent switches located in the same box. Sectional switch boxes or utility boxes not permitted. E. Provide pressed steel boxes for concealed work. Provide four inch (4 ") square boxes with 1/2 inch raised cover for exposed work in utility areas. F. Do not drill and pierce structural concrete members and structural steel without prior approval of the Engineer. G. Mount all boxes plumb. H. Mount boxes completely rigid without conduit or finished wall support. I. Where outlets are installed m steel stud type systems, provide additional cross bracing, bridging, and/or straps as required to make the outlet completely rigid prior to the application of the wall facing material. J. Dimensions are from finished floor to centerline of outlets. Adjust heights of outlets in masonry walls from that indicated so that outlet box will set in comer of block or brick. Outlet height so adjusted shall be consistent. Unless otherwise indicated, mount outlets at the following heights: Wall switches Duplex receptacles Weatherproof duplex receptacles 16130 - 1 4 ft. -0in. 1 ft. - 4 in. lft. -6in. W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16140 DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide switches and receptacles as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Provide all receptacles which conform with NEMA standards for amperage and voltage classification. B. Provide devices U.L. listed for the application and for the type of wire used. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Hubbell B. General Electric C. Arrow Hart D. Leviton E. Bryant F. Pass & Seymour 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop submittal for each device. B. Provide shop submittals which includes the following information: 1. Manufacturer and catalog number. 2. NEMA configuration. 3. Voltage and amperage ratings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Receptacles: Provide receptacles as specified in the schedule on Drawings. Verify the exact type receptacle required before ordering. Receptacles powered from emergency circuits shall be red. B. Switches: Provide switches as specified in the schedule on Drawings. Switches controlling circuits from emergency power shall be red. C. Device Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide smooth metal device plates of Type 430 stainless steel for all indoor devices. Cover plates for devices served by emergency circuits shall be red. 2. Provide telephone and data outlets with blank covers. 3. Provide vertical single lift device plate of aluminum die cast for weatherproof receptacles. D. Floor Outlets 1. Provide where shown on the drawings, cast adjustable rectangular floor boxes. 16140 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Receptacle floor outlets specified as duplex shall have duplex screw cap coverplates. Telephone and/or data floor outlet boxes to have combination screw cap coverplate. 3. Provide brass carpet flanges for each floor box installed in carpeted areas. 4. Multiple device locations shall incorporate two (2) or three (3) gang outlet box, E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles within 6 feet of any sink, lavatory or wet area. F. Provide a receptacle in all mechanical/electrical rooms. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices of the type as indicated on drawings. Make up all connections tight and set device plumb- Use care in installing device m order to prevent damage to the device and the wire in the outlet box. B. Device Plates: Provide a device plate for each outlet to suit the device installed and install blank plates or covers for junction boxes and empty outlets, including telephone, computer, etc. C. Mount duplex receptacles vertically with grounding opening up unless otherwise noted. D. Prior to installation of outlets other than 20A, 120 Volts, verify receptacle type with Owner through Architect. Receptacles not verified shall be changed at Electrical Contractor's expense if necessary to operate equipment. E. Install all switches that are required to be handicap accessible at proper height per latest handicap standards. F. Provide cross bracing between wall studs, as required to install switches, thermostats, intercom devices, etc. Device boxes shall be aligned on center line of each box. G. Receptacles installed for electric water coolers shall be mounted at a height so as not to be visible after installation of EWC. Coordinate with equipment being provided. END OF SECTION 16140 - 2 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16155 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide and install manual motor starters where shown on drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1.02 STANDARD A. UL Listed. B. Conform to the latest NEMA Standards. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. C. ITE Siemens. D. General Electric. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide data sheets that includes equipment voltage /current rating, catalog numbers, horsepower rating and other such descriptive data which may be required. PART 2- I'RODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION A. All manual motor starter switches shall consist of toggle operated two (2) or three (3) pole switches mounted in a NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure unless exposed to outdoor conditions; then mount in NEMA 3R enclosure. B. Contacts shall be double break silver alloy. C. Terminals shall be supplied clearly marked and accessible from front of switch. D. Switch shall be equipped with melting alloy type thermal overload relay. Thermal unit shall be of one -piece construction and inter - changeable. Starter shall be inoperative if thermal unit is removed. E. Toggle switch shall be furnished with a handle guard. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely mount switches in accordance with NEC and all local codes. Provide all mounting materials and hardware. B. Confirm with Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor prior to mounting switch on respective equipment. END OF SECTION 16155 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16170 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OR WORK A. Provide safety switches as indicated on the Drawings and specifications or as required. 102 STANDARDS A. Conform to U.L. listed and the latest NEMA standards. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. B. Square D. C. General Electric. D. ITE Siemens. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop submittal for safety disconnect switches. 13. Provide shop submittals which include the following information: PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION 1. NEMA type. 2. Enclosure type. 3. Ampere rating. A. Provide safety switches appropriately rated for use with electrical system 600 Vac for 480 volts, 250 Vac for 208 volts and etc. B. Provide safety switches NEMA heavy duty type HD, and horsepower rated for A/C motors. C. Unless otherwise indicated_ provide non -fused (NF) switches. Switches requiring fuses and rated 600 amps and below shall be provided with rejection clips. Switches rated larger than 600 amps shall have Class "L" fuse connections provided. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide safety switches in NEMA 1 enclosure located on the interior of building. Unless otherwise indicated, provide safety switches in NEMA 3R enclosure located on the exterior of the building or in wet locations. E. Provide quick -make and quick -break operating handle. Provide mechanisms which are an integral part of the box. F. Provide lugs U.L. listed for copper cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely mount safety switches in accordance with the N.E.C. Provide all mounting materials and mount safety switches vertically. 16170 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. In general, safety switches must be mounted on an independent and separate support system, not on the equipment being served Where such an independent support would require penetrating or resting on a roof, it is preferable to mount on the equipment. In no case, however, may the switch interfere with access to or operation of the equipment, nor shall the switch be located within the significant impact zone of a flue or other high temperature component. END OF SECTION 16170 - 2 W /WW Lab -RR SECTION 16195 CONTACTORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide lighting contactors as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Approved per UL 508 and designed in accordance with NFPA 1052 -211B. B. UL listed. C. Conform to the latest NEMA Standards. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. C. General Electric. D. 1TE Siemens. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop submittals for contactors. B. Provide shop submittal which includes the following information: 1. Voltage and ampere rating. 2. Wiring diagram. 3. Enclosure type. 4. Coil voltage. PART 2- PRODIJCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Continuously current rated. B. Capable of making and breaking all cases of loads without the aid of auxiliary arcing contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. C. Industrial duty rated for applications to 600 volts maximum. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Totally closed, double break, silver to silver power contacts. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. B. Provide terminals with straight through wiring and accept copper wire. C. Provide switches or provisions for switches as indicated on the drawings. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide contactor in NEMA Type 1 enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 16195 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W /WW Lab -RR SECTION 16430 FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide and install fuses as shown on the Drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Conform with the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, NEMA and be UL listed. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Bussman. B. Gould. C. Little Fuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Time Delay/Dual Element (Class R) fuses 1 /10 through 600 amps. B. Time Delay/Dual Element (Class RK5) fuses 1 /10 through 200 amps, where noted. C. Time Delay (Class L) fuses 601 - 6000 amps. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. B. Test and inspection shall be made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning, tightenine and review of all electrical connections and inspection of all grounding conductors. C. All fuses shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mains, Feeders and Branch Circuits: Circuit 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting dual- element, time delay fuses. All dual - element fuses shall have separate overload and short- circuit elements. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of ten (10) seconds, with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK- 1 (or RK -5 where specifically permitted). They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. 2. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting time delay fuses. Fuse link shall be pure silver links (99.9 %) pure), to limit the short circuit current let through valves to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. Fuses shall be time -delay and must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of four (4) seconds with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL 16430 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Spares: Class L. "CAUTION" labels to alert the end user of engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment, shall be field installed by the Electrical Contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. 3. Motor Circuits - All individual motors rated for 200 horsepower or less shall be protected by time delay /dual - element fuses. The fuses for motors shall be installed in ratings approximately 125% of motor full load current, except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to a full speed quickly. such as large fans. Motors shall be protected by fuses of the rating shown on the Drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class RK -1 (or RK -5 where specifically permitted) Dual Element/Time Delay. "CAUTION" labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment shall be field installed by the Electrical Contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. 1. Upon completion of the building, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with spare fuses, as identified in Specification Section 16010, 3.03, J. END OF SECTION 16430 - 2 W/WW Lab -RR PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 16450 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code and as hereinafter specified and shown on the Drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide copper clad 3/4" x 10 ft. - 0" long ground rods, appurtenances, bonding plates, clamps, connectors and grounding conductors as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Properly ground all service equipment conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment, motor frames, fixtures, etc., and the grounded circuit conductor in accordance with the latest issue of the National Electrical Code. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc., as required for complete grounding. Route ground conductors to provide the shortest and most direct path to the ground electrode system Bond conduit if made of current conducting material. All ground connections shall have clean contact surfaces. Bond the service equipment to a grounding electrode as shown on the Drawings. B. Provide a grounding type bushing for all feeder and branch circuit conduits which do not have a grounding conductor and individually bond this raceway to the enclosure's ground bus or lug. C. Provide a grounding type bushing on the end of each isolated section of metal conduit and band the conduit to the equipment grounding conductor, or using a conductor of the same size, bond directly to the equipment ground buss of the equipment at the end of the inn. D. Make single or dual connections to ground rods, plates, and other buried connections by the exothermic process (Cadweld) or Bumdy Hyground TM Compression Systems and "hammer tested" to insure that a good bond has been made. Alternatively all below grade compression grounding systems must meet all UL467, CSA, IEEE837 test requirements and conform to the National Electrical Code Standards. The material at the connectors shall be pure wrought copper extrusions, rod and seamless tubing and be identical material to the conductor. Connectors must be of heavy duty design and be of range taking design to accept conductor ranges of #6 solid to 500 Kcmil plus 1/2 ", 5/8 ", 3/4" and 1" ground rods. Compression connectors need to be compressed with system engineered tooling which makes a circumferential or round crimp. Hex crimp is not acceptable due to sharp flashes and spurs that may occur. Each connector must be clearly marked with catalog number, conductor size and installation die information. Inspection ports must be provided on lug terminations and splices. The system must emboss all the appropriate die index number on all connectors after completion of the crimp. Connectors must be prefilled with penetrox copper type oxidation inhibitor and be individually sealed in clear polyethylene sheet to keep out dirt and contamination. E. Drive grounding electrodes as required. Where rock is encountered, grounding plates of copper, 1 /4 -in. x 24 -in. x 24 -in, may be used in lieu of grounding rods. Plates must be installed at 36" minimum below finished grade. F. Provide a grounding terminal pad in all panelboards, switchboards, and other electrical equipment to be connected to the main service entrance with a copper ground conductor. G. Directly ground to the work piece welding machines used in construction. The use of the building or equipment steel or conduits of any kind as a common ground point is not allowed under any 16450 - 1 conditions. Contractor is responsible for any electrical pieces of equipment damaged by not using the welder grounding method described above. I-I. Provide a green insulated grounding conductor in all conduit serving receptacles and/or equipment. Refer to panelboard schedules for sizing. 3.02 TESTING A. Following completion of installation, test system ground for continuity and test resistance to ground by "fall of potential" method and all feeders or sub - feeders with appropriate meggers, or other approved instruments and methods, to determine ground and insulation resistance values. B. Submit logs of values obtained, nameplate data of instruments used and instrument calibration data prior to final inspection. Instruments used are subject to approval. END OF SECTION 16450 - 2 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16460 TRANSFORMER DRY TYPE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide dry type transformers as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Underwriters' Laboratories listed, where listing applies. B. Designed to meet applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute (ANSI C89.1), National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA ST1 -4), and Underwriters' Laboratories. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. B. Square D. C. ITE Siemens. D. General Electric. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The shop drawings shall contain the following information: PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 1. KVA. 2. Voltage, primary and secondary. 3. Dimensions and weight. 4. Sound level. 5. Mounting (wall or floor). 6. Taps (FCBN and FCAN). A. Transformers must be constructed with grain oriented magnetic circuit steel to minimize no load losses and exciting current and inter - laminar vibrations. B. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operations at rated KVA, twenty-four hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as defined in IEEE #65. C. All materials used in the transformer shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. D. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS (15KVA and ABOVE) A. Provide four 2 -1/2 percent taps FCBN and two 2 -1/2 percent taps FCAN on the primary side. Taps shall be brought to a terminal board accessible by removing a panel. B. Provide conventional dry type transfomrers suitable for indoor service and enclosed in a sheet metal housing. Housing shall be equipped for conduit connections. Transformers installed outdoors or in wet locations shall be provided with weather shield and NEMA 3R rated enclosure. 16460 - 1 C. The core -coil assembly shall be designed and mechanically braced to withstand short circuit tests as defined in NEMA TR 27 by the use of full scale testing. The coil construction and mechanical bracing members shall be such as to prevent mechanical degradation of the insulation structures during short circuit. D. Transformer case shall be of the self - bracing type and shall provide drip -proof characteristics. Enclosures shall be provided with lifting holes to facilitate handling and installation without removal of any of the enclosure components. E. The following tests must be given all units at the factory: 1. Applied voltage test (1 minute) - 600 Volt Class - 4 KV. 2. Induced voltage test - 2 times normal for 7200 cycles. 3. Ratio and phase relation. Certified test reports on electrically duplicated units shall be submitted with approval drawings certifying that the following tests have been performed on the first rating of any design: No -load losses, total losses, applied voltage, induced voltage, sound level, impulse test, and temperature rise. F. Provide an insulation system classification of 150 degree C temperature rise above 40 degree C ambient. Provide insulating materials in accordance with NEMA ST20 -1972 standards for 220 degree C U.L. component recognized insulation system. G. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 degree C above a 40 degree C ambient. H. Maximum sound level shall be as follows: 0 -9KVA 40 db PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 51 -150 KVA 50 db 301 -500 KVA60 db 10 -50 KVA 45 db 151 -300 KVA 55 db A. Provide 36" long (maximum), liquid -tight (for outdoor or wet locations) or Greenfield (for indoor or dry locations) conduit connections to the transformers. Provide cut sections of Korfund "Elasti -rib" for all contact areas between wall and floor and mount in such a manner as to reduce sound transmission. All transformers, suspended from structure shall utilize spring isolators to minimize vibration transfer to the structure. B. Any transformer causing objectionable sound will be required to be replaced. C. Set taps under load conditions for correct voltage. D. Mount all transformers plumb and rigid. E. Maintain the same clearances and spacing as specified by the manufacturer and NEC Section 450. Incorporate these dimensions into electrical room and closet. 114" scale drawings are to be submitted to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 16460 - 2 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide branch circuit panelboards as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Provide UL label. B. Comply with applicable standards of NEMA and the NEC. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. C. ITE Siemens. D. General Electric. E. All equipment within panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop submittal for each branch circuit panelboard. B. Provide shop submittal which includes the following: 1. Cabinet 3. Busing a. Housing b. Trim c. Outline dimensions d. Available spaces e. Panelboard mounting Circuit breakers a. Frame size b. Trip setting c. Class d. Interrupting rating in RMS Symmetrical amperes e. Mounting f. Voltage rating a. Ampere rating b. Material c. Incoming cable lug size d. Bus bracing 4. Maintenance manuals, installation manuals, renewal parts, recommended spare parts (10 copies of each). 5. Manufacturer's catalog numbers. 16471 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6. Other descriptive data as may be required. PART 2- I'RODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Busing 1. Provide tin plated aluminum or plated copper busing. 2. Provide full size insulated neutral bus bar. C. Interiors 3. Provide bracing equal to the rated interrupting capacity of the smallest circuit breaker in the panelboard. Refer to drawings for minimum bracing. 4. Provide full height phase busing. Reduction is not allowed. 5. Make all bus and stub connections of such a size as to limit the temperature to 50 degrees C. when carrying full load current. 6. Arrange bus bar taps for sequence sharing of branch circuit devices. 7. Provide suitable lug on neutral busing for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 8. Provide a tin- plated aluminum or plated copper grounding terminal pad for the equipment grounding system Grounding pad shall be separate from the insulated neutral bus. Ground pad or bar shall be copper. 9. Equip all spaces with busing and mounting straps for the maximum device that can be fitted into space. 10. Provide mechanical (bolt type) wire connectors. B. Labeling Provide typewritten directory card mounted under a transparent protective cover, set in a metal frame on the inside of the cabinet door. Provide directory with the following information: a. Panel designation b. Point from which it is fed. c. Individual branch circuit identification (as shown on the panel schedules) load served and location. CIRCUIT LABELING SHALL AGREE WITH EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 2. Provide manufacturer's nameplate affixed to the front of the panelboard containing the following: a. Manufacturers name and address. b. Manufacturers panelboard type designation. c. Manufacturer's identification reference. d. Voltage rating. e. Continuous current rating. f. Frequency rating. Design interiors so that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removine the main bus connectors. 16471 -2 2. Design interior so that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping. 3. Arrange branch circuit using double row construction. 4. Branch circuit numbering by manufacturer. D. Enclosure 1. Make enclosure from galvanized code gauge steel. 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide general purpose enclosures. Mounting as indicated on Drawings. 3. Provide minimum four interior mounting studs. 4. Maximum height 90 inches. E. Trim 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Provide hinged door covering all circuit breakers. Door shall not uncover any live parts. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. Provide a flush, stainless steel cylinder type lock with catch and spring loaded door pull. Key locks alike. 2. Fabricate trims from code gauge sheet steel. 3. Trims for flush panels shall overlap box a minimum of 3/4 inch all around. Trims for surface panels shall have the same width and height as the box. 4. Fasten trims with quarter turn clamps. 5. Paint trim with manufacturer's standard gray enamel over a rust resistant phosphatizing primer. A. Provide circuit breakers with frame size, trip settings and UL listed RMS Symmetrical ampere interrupting rating shown on the Drawings. B. Provide molded case, bolt -on type. C. Provide thermal magnetic type circuit breakers employing quick -make, quick -break mechanisms for manual operation as well as automatic operation. D. Indicate automatic tripping by the breaker handle assuming a distinctive position from manual "ON" and "OFF'. E. Provide multi -pole breakers with a common trip. Tie handles for multi -pole breakers without common trip are not permitted. F. Minimum size circuit breaker shall be 20 amps unless otherwise noted. G. Provide HACR rated circuit breakers for air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment having motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breaker. H. Provide HID rated circuit breakers for service to HID (high intensity discharge) and fluorescent lighting systems. L Provide only full one inch 11 ") height breakers; half height or tandem two (2) to a pole breakers are not acceptable. 16471 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 3.- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install box, trim and interior rigid and plumb. Center interior with opening. B. Install panelboards in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the Drawing. Install complete with all required electrical connections. C. Unless otherwise noted, install panelboards with the top of the trim 6 ft. 0 in. above finished floor. D. Field check panelboard loading and reconnect circuits as required to provide balanced phase and line loads. E. Neatly bundle, route and support cables installed in wiring gutters of panelboards. Minimum bending radii as recommended by die wire and cable manufacturer. Install three (3) 3/4" conduits from top of flush mounted panelboards to accessible void above ceiling. Cap end of conduits above ceiling. G. All recessed panels are to be installed in six inch (6 ") minimum wall thickness. Coordinate clear dimensions with Architect and General Contractor prior to rough -in. END OF SECTION 16471 - 4 W /WW Lab -RR SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all lighting fixtures and equipment as specified in the fixture schedule. Include all necessary accessories and appurtenances required for a complete and operating system whether or not specifically shown. 1.02 STANDARD A. Provide all materials and accessories, whether specifically described or not, of the best grade of the commercial manufacturer. Provide first class workmanship in every respect. B. Provide all lighting fixtures with Underwriters' label and manufacturer's label. Attachment of U.L. labels after delivery of fixtures is not acceptable. C. Manufacture all lighting fixtures in accordance with the National Electrical Code. D. Ballasts 1. Provide ballasts for fluorescent lamps which meet U.L. specifications for Class P listing, applicable ANSI Standard Ballast Specifications, and certified by C.B.M. 2. Provide ballasts for HID lamps which comply with the UL Standard for High - Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts. E. Provide lamps manufactured by General Electric, North American Phillips or Sylvania. Unless otherwise indicated, lamp designations shown on the fixture schedule are General Electric. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Lithonia B. LSI C. Fail Safe D. Nulite E. Hubbell F. Marco G. Roberts H. Siltron I. Spalding 7. Morlite K. Columbia L. Prescolite M. General Electric N. Daybrite O. Capri P. Omega Q. Exide R. Others as scheduled or nosed 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop drawings for each fixture. B. Provide shop drawing which includes the following information: 1. Fixture type per the fixture schedule. 2. Manufacturer of the fixture. 16510 - 1 1 1 1 1 1_ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Physical dimensions of the fixture. 4. Manufacturer's standard finish. 5. Fixture output distribution curves with utilization parameters. 6. Ballast temperature rating, voltage, wattage, and manufacturer. 7. Material type and thickness of lens. 8. Accessories for installation such as swivel hangers. 9. Number and type of lamps. 1.05 PRODUCTS STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect fixtures delivered to the job site from the entrance of water and dust at all times. Replace fixtures damaged by improper handling or storage. FART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide all fixtures as called for in the schedules complete with lamps. B. Provide manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise noted. C. Design all recessed or semi- recessed fixtures compatible with ceilings as installed. Provide frames where required for proper installation. D. Furnish complete, all fixtures requiring end caps, mounting spacers or other necessary items whether the catalog number shown includes such items or not. E. Conceal all fixture parts within the fixture construction. F. Provide safety chains on all high -bay fixtures whether the catalog number shown includes it or not PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set luminaries true, free of bah leaks, warps, dents or other irregularities. Provide the length of stems as required to hang all luminaries level and in the same plane. Verify the type of all ceilings before bidding, and provide fixtures and mountings to suit. Mount all fixtures at a position and height to clear equipment, ductwork. piping, etc., in mechanical rooms, storage rooms, etc. B. Support luminaries only from structural elements which are capable of carrying the total weight. Mount all lighting fixtures rigid with no rocking action. C. The locations of all lighting. fixtures as shown are approximate. It is understood that they are subject to such modifications as may be found necessary or desirable at the time of installation in order to meet field conditions. Make such changes without extra charge; however, obtain approval from Engineer before any work is started which involves such modifications. D. Install ballasts and fixtures in accordance with the NEC and ANSI Standards. E. Adjust all floodlights and spotlights to the satisfaction of the Engineer. F. Connect all exit and emergency lighting fixtures to the nearest unswitched circuit or the nearest emergency circuit. G. Provide and install necessary hardware and accessories to maintain 1.5 inches clearance from combustible material on all light fxnues with ballast. H. Provide all exit signs with required directional arrows, to indicate direction of egress travel. I. Fixtures shall NOT be daisy chained together. 16510 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 W/WW Lab -RR SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all exterior lighting fixtures and equipment as specified in the fixture schedule. Include all necessary accessories and appurtenances required for a complete and operating system whether or not specifically shown. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Provide all materials and accessories, whether specifically described or not, of the best grade of commercial manufacturer. Provide first class workmanship in every respect. B. Provide all lighting fixtures with Underwriters' label and manufacturer's label. Attachment of U.L. labels after delivery_of fixtures will not be acceptable. C. Manufacture lighting fixtures in accordance with the National Electrical Code. D. Provide ballasts for HID lamps which comply with the U.L. Standard for High - Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts. E. Provide lamps manufactured by General Electric, North American Phillips or Sylvania. Unless otherwise indicated, lamp designations shown on the fixture schedule are General Electric. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Lithonia B. LSI C. Fail Safe D. Hubbell E. Marco F. Spalding G. Morlite H. Columbia 1. Prescolite 1. General Electric K. Daybrite L. Capri M. Omega N. EMCO O. Others as scheduled or noted 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Engineer shop drawings for each fixture. B. Provide shop drawing which includes the following information: I. Fixture type per the fixture schedule. 2. Manufacturer of the fixture. 3. Physical dimensions of the fixture. 4. Manufacturer's standard finish. 5. Lamp type recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Fixture output distribution curves and photometrics. 7. Ballast temperature rating, voltage, wattage, and manufacturer. 8. Material type of lens 16520 - 1 C. Furnish structural engineer with approved shop drawings on pole, post and ballard light fixtures for purpose of designing fixture base. .05 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect fixtures delivered to the job site from the entrance of water and dust at all times. Replace fixtures damaged by improper handling or storage. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide luminaire complete with the fixture housing, refractor, lamp, and ballast. B. Provide type, wattage, and voltage lamp designated on Drawings. C. Where indicated on Drawings, provide parking lot poles and floodlight poles. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Orient lighting fixtures as shown on Drawings. B. Adjust all floodlights and spotlights to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Coordinate exact location of lighting fixtures with Architect prior to rough -in. 3.02 CLEAN UP A. Leave all fixtures and poles in clean condition, free of dirt and defects. END OF SECTION 16520 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WJWW Lab-RR SECTION 16740 EMPTY RACEWAY ROUGH -IN PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories and material required for the rough - in of empty raceway systems in accordance with the specifications and drawings. 13. Rough -in raceway sections for indicated devices and outlets in all walls and floors sufficient to facilitate installation of the following systems without cutting or otherwise damaging walls, ceilings or floors installed in this contract: 1. Communications 2. Data 3. Security 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct each item of equipment, including parts and accessories, in a workmanlike manner, using new materials or the best quality obtainable for the purpose intended. Design and build materials in accordance with the best practices of the electrical industry. B. Comply with all requirements of serving utility. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Interior conduit systems shall have runs less than 100 feet from point to point. B. Provide accessible pull boxes when necessary. Provide blank covers for all outlet boxes, unless otherwise rioted. C. Provide mud ring in wall at 16" AFF (UON) and string to above ceiling in non -rated walls or walls without insulation or sound barrier. Provide outlet box in wall at 16" AFF (UON) and conduit with string to above ceiling in rated walls and walls with insulation or sound barrier. Provide insulated bushing on end of conduits. Conduits routed to above inaccessible ceilings shall be extended, as required, to above accessible ceilings. END OF SECTION 16740 -